Catálogo Completo Contatores

Main Catalogue Contactors
Motor Protection
Accessories
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Low Voltage Products
Main Catalogue
Contactors
o
Motor Protection
o
Accessories
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB reserves the right to modify the characteristics of the products described in this catalogue.
The information given is not contractual. For further details please contact the ABB company marketing these products in your country.
Product Range
A, AE, BC, EH, EK Contactors
N and KC Contactor Relays
Accessories
for A, AE, BC, EH, EK Contactors
and N, KC Contactor Relays
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays
E Electronic O/L Relays
General Technical Data
Standards, Approvals
Terminal Marking and Positioning
Star-Delta Starter Diagrams
Dimensions
Reference Index
List of Addresses
IEC
VDE
UTE
# #
#
#
#
# #
#
# #
#
# #
# #
B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors - Reversing Contactors
K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Conformity with Standards
The standards and specifications cited for different types of devices, e.g. IEC, BS, VDE, NFC, EN
Publications, should be considered as statements of conformity in the sense of article 10 of the
E.E.C. Low Voltage Directive of 19 February 1973.
There is no label on ABB L.V. control apparatus identifying a national certification organization.
The ABB logo figuring on devices, labels and documents certifies the conformity of devices with
respect to the applicable standards.
CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product. It must
not be confused with a mark of quality.
CE marking is part of an exclusively administrative procedure designed to guarantee the free
movement of the product inside the European Community.
However, for some countries and some ship certification and classification organizations,
certification is compulsory. In this case, the mark (or logo) of the given organization figures on the
devices if so required (see pages 7/4 and 7/5).
Files pertaining to certifications and approvals obtained are available on request.
Liability
The devices in this catalogue do not endanger safety when they are installed, mounted and used
according to their application and in compliance with the installation rules and standards which
apply to them.
Quality
ABB has set up a quality assurance organisation in compliance with the requirements of
ISO 9001 standard.
ABB factories are ISO 9001 approved.
ABB Low Voltage Products meet with a high quality standard. It is developed, manufactured and
tested under the sole responsibility of ABB.
In compliance with the regulations set out by the ISO 9000 series standard, ABB sets up and
manages the procedures and files relating to product quality and actions having an effect on
quality.
Guarantee
The information contained in this catalogue reflects the current state of our knowledge and aims
to present our products and their possible applications. Thus, the information does not guarantee
certain specific characteristics of products or their aptitude for a specific utilization. All filed legal
patents or industrial property rights must be respected.
Conformity with Standards,
Liability, Quality and
Guarantee
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
The currents given below concern standard, 1 500 r.p.m. 50 Hz, three-phase cage motors.
These values are for your information and may vary according to the motor manufacturer and depending on the number of poles.
Motor power motor nominal current at:
220-230 V 240 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 600 V 660-690 V
380-400 V
kW PS = hp A A A A A A A A
0.06 1/12 0.38 0.35 0.22 0.20 0.19 0.16 0.12
0.09 1/8 0.55 0.50 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.24 0.21
0.12 1/6 0.76 0.68 0.42 0.40 0.37 0.33 0.27
0.18 1/4 1.1 1 0.64 0.60 0.55 0.46 0.40
0.25 1/3 1.4 1.38 0.88 0.85 0.76 0.59 0.56
0.37 1/2 2.1 1.93 1.22 1.15 1.06 0.85 0.77 0.7
0.55 3/4 2.7 2.3 1.5 1.40 1.25 1.20 1.02 0.9
0.75 1 3.3 3.1 2 2 1.67 1.48 1.22 1.1
1.1 1.5 4.9 4.1 2.6 2.5 2.26 2.1 1.66 1.5
1.5 2 6.2 5.6 3.5 3.5 3.03 2.6 2.22 2
2.2 3 8.7 7.9 5 5 4.31 3.8 3.16 2.9
2.5 3.4 9.8 8.9 5.7 5.5 4.9 4.3 3.59 3.3
3 4 11.6 10.6 6.6 6.5 5.8 5.1 4.25 3.5
3.7 5 14.2 13 8.2 7.5 7.1 6.2 5.2 4.4
4 5.5 15.3 14 8.5 8.4 7.6 6.5 5.6 4.9
5 6.8 18.9 17.2 10.5 10 9.4 8.1 6.9 6
5.5 7.5 20.6 18.9 11.5 11 10.3 8.9 7.5 6.7
6.5 8.8 23.7 21.8 13.8 12.5 12 10.4 8.7 8.1
7.5 10 27.4 24.8 15.5 14 13.5 11.9 9.9 9
8 11 28.8 26.4 16.7 15.4 14.4 12.7 10.6 9.7
9 12.5 32 29.3 18.3 17 15.8 13.9 11.6 10.6
11 15 39.2 35.3 22 21 19.3 16.7 14.1 13
12.5 17 43.8 40.2 25 23 21.9 19 16.1 15
15 20 52.6 48.2 30 28 26.3 22.5 19.3 17.5
18.5 25 64.9 58.7 37 35 32 28.5 23.5 21
20 27 69.3 63.4 40 37 34.6 30.6 25.4 23
22 30 75.2 68 44 40 37.1 33 27.2 25
25 34 84.4 77.2 50 47 42.1 38 30.9 28
30 40 101 92.7 60 55 50.1 44 37.1 33
37 50 124 114 72 66 61.9 54 45.4 42
40 54 134 123 79 72 67 60 49.1 44
45 60 150 136 85 80 73.9 64.5 54.2 49
51 70 168 154 97 90 83.8 73.7 61.4 56
55 75 181 166 105 96 90.3 79 66.2 60
59 80 194 178 112 105 96.9 85.3 71.1 66
75 100 245 226 140 135 123 106 90.3 82
80 110 260 241 147 138 131 112 96.3 86
90 125 292 268 170 165 146 128 107 98
100 136 325 297 188 182 162 143 119 107
110 150 358 327 205 200 178 156 131 118
129 175 420 384 242 230 209 184 153 135
132 180 425 393 245 242 214 186 157 140
140 190 449 416 260 250 227 200 167 145
147 200 472 432 273 260 236 207 173 152
160 220 502 471 295 280 256 220 188 170
180 245 578 530 333 320 289 254 212 190
184 250 590 541 340 325 295 259 217 200
200 270 626 589 370 340 321 278 235 215
220 300 700 647 408 385 353 310 260 235
250 340 803 736 460 425 401 353 295 268
257 350 826 756 475 450 412 363 302 280
295 400 948 868 546 500 473 416 348 320
315 430 990 927 580 535 505 445 370 337
355 480 1080 1010 636 580 549 483 405 366
400 545 1250 1130 710 650 611 538 450 410
450 610 1410 1270 800 740 688 608 508 460
475 645 1490 1340 850 780 730 645 540 485
500 680 1570 1420 890 830 770 680 565 510
560 760 1750 1580 1000 920 860 760 630 570
600 810 1080 990 920 810 680 610
670 910 1200 1100 1030 910 760 680
Motor Nominal Powers and
Currents
0/0
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Coil Voltage Code for
Completing Order Codes
A.C. Coils
Types of contactors: Code
N, A 9 to A 110, GA 75
UA 26 to UA 110 and UA16-R to UA75-R
V (50 HZ) V (60 HZ) R I I . .
24 24 8 1
26 28 1 6
28 32 1 7
42 42 8 2
42 48 2 0
48 48 8 3
60 60 7 3
100 100 - 110 7 4
105 110 - 127 2 6
110 110 - 120 8 4
110 - 115 115 - 127 8 9
120 140 2 9
125 - 127 150 3 0
175 208 3 4
190 220 3 6
200 200 - 220 7 5
210 240 4 0
220 - 230 230 - 240 8 0
230 - 240 240 - 260 8 8
230 - 240 277 4 2
380 - 400 400 - 415 8 5
400 - 415 415 - 440 8 6
400 440 5 0
400 - 415 480 5 1
415 - 440 440 - 460 8 7 (1)
440 500 5 3
500 600 5 5
550 5 6
660 - 690 5 8
(1) Unsuitable for 3 or 4-pole A 45 - A 75 contactors.
Standard voltages Code
Types of contactors V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) I I
EH 145 - EH 300
24 A A
EK 110 - EK 210
24 A B
48 A C
48 A D
110 A E
110 120 A F
127 A G
208 A Z
190 220 A H
240 A K
EH 145 - EH 800 220 - 230 * A L
EK 110 - EK 550 230 - 240 A M
380 A N
380 - 400 440 A P
400 - 415 A R
480 A S
440 A T
500 A U
600 A V
* Read 240V 60Hz for EH 370 ... EH 800 and EK 370 ... EK 550.
Dual frequency coils
2 auxiliary contact blocks maximum per contactor, ambient
temperature 55C and mounting positions
2 and 6 excluded.
Code
Types of contactors V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) I I
110 110 - 120 E F
EH 145 110 - 115 115 - 127 E G
EH 370 - EH 800 220 220 - 240 E L
EK 370 - EK 550 220 - 230 230 - 255 E M
380 380 - 415 E P
380 - 400 400 - 440 E R
0/1
Multi-frequency coils Code
Types of contactors V (40 - 400 Hz) I I
110 - 120 E F
115 - 127 E G
EH 175 - EH 300 220 - 230 E L
EK 110 - EK 210 230 - 240 E M
380 - 400 E P
400 - 415 E R
Dual voltage coils for Code
N, A 9, A 12 and A 16 contactors
V (50 HZ) V (60 HZ) R I I . .
230/400 6 2
230/400 6 3
D.C. Coils
Types of contactors:
KC, BC - and AE -, GAE 75
KC, BC - AE -, GAE 75
V.d.c Code Code
R I . . I R I I . .
12 0 . . 7 8 0
24 0 . . 1 8 1
42 0 . . 2 8 2
48 1 . . 6 8 3
50 1 . . 7 2 1
60 0 . . 3 8 4
75 2 . . 2 8 5
110 0 . . 4 8 6
125 2 . . 7 8 7
220 0 . . 5 8 8
240 3 . . 3 8 9
250 3 . . 4 3 8
Code
Types of contactors V d.c. I I
12 (2) D A
24 D B
36 D C
EH 145 - EH 800
48 D D
60 D T
EK 110 - EK 550
75 D G
110 D E
125 D U
220 D F
(2) Unsuitable for EH 370 - EH 800, EK 370 and EK 550 contactors.
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
General Data
Ordering Details
When placing an order give either the Order Code or Type.
In most cases these are completed with other references, e.g. a contactor's coil voltage. This is why the order codes and types figuring in the "Ordering
Details" tables have boxes I to be completed.
Packaging
G Individual standard packaging
Contactors, contactor relays, thermal overload relays and other basic products are supplied in individual packaging. Some small contactors (e.g.
B6 and B7 - Section 6) or accessories are in individual batches of "n" pieces as indicated in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details"
table.
The weight and order code always correspond to a single part.
Other products are supplied as a "set" and are thus marked in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details" table. In this case, the weight and
order code correspond to a set.
G Collective packaging
To limit the amount of wasted packaging, simplify handling and checking of deliveries, we offer the collective packaging solution.
The weight and order code correspond to a single part.
Products chosen for this type of packaging are detailed below.
0/2
Type Order code Product Pack
ing
Weight
features
Clearly marked to be completed with
coil voltage: I coil voltage: I I
see below See below See page : pieces kg
4-pole - a.c. operated, 1 stack contactor relays
N 22 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 22 3/6 10 0.34
N 31 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 31 3/6 10 0.34
N 40 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 40 3/6 10 0.34
8-pole - a.c. operated, 2 stack contactor relays
N 44 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 44 3/6 10 0.40
N 53 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 53 3/6 10 0.40
N 62 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 62 3/6 10 0.40
N 71 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 71 3/6 10 0.40
N 80 E I 1SBH 14 1001 T I I 80 3/6 10 0.40
3-pole - a.c. operated contactors
A 9-30-10 I 1SBL 14 1001 T I I 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 9-30-01 I 1SBL 14 1001 T I I 01 2/12 10 0.34
A 9-30-22 I 1SBL 14 1001 T I I 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 9-30-32 I 1SBL 14 1001 T I I 32 2/12 10 0.40
A 12-30-10 I 1SBL 16 1001 T I I 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 12-30-01 I 1SBL 16 1001 T I I 01 2/12 10 0.34
A 12-30-22 I 1SBL 16 1001 T I I 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 12-30-32 I 1SBL 16 1001 T I I 32 2/12 10 0.40
A 16-30-10 I 1SBL 18 1001 T I I 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 16-30-01 I 1SBL 18 1001 T I I 01 2/12 10 0.34
A 16-30-22 I 1SBL 18 1001 T I I 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 16-30-32 I 1SBL 18 1001 T I I 32 2/12 10 0.40
A 26-30-10 I 1SBL 24 1001 T I I 10 2/12 10 0.60
A 26-30-01 I 1SBL 24 1001 T I I 01 2/12 10 0.60
4-pole - a.c. operated contactors
A 9-40-00 I 1SBL 14 1201 T I I 00 2/16 10 0.34
A 16-40-00 I 1SBL 18 1201 T I I 00 2/16 10 0.34
A 26-40-00 I 1SBL 24 1201 T I I 00 2/16 10 0.61
Replacement coils for N, A 9, A 12 and A 16 contactors
ZA 16 1SBN 15 1410 T I I 06 4/29 10 0.08
Type Order code Product Pack
ing
Weight
features
See page : pieces kg
Auxiliary contact blocks
CA 5-10 1SBN 01 0010 W1010 4/4 60 0.014
CA 5-01 1SBN 01 0010 W1001 4/4 60 0.014
CAL 5-11 1SBN 01 0020 W1011 4/4 100 0.050
Interface block
RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 T1000 4/16 10 0.050
TE5S-24 1SBN 02 0010 T1001 4/6 10 0.080
TE5S-120 1SBN 02 0010 T1002 4/6 10 0.080
TE5S-240 1SBN 02 0010 T1003 4/6 10 0.080
TE5S-440 1SBN 02 0010 T1004 4/6 10 0.080
Additional code for coil voltages
A.C. Voltages
V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) code I I . .
24 24 8 1
42 42 8 2
48 48 8 3
110 110 - 120 8 4
110 - 115 115 - 127 8 9
220 - 230 230 - 240 8 0
230 - 240 240 - 260 8 8
380 - 400 400 - 415 8 5
400 - 415 415 - 440 8 6
415 - 440 440 - 460 8 7
1
1/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Product Range
Contents
Product Range Presentation
Block Contactors and O/L Relays ................................................................................... 1/2, 1/3
Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors and O/L Relays ................................. 1/4, 1/5
Contactor Relays and Mini Contactor Relays ........................................................................ 1/6
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
1/2 Low Voltage Products
Block Contactors Pages
G 3-pole
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/12, 2/13
BC, AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/14, 2/15
TBC, TAE Contactors d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 2/24
AF Contactors, a.c./d.c. operated with controlled supply 2/27
EHL Magnetically Latched Contactors, a.c. or d.c. operated 2/29
G 4-pole
A, EK Contactors, a.c. operated 2/16
BC, AE, EK Contactors, d.c. operated 2/17
TBC, TAE Contactors, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 2/24
AF Contactors, a.c./d.c. operated, with controlled supply 2/27
EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors, a.c. or d.c. operated 2/29
G 3-pole
UA Contactors, a.c. operated 2/21
UA..-R Contactors, a.c. operated 2/22
G 1-pole
GA Contactor, a.c. operated 2/28
GAE Contactor, d.c. operated 2/28
G 3-pole
BC, AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/462/48
G 4-pole
A, EK Contactors, a.c. operated 2/46, 2/47
BC, AE, EK Contactors, d.c. operated 2/462/48
Block Contactors
Section 2
a
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
a
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
d
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
d
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Section
Section
Index
1
1/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Block Contactors
Overload Relays
Block Contactors Pages
G 3-pole
A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
AE Contactors, d.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
G 4-pole
A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
AE Contactors, d.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
G 3-pole
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/49
AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/49
G 3-pole
Overload Relays Pages
G 3-pole
E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19
T, TA Thermal O/L Relays 5/45/6
Section 2
Section 5
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
l
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
l
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e
t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e
t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e
s
l
i
p
-r
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
3
-p
h
a
s
e
s
l
i
p
-r
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
M
o
t
o
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
Section
Section
Index
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section 6
Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors
Mini Contactors,
Compact Reversing Contactors Pages
G 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/2
BC 6, BC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/2
TBC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 6/8
G 4-pole
G 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/3
VB 6A, VB 7A Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/4
VBC 6, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/3
VBC 6A, VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/4
Mini Contactors,
G 3-pole
G 4-pole
G 3-pole
Section 6
d
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
d
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
a
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
a
.
c
.

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Section
Section
Index
1
1/5
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors
Overload Relay
Section 6
Section 6
l
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
l
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
M
o
t
o
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
L
C
's

O
u
t
p
u
t
P
L
C
's

O
u
t
p
u
t
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
Mini Contactors,
G 3-pole
G 4-pole
G 3-pole
G 3-pole
BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/5
G 3-pole
B 6S, B 7S Mini Contactors for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/5
Overload Relay Pages
G 3-pole
T 7 DU Thermal Overload Relay 6/17
Section
Section
Index
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section 6
Contactors Relays
Mini Contactor Relays
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Section 3 Contactor Relays Pages
G 4-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6
KC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7
G 8-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6
KC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7
Mini Contactor Relays Pages
G 4-pole
K 6 Mini Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 6/6
KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
K 6S Mini Contactor Relay for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/6
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g
Section
Section
Index
2/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
A, AE, BC, EH and EK
Contactors
Ratings 9 to 800 A
Contents
Selection Tables
A and EH 3-pole Contactors ................................................................................................. 2/2
A and EK 4-pole Contactors ............................................................................................... 2/4
Star-delta Starting ............................................................................................................. 2/31
Description and Mounting of Accessories
A and AE Contactors .......................................................................................................... 2/6
EH and EK Contactors ........................................................................................................ 2/8
BC Contactors ................................................................................................................... 2/10
Ordering Details
A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................................ 2/12
EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/13
BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/14
AE and EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ................................................................ 2/15
A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................... 2/16
BC, AE and EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated.......................................................... 2/17
A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - A.C. Operated .............................. 2/18
BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated............... 2/19
3-pole Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching - A.C. Operated ................................ 2/ 20
UA 3-pole contactors .................................................................................................... 2/ 21
UA..-R 3-pole contactors ............................................................................................... 2/ 22
TBC and TAE Contactors - D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range ..................... 2/24
AF Contactors with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C. Operated .............................................. 2/26
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching ................................................ 2/28
EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors - A.C./D.C. Operated ............................. 2/29
EH Mechanically Interlocked or Mechanically Latched Contactors .................................. 2/30
Technical Data
A, EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated ....................................................................... 2/32
BC, AE and EH, EK Contactors - D.C. Operated.............................................................. 2/38
Lighting Circuit Switching .................................................................................................. 2/44
D.C. Circuit Switching ......................................................................................................... 2/46
LV/LV 3-phase Transformer Switching ............................................................................. 2/49
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors .................................................................................... 2/50
Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in Contactor Control Circuit ........................ 2/52
Parallel Connection of Main Poles - Temporary or Intermittent Duty ................................ 2/54
Contactor Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability ................................................. 2/55
Additional Information
Accessories and Coils ............................................................................................... Section 4
General Technical Data, Approvals and Classifications ........................................... Section 7
Terminal Marking and Positioning............................................................................. Section 8
Dimensions ............................................................................................................... Section 9
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/2
3-pole contactors Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75
Rated operational power AC-3 (1) 55 C (2)
220-230-240 V kW 2.2 3 4 6.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
380-400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
415 V kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 25 37 40
440 V kW 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 25 37 40
500 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
690 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 30 37 40
1000 V kW - - - - - - 30 33 37
Rated operational current I
e
/AC- 3 (1) 55 C (2)
220-230-240 V A 9 12 17 26 33 40 53 65 75
380-400 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 50 65 75
415 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 50 65 72
440 V A 9 12 16 26 32 37 45 65 70
500 V A 9 12 14 22 28 33 45 55 65
690 V A 7 9 10 17 21 25 35 43 46
1000 V A - - - - - - 23 25 28
e
/AC-1 - U
e
max. 690V
40 C (2) A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 115 125
55 C (2) A 22 25 27 40 55 60 85 95 105
70 C (2) A 18 20 23 32 39 42 70 80 85
with conductor cross-sectional area mm
2
2.5 4 4 6 10 16 35 50 50
Short-circuit protection for contactors without
add-on thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded (3)
U
e
500 V a.c. - gG (gI) max. fuses A 25 32 32 50 63 63 100 125 160
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10
Electrical durability for I
e
/ AC-3 max.
in millions of operating cycles 1.5
Thermal O/L relays Type TA 25 DU TA 75 DU
Setting range A 0.1 - 32 18 - 80
Type TA 42 DU
Setting range A 18 - 42
TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I I to I I, see page 0/1.
Other technical information: page 2/32.
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz
or 1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz
3-phase Motors
3-phase Motors
8 0 8 8
A and EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
Selection Table
Index Section
Section
2/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
A and EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
Selection Table
3-pole contactors Type A 95 A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Rated operational power AC-3 (1)
55 C (2) 220-230-240 V kW 25 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 45 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 55 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 55 59 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 40 40 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315
e
/ AC- 3 (1)
55 C (2) 220-230-240 V A 96 110 150 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 96 110 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 96 110 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 93 100 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 80 100 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 65 82 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 30 30 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
e
/AC-1
U
e
max. 690 V
40 C (2) A 145 160 230 260 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
55 C (2) A 135 145 200 230 270 340 375 470 650 800 800
70 C (2) A 115 130 160 170 215 290 325 400 575 720 720
2
50 70 120 150 185 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300 2 x 300
gG (gI) max. fuses A 160 200 250 355 355 500 500 630 800 1000 1000
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 350 430 800 1100 2600 3500
- 60 Hz VA 450 490 900 1200 2900 4000
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 410/365 460/400 500 630 2800/2450 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 22/6.5 30/11 44/15 52/18 90/ 36 125/ 50
- 60 Hz VA/W 26/8 35/12 52/18 65/22 105/44 140/ 60
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 27/7.5 38/12 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 100/47 140/60
in millions of operating cycles 10 10 5
Electrical durability I
e
/AC- 3 max.
in millions of operating cycles > 1 > 1 > 0.6 > 0.5
Thermal O/L relays Type TA 80 DU T 200 DU T 900 DU/SU
Setting range A 29 - 80 100 - 200 265 - 850
Type TA 110 DU T 450 DU/SU
Setting range A 65 - 110 130 - 400
TA 80 DU TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU T 900 DU
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I I to I I and E I, see page 0/1.
please consult co-ordination tables (ref. ITSCB 649171/002 9-1996).
8 0 8 8
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/4
4-pole contactors Type A 9 A 16 A 26 A 45 A 50 A 75
Rated operational voltage U
e
max. V 690 690 690
e
/ AC-1
40 C (1) A 25 30 45 70 100 125
55 C (1) A 22 27 40 60 85 105
70 C (1) A 18 23 32 50 70 85
2
2.5 4 6 25 35 50
thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded
U
e
500V a.c. - gG (gI) max. fuses A 25 32 50 80 100 160
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/ W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
e
/ AC-1 max.
in millions of operating cycles See curves page 2/56
(1) Temperature close to contactor.
(2) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I I to I I, see page 0/1.
A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
Selection Table
8 0 8 8
Index Section
Section
2/5
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Selection Table
Type EK 110 EK 150 EK 175 EK 210 EK 370 EK 550
U
e
max. V 690
e
/AC-1
40 C (1) A 200 250 300 350 550 800
55 C (1) A 180 230 270 310 470 650
70 C (1) A 155 200 215 250 400 575
2
95 150 185 240 2 x 185 2 x 240
gG (gI) max. fuses A 250 355 630 800
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 800 1100 3500 3500
- 60 Hz VA 900 1200 4000 4000
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 500 630 3800/3400 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 44/15 52/18 125/50 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/W 52/18 65/22 140/60 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 140/60 140/60
e
/ AC-1 max.
in millions of operating cycles See curves page 2/56
(1) Temperature close to contactor.
(2) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes E I , see page 0/1.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/6
Application
A contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 and even 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
Description of 3-pole and 4-pole contactors: A 9 - A 110
All A and AE contactors can be assembled side by side.
The add-on or built-in auxiliary contacts are suitable for low level currents.
When fitted with a 4-pole CA5 auxiliary contact block, A9 - A16 2-stack or 1-stack contactors ensure positive safety between their auxiliary contacts.
G Control circuit variants:
A contactors: a.c. operated with laminated magnetic circuit.
AE contactors: with laminated magnetic circuit and double-winding coil fed from d.c. supply via a CDL5 insertion contact mounted on the device.
The CDL5 has an N.C. lagging contact for insertion of the second winding.
G Contact variants:
3-pole contactors - with N.O. or N.C. built-in auxiliary contact for A 9 - A 40 contactors.
- with or without side-mounted, factory-assembled auxiliary contacts for A 50 - A 110 contactors.
4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without mounted auxiliary contacts.
3-pole/2-stack contactors: the first stack is made of a standard 3-pole contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact
block. The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.
G Contactors for specific applications:
UA and UA..-R types for 3-phase capacitor switching.
GA and GAE types for d.c. circuit switching.
TAE d.c. operated type with large coil voltage range.
AF a.c. and d.c. operated type with controlled supply.
A and AE Contactors
Description
A 9 - A 110
G Ordering Details ......................................................... pages 2/12, 2/16 G General - Approvals .............................................................. Section 7
G Technical Data ....................................................................... page 2/32 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
G Accessories ............................................................................ Section 4 G Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
Location of surge suppressors
Terminals delivered in open position with captive
screws (screws of unused terminals must be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all terminals makes it
possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
All terminals provide protection against accidental
di rect contact wi th l i ve parts accordi ng to
VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
All A 9 - A 40 contactor terminals as well as
A 45 - A 110 contactor auxiliary contact and coil
terminals ensure IP 20 degree of protection according
to IEC 947-1.
Location of side-mounted accessories: on right or left
hand side. Factory-mounted on:
left hand side for CAL5 on A 50 - A 110-30-11,
right hand side for CDL5/CCL5 on AE 45 - AE 110.
Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715,
EN 50022 and EN 50023 standards:
35 x 7.5 mm for A 9 - A 40,
35 x 15 mm for A 9 - A 75,
75 mm for A 45 - A 110.
Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied).
Distance between holes according to
EN 50003 (contactors for 11 kW motors).
Terminal screws:
Pozidriv (+,-) N 2 for all A9 - A 40 terminals and
for A 45 - A 110 coil terminals.
M8 screws with 6.5 mm slot for A 45 - A 75 main
terminals.
HC, M8 for A 95/110 main terminals.
Terminal marking according to IEC 947-4-1,
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA standards.
Connecting point for control leads in top part of
main terminals of A 45 - A 75 contactors.
Clear marking of coil voltages and frequencies.
Location of function marker.
Stops for attaching front-mounted accessories.
Sommaire Chapitre
Index Section
Section
2/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
A and AE Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays
* Use electronic timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 contactors.
The same accessories can be added on to A 9, A 16, A 26, A 45, A50 and A 75 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.
Sommaire Chapitre
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/8
Application
EH 3-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their
operating characteristics up to voltages of 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
EK 4-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling back-up circuits and all distribution circuits where the neutral needs to be broken.
Description of EH 145 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 contactors
G One N.O. + N.C. auxiliary contact block is fitted to the left hand side of 3-pole and 4-pole contactors. (Three other auxiliary contact blocks can be added). Complete
closing is ensured, even at the lowest control voltage, by a patented spring system. The coil is compound-filled in heat-resistant, glass-fibre
reinforced resin. Exact ordering and marking details are automatically obtained when the coil is changed.
G EH 3-pole contactors and EK 4-pole contactors can be supplied:
with a laminated magnetic circuit and a coil fed directly from an a.c. current supply for a.c. control
with a laminated magnetic circuit and a coil fed from a d.c. current supply across an economy resistor connected via an auxiliary contact block
comprising an N.C. lagging contact for d.c. control.
G Ordering Details ........................................................... pages 2/13, 2/15, 2/16 G General - Approvals ......................................................... Section 7
G Technical Data ....................................................................... pages 2/33, 2/39 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ................................. Section 8
G Accessories ....................................................................................... Section 4 G Dimensions ....................................................................... Section 9
Separate arcing contacts for EH 370 - EH 800.
Main contacts with high-conductivity
and low-oxidation coating.
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA. Clearly marked
main terminals and phase conductors.
Plain holes for M4 screws
(auxiliary circuit wires).
M10 earth screw for EH 370 - 800. Can also be
fitted at the bottom.
Screw, nut and washer supplied for every main terminal.
Connectors for either copper or aluminium can be
supplied separately.
EH 145 - EH 800
Separate arcing contacts for EH 370 - EK 550.
Main contacts with high-conductivity
and low-oxidation coating.
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA. Clearly marked
main terminals and phase conductors.
Clearly marked coil voltage and frequency. Terminals
provide protection against accidental contact with live
parts (IP 20).
M 10 earth screw for EK 370 and EK 550.
Can also be fitted at the bottom.
Screw, nut and washer supplied for every main
terminal.
Connectors for either copper or aluminium can be
supplied separately.
EK 110 - EK 550
Clearly marked coil voltage and frequency. Terminals
provide protection against accidental contact with live
parts (IP 20).
Plain holes for M4 screws
(auxiliary circuit wires).
Removable coil for EH 175 - EH 300.
The coil can be changed on the contactor installed.
Removable coil for EK 110 - EK 210.
The coil can be changed on the contactor installed.
EH and EK Contactors
Description
Glass-fibre reinforced polyester arc chute.
Quick-release clip for access to arc chute.
Terminals protected against accidental contact
with live parts (IP 20).
Auxiliary contact block supplied.
High quality plastic case for EH 145 - 300 and
moulded light alloy case for EH 370 - 800.
Dampers for EH 370 - 800 are supplied with
screws and washers.
Quick-release clip for arc chutes.
Glass-fibre reinforced polyester arc chute.
Dampers for EK 370 and 550 are supplied with
screws and washers.
Terminals protected against accidental direct
contact with live parts (IP 20).
Auxiliary contact block supplied.
Index Section
Section
2/9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
The same accessories can be added on to EK 4-pole contactors as EH 3-pole contactors.
EH and EK Contactors
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/10
Application
BC contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
Description of 3-pole or 4-pole contactors: BC 9 - BC 30
For BC and TBC type contactors make sure that the mounting distance specified in the "Ordering Details" pages 2/14, 2/17, 2/19 and 2/24 is
respected for "side by side" (position 1) and "stacked" (positions 3 and 4) mounting.
The add-on or built-in auxiliary contacts are suitable for low level currents.
BC 9, BC 16, TBC 9 and TBC 16 2-stack or 1-stack contactors fitted with a 4-pole CA5 auxiliary contact block ensure positive safety between their
auxiliary contacts.
G Type of magnetic circuit:
Solid magnetic circuit with d.c. fed coil.
G Contact variants:
3-pole contactors with built-in N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact for BC 9 - BC 25 contactors.
4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without built-in auxiliary contacts.
2-stack 3-pole contactors: the first stack is made of a standard contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact block.
The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.
G Contactors for specific applications:
D.C. operated TBC - types with large voltage range. Variants specific to traction are not given in this catalogue. Please consult us.
BC Contactors
Description
Stops for attaching front-mounted accessories.
Clear marking of coil d.c. voltage.
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA standards.
Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715
and EN 50022 standards:
35 x 7.5 mm,
35 x 15 mm.
Dove tail anchoring for surge suppressor
assembly.
BC 9 - BC 30
Terminals delivered in open position with captive
screws (screws of unused terminals must be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all terminals makes it
possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
All terminals provide protection against accidental
direct contact with live parts according to
VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
Distance between holes according to
EN 50003 (contactors for 11 kW motors).
Terminal screw types:
Pozidriv (+,-) N 2; M 3.5 for all BC 9 and BC 16
terminals and BC 18 - BC 30 coil terminals.
Pozidriv (+,-) N 2; M 4 for BC 18 and BC 25 main
terminals.
Pozidriv (+,-) N 2; M 5 for BC 30 main terminals.
G Ordering Details .................................................... pages 2/14, 2/17, 2/19, 2/24 and 2/25 G General - Approvals .................................................................. Section 7
G Technical Data .................................................................................................. page 2/38 G Terminal Marking and Positioning .......................................... Section 8
G Accessories ....................................................................................................... Section 4 G Dimensions ............................................................................... Section 9
Index Section
Section
2/11
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
The same accessories can be added on to BC 9, BC 16 and BC 25 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.
* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.
BC Contactors
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/12
Type Order code Mounted aux. contacts Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil 1
st
stack 2
nd
stack voltage 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: I voltage code: I I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece
A 9-30-10 I 1SBL 14 1001 R I I 10 1 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.34
A 9-30-01 I (1) 1SBL 14 1001 R I I 01 1 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.34
A 9-30-22 I 1SBL 14 1001 R I I 22 2 2 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.40
A 9-30-32 I 1SBL 14 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.40
A 12-30-10 I 1SBL 16 1001 R I I 10 1 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.34
A 12-30-01 I (1) 1SBL 16 1001 R I I 01 1 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.34
A 12-30-22 I 1SBL 16 1001 R I I 22 2 2 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.40
A 12-30-32 I 1SBL 16 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.40
A 16-30-10 I 1SBL 18 1001 R I I 10 1 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.34
A 16-30-01 I (1) 1SBL 18 1001 R I I 01 1 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.34
A 16-30-22 I 1SBL 18 1001 R I I 22 2 2 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.40
A 16-30-32 I 1SBL 18 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.40
A 26-30-10 I 1SBL 24 1001 R I I 10 1 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.60
A 26-30-01 I 1SBL 24 1001 R I I 01 1 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.60
A 26-30-32 I 1SBL 24 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.66
A 30-30-10 I 1SBL 28 1001 R I I 10 1 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.71
A 30-30-01 I 1SBL 28 1001 R I I 01 1 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.71
A 30-30-32 I 1SBL 28 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.77
A 40-30-10 I 1SBL 32 1001 R I I 10 1 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.71
A 40-30-01 I 1SBL 32 1001 R I I 01 1 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.71
A 40-30-32 I 1SBL 32 1001 R I I 32 1 2 2 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.77
A 50-30-00 I 1SBL 35 1001 R I I 00 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.16
A 50-30-11 I 1SBL 35 1001 R I I 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
A 50-30-22 I 1SBL 35 1001 R I I 22 2 2 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.23
A 63-30-00 I 1SBL 37 1001 R I I 00 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.16
A 63-30-11 I 1SBL 37 1001 R I I 11 1 1 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.20
A 63-30-22 I 1SBL 37 1001 R I I 22 2 2 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.23
A 75-30-00 I 1SBL 41 1001 R I I 00 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.16
A 75-30-11 I 1SBL 41 1001 R I I 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
A 75-30-22 I 1SBL 41 1001 R I I 22 2 2 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.23
A 95-30-00 I 1SFL 43 1001 R I I 00 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.00
A 95-30-11 I 1SFL 43 1001 R I I 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
A 95-30-22 I 1SFL 43 1001 R I I 22 2 2 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07
A 110-30-00 I 1SFL 45 1001 R I I 00 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.00
A 110-30-11 I 1SFL 45 1001 R I I 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
A 110-30-22 I 1SFL 45 1001 R I I 22 2 2 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07
(1) In mounting position 5, do not use more than 2 front-mounted N.C. auxiliary contacts.
The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks provide additional N.C. contacts.
G Technical Data ...................................................... page 2/32 G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
G Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
G Thermal O/L Relays .............................................. Section 5 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
S
B

7
3
1
2
S
2
S
B

7
3
1
0
S
2
S
B

7
3
2
0
S
2
S
B

7
3
1
5
S
2
S
B

7
3
2
4
S
2
A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
A.C. Circuit Switching
Ordering Details
A 9-30-10
A 16-30-10
A 30-30-10
A 50-30-00
A 95-30-00
Index Section
Section
2/13
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: I voltage: I I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
EH 145-30-11 I SK 824 021- I I 1 1 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.30
EH 145-30-22 I SK 824 031- I I 2 2 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.35
EH 175-30-11 I SK 825 401- I I 1 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.65
EH 175-30-21 I SK 825 401- E I 2 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.65
EH 175-30-22 I SK 825 411- I I 2 2 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.70
EH 210-30-11 I SK 825 402- I I 1 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EH 210-30-21 I SK 825 402- E I 2 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EH 210-30-22 I SK 825 412- I I 2 2 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.70
EH 260-30-11 I SK 826 402- I I 1 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20
EH 260-30-21 I SK 826 402- E I 2 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20
EH 260-30-22 I SK 826 412- I I 2 2 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.25
EH 300-30-11 I SK 826 401- I I 1 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.20
EH 300-30-21 I SK 826 401- E I 2 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.20
EH 300-30-22 I SK 826 411- I I 2 2 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25
EH 370-30-11 I SK 827 004- I I 1 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40
EH 370-30-22 I SK 827 030- I I 2 2 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.45
EH 550-30-11 I SK 827 005- I I 1 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
EH 550-30-22 I SK 827 031- I I 2 2 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.45
EH 700-30-11 I SK 828 004- I I 1 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10
EH 700-30-22 I SK 828 030- I I 2 2 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.15
EH 800-30-11 I SK 828 005- I I 1 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30
EH 800-30-22 I SK 828 031- I I 2 2 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.35
- E I = 40 - 400 Hz coil with built-in rectifier.
G Technical Data ............................................ pages 2/33, 2/39 G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
G Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
G Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
EH 700-30-11
EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
Ordering Details
EH 145-30-11
EH 370-30-11
EH 260-30-11
EH 175-30-11
S
B

7
3
3
8
S
2
S
B

7
3
4
5
S
2
S
B

7
3
4
8
S
2
S
B

7
3
4
7
S
3
S
B

7
3
5
1
S
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/14
}
BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. contacts Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
st
stack 2
nd
stack current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: I voltage: I . . I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
BC 9-30-10 I FPL 141 3001 R I 10 I 1 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
BC 9-30-01 I FPL 141 3001 R I 01 I 1 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
BC 16-30-10 I FPL 181 3001 R I 10 I 1 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
BC 16-30-01 I FPL 181 3001 R I 01 I 1 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
BC 18-30-22 I GJL 222 3001 R I 22 I 2 2 36 16 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.57
BC 25-30-10 I GJL 241 3001 R I 10 I 1 45 25 6.5 * 11 11 11 0.62
BC 25-30-01 I GJL 241 3001 R I 01 I 1 45 25 6.5 * 11 11 11 0.62
BC 30-30-00 I GJL 281 3001 R I 00 I 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.70
BC 30-30-22 I GJL 282 3001 R I 22 I 2 2 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.76
* 7.5 kW at 240 V.
Mounting Distance required between BC contactors.
d
(1)
D
(2)
Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency
mm mm C Operating cycles/h
2 20 20 1200
5 20 55 1200
Mounting Positions of BC contactors.
The following table gives the permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
coil operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.
Ambient Contactor Permissible Coil Add-on accessories
temp. without accessory mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
Poles Built-in positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont.
(N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) orTP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
or CA5-04 (4 x N.C.)
C Pos. x U
c
Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:
1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 1 1
55 130, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1 1 to 4 1 1
5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
> 55
1,

130,
and 2, 3, 4 U
c
1 to 4 1 1
70 5* U
c
1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: U
e
< 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.
BC 9-30-10
S
B

6
9
9
4
S
4
BC 25-30-10
BC 30-30-00
S
B

6
4
9
0
S
4
S
B

6
9
9
7
S
4
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
BC 16 - 30 - 01
BC 25 - 30 - 01
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
BC 16 - 30 - 01
BC 25 - 30 - 01
}
Index Section
Section
2/15
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
voltage: I voltage: I I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
AE 50-30-00 I 1SBL 35 9001 R I I 00 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
AE 50-30-11 I 1SBL 35 9001 R I I 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.24
AE 63-30-00 I 1SBL 37 9001 R I I 00 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.20
AE 63-30-11 I 1SBL 37 9001 R I I 11 1 1 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.24
AE 75-30-00 I 1SBL 41 9001 R I I 00 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
AE 75-30-11 I 1SBL 41 9001 R I I 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.24
AE 95-30-00 I 1SFL 43 9001 R I I 00 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
AE 95-30-11 I 1SFL 43 9001 R I I 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07
AE 110-30-00 I 1SFL 45 9001 R I I 00 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
AE 110-30-11 I 1SFL 45 9001 R I I 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07
EH 145-30-21 I SK 824 021- I I 2 1 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.30
EH 175-30-21 I SK 825 401- I I 2 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.70
EH 210-30-21 I SK 825 402- I I 2 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.70
EH 260-30-21 I SK 826 402- I I 2 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20
EH 300-30-21 I SK 826 401- I I 2 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25
EH 370-30-21 I SK 827 004- I I 2 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40
EH 550-30-21 I SK 827 005- I I 2 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
EH 700-30-21 I SK 828 004- I I 2 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10
EH 800-30-21I SK 828 005- I I 2 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30
Block diagram for AE Contactor Coil Supply.
G Accessories .......................................................... Section 4 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
AE and EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
Ordering Details
N.C. lagging auxiliary contact block with built-in varistor:
CDL 5-01 type on AE 50-AE 75 contactors.
CCL 5-01 type on AE 95 and AE110 contactors.
AE 50-30-00
S
B

7
5
8
2
S
4
EH 210-30-11
S
B

7
5
9
2
S
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/16
G Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/32 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
G Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
G General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7
S
B

7
3
1
9
S
3
S
B

7
3
4
3
S
3
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: I voltage code: I I AC-1 AC-1
40C 55C Pack
ing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
A 9-40-00 I 1SBL 14 1201 R I I 00 25 22 0.34
A 16-40-00 I 1SBL 18 1201 R I I 00 30 27 0.34
A 26-40-00 I 1SBL 24 1201 R I I 00 45 40 0.61
A 45-40-00 I (1) 1SBL 33 1201 R I I 00 70 60 1.39
A 50-40-00 I (1) 1SBL 35 1201 R I I 00 100 85 1.39
A 75-40-00 I (1) 1SBL 41 1201 R I I 00 125 105 1.39
EK 110-40-11 I SK 824 440- I I 1 1 200 180 4.30
EK 110-40-21 I SK 824 440- E I 2 1 200 180 4.30
EK 110-40-22 I SK 824 450- I I 2 2 200 180 4.35
EK 150-40-11 I SK 824 441- I I 1 1 250 230 4.35
EK 150-40-21 I SK 824 441- E I 2 1 250 230 4.35
EK 150-40-22 I SK 824 451- I I 2 2 250 230 4.40
EK 175-40-11 I SK 825 440- I I 1 1 300 270 6.60
EK 175-40-21 I SK 825 440- E I 2 1 300 270 6.60
EK 175-40-22 I SK 825 448- I I 2 2 300 270 6.65
EK 210-40-11 I SK 825 441- I I 1 1 350 310 6.60
EK 210-40-21 I SK 825 441- E I 2 1 350 310 6.60
EK 210-40-22 I SK 825 451- I I 2 2 350 310 6.65
EK 370-40-11 I SK 827 040- I I 1 1 550 470 17.2
EK 370-40-22 I SK 827 042- I I 2 2 550 470 17.2
EK 550-40-11 I SK 827 041- I I 1 1 800 650 17.2
EK 550-40-22 I SK 827 043- I I 2 2 800 650 17.2
- E I = 40 - 400 Hz coil with built-in rectifier.
(1) 60 Hz coil voltage
Mounting positions 1 to 5 (see page 2/37) and ambient temperature 55C: tolerance reduced to 0.9 - 1.1 U
c
(instead of 0.85 - 1.1 U
c
) for coil
voltage codes 7 I and 8 I. This only concerns devices fitted with CA 5 - and CAL5-11 auxiliary contacts or TP timer.
For mounting position 6 or ambient temperature of +55 to +70 C the information given on page 2/34 remains applicable.
A 45-40-00
EK 370-40-11
S
B

7
3
1
4
S
2
A 9-40-00
EK 175-40-11
S
B

7
3
4
1
S
3
Index Section
Section
2/17
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: I voltage: I I AC-1 AC-1
40C 55C Pack
ing
BC 9-40-00 I (1) FPL 141 3201 R I 00 I 22 20 0.54
BC 16-40-00 I (1) FPL 181 3201 R I 00 I 28 25 0.54
BC 25-40-00 I (1) GJL 241 3201 R I 00 I 45 40 0.62
AE 45-40-00 I 1SBL 33 9201 R I I 00 70 60 1.43
AE 50-40-00 I 1SBL 35 9201 R I I 00 100 85 1.43
AE 75-40-00 I 1SBL 41 9201 R I I 00 125 105 1.43
EK 110-40-21 I SK 824 440- I I 2 1 200 180 4.35
EK 150-40-21 I SK 824 441- I I 2 1 250 230 4.40
EK 175-40-21 I SK 825 440- I I 2 1 300 270 6.65
EK 210-40-21 I SK 825 441- I I 2 1 350 310 6.65
EK 370-40-21 I SK 827 040- I I 2 1 550 470 17.2
EK 550-40-21 I SK 827 041- I I 2 1 800 650 17.2
(1) G Distances and mounting positions: see page 2/14.
G For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.) see notes page 4/14.
Block Diagram for AE Contactor Coil Supply.
G Technical Data ..................................................... page 2/38 G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
G Thermal O/L Relay ................................................ Section 5 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
BC, AE and EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
S
B

6
9
9
2
S
2
BC 16-40-00
EK 110-40-21
AE 50-40-00
S
B

7
5
9
4
S
4
S
B

7
5
9
0
S
4
d
(1)
D
(2)
2 20 20 1200
5 20 55 1200
Mounting Positions of BC contactors.
The following table shows permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
Poles Built-in . positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont.
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
or CA5-04 (4 x N.C.)
C Pos. x U
c
Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:
1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 1 1
55 BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00 130, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1 1 to 4 1 1
5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
> 55
BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00
1,130,2,3,4 U
c
1 to 4 1 1
and
< 70 5* U
c
1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit, please consult us. Maximum operating voltage: U
e
< 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.
}
}
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/18
A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Operated
Description
G 4-pole contactors fitted with 2 N.C. main poles and 2 N.O. main poles.
G These contactors are suitable for controlling 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies, or
1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with a single supply (see diagram below). When the contactor operates
there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. poles and the N.C. poles: BREAK before MAKE.
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.
Block Diagrams
G Single supply and 2 separate loads G 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at U
e
690 V in kg
40C 55C Pack
ing
A 9-22-00 I (1) 1SBL 14 1501 R I I 00 25 22 0.34
A 16-22-00 I (1) 1SBL 18 1501 R I I 00 30 27 0.34
A 26-22-00 I 1SBL 24 1501 R I I 00 45 40 0.61
A 45-22-00 I (1) (2) 1SBL 33 1501 R I I 00 70 60 1.40
A 75-22-00 I (1) (2) 1SBL 41 1501 R I I 00 125 105 1.40
(1) For A 9 and A 16-22 in position 5 or A 45 and A 75-22 in positions 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 (position 5 unauthorised), do not use more than 2 add-on front-
mounted N.C. auxiliary contact blocks. CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks provide extra N.C. auxiliary contacts
(2) A 45 and A 75-22 contactors:
Shock withstand: in position 1, contactors being screwed on their support and without extra N.C. auxiliary contact.
1
/2 sinusoidal shock, 11 ms: no change in contact position.
Shock directions : A, C1, C2 : 20g
B1 : 3g
B2 : 10g.
60 Hz Coil Voltage: for mounting positions 1 to 4 and ambient temperature < 55 C: tolerance reduced to 0.9 - 1.1 Uc
(instead of 0.85 - 1.1 Uc) for 7 I and 8 I coil voltage codes.
This only concerns devices fitted with CA 5 - and CAL 5-11 auxiliary contacts or TP timer.
Position 5 unauthorised.
For mounting position 6 or ambient temperature of +55 to +70 C, the information given on page 2/34 remains applicable.
A 26-22
S
B

7
5
8
8
S
4
A 45-22
S
B

7
8
1
9
S
4
Mounting positions:
Index Section
Section
2/19
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Description (as for page 2/18)
Ordering Details
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at Ue 690 V in kg
40C 55C Pack
ing
BC 9-22-00 I FPL 141 3501 R I00 I 22 20 0.540
BC 16-22-00 I FPL 181 3501 R I00 I 28 25 0.540
BC 25-22-00 I GJL 241 3501 R I00 I 45 40 0.620
AE 45-22-00 I 1SBL 33 9501 R I I 00 70 60 1.44
AE 75-22-00 I 1SBL 41 9501 R I I 00 125 105 1.44
}
}
}
}
}
BC and AE 4-pole Contactors
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Circuit Switching - D.C. Operated
d
(1)
D
(2)
2 20 20 600
5 20 55 600
Mounting Positions of BC 9 - BC 25-22, AE 45 and AE 75-22 4-pole contactors.
The following table shows permissible mounting positions in relation to the ambient temperature, contactor coil
operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.
Poles Built-in positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont.
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
C Pos. x U
c
Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:
BC 9 - 22 - 00
1, 2, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C max. 1 -
55
BC 16 - 22 - 00
1 30 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
6 0.95 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -

> 55 BC 9 - 22 - 00
1, 2, 3, 4 U
c
1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -
and
< 70 BC 16 - 22 - 00
1 30 Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -

< 55 BC 25 - 22 - 00
1, 2 0.85 -1.1
1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
130,3,4,6 0.95 -1.1

> 55 1, 1 30
and
< 70
BC 25 - 22 - 00
2, 3, 4
Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
AE 45 - 22 - 00
1, 1 30
0.85 - 1.1
1 1
< 55 2, 3, 4 1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max. +1 to 2 CA5 1-pole +1 to 2 CA5
AE 75 - 22 - 00
6 0.95 - 1.1 Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole

> 55 AE 45 - 22 - 00 1, 1 30
and
< 70
AE 75 - 22 - 00 2, 3, 4
Uc 1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max.
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.) with BC - contactors
see notes page 4/14.
S
B

6
9
9
3
S
3
BC 9-22-00
AE 45-22-00
S
B

7
5
9
1
S
4
1 1
+1 to 2 CA5 1-pole +1 to 2 CA5
Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole
}
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/20
3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated
General
The most common application is the parallel connection of 3-phase capacitors to a load or part of a circuit for power factor correction.
When connecting three-phase capacitors for compensation purposes, a distinction must be made between:
Compensation via a single capacitor bank.
Compensation via a stepped capacitor bank.
On energization, the capacitor is connected in parallel with the inductive network. A 3 to 15 kHz high frequency current, which may reach 160 I
n
for
1 to 2 ms in the case of stepped bank compensation, flows through the oscillating circuit set up by the connection of the capacitor with the network.
The presence of harmonics and the supply voltage tolerance lead to a current, estimated to be 1.3 times the nominal current I
n
of the capacitor,
continuously circulating in the circuit.
Taking into account the manufacturing tolerances, the exact power of a capacitor can reach 1.15 times its nominal power.
The contactor must therefore be sized to withstand:
the short but high peak current during closing. See the peak current values in the following tables. Additional reactors may be used to limit
the peak inrush current.
a permanent current I
T
able to reach 1.5 times the nominal current of the capacitor. This factor has been taken into account in the selection
tables below.
Short-circuit protection is generally ensured by gG fuses, sized 1.5 - 1.8 I
n
of the capacitor.
Consult us for different conditions of use (higher inrush current, greater rate of harmonics).
Selection Table
Select the type of contactor in relation to the following characteristics:
- operational voltage - power in kvar - maximum contactor peak - ambient temperature close to contactor.
The capacitors must be fully discharged (maximum voltage at terminals 50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are making.
A and EH Types Standard 3-pole Contactors
For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single capacitor bank or stepped bank compensation.
peak max. < 30 times the capacitor nominal r.m.s. current.
Electrical durability: 100 000 operating cycles - Ordering details: see pages 2/12 and 2/13.
Power in kvar 50/60 Hz Max. peak
Type 220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500/550V 660/690 V current
40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C (kA)
A 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A 12 7 7 6 11 11 9.5 12 12 10.5 14 14 12 19 19 16.5 0.7
A 16 7.5 7.5 6 12.5 12.5 10 14 14 10.5 15.5 15.5 12 21.5 21.5 16.5 1
A 26 11.5 11.5 9 19 19 15 20 20 16.5 23 23 19 32 32 26 1.6
A 30 13 13 11 22 22 18.5 24 24 20.5 28 28 23 38 38 32 1.9
A 40 15 15 12 26 26 20 29 29 22 35 35 25 46 46 34.5 2.1
A 50 22 22 20 38 38 34 42 42 37 48 48 42 65 65 58.5 2.3
A 63 25 25 23 43 43 39 47 47 42.5 54 54 48.5 74 74 67 2.5
A 75 28 28 24.5 48 48 41 52 52 45 60 60 51 82 82 70 2.6
A 95 35 35 33 60 60 53 63 63 58 75 75 70 80 80 75 4
A 110 40 40 35 70 70 60 75 75 65 83 83 78 90 90 85 4
EH 145 50 50 42 90 90 74 93 93 80 110 110 96 110 110 110 4
EH 175 60 60 45 105 105 78 115 115 85 135 135 102 135 135 135 5
EH 210 75 75 57 125 125 99 135 135 108 160 160 130 160 160 160 5
EH 260 85 85 70 140 140 130 155 155 140 180 180 165 200 200 200 8
EH 300 100 100 85 160 160 150 180 180 163 210 210 196 240 240 240 8
EH 370 120 120 105 200 200 185 220 220 200 260 260 241 300 300 300 10
EH 550 160 160 150 260 260 255 290 290 289 340 340 340 440 440 440 10
EH 700 210 210 190 350 350 332 380 380 360 460 460 435 550 550 550 12
EH 800 220 212 191 390 370 332 410 402 360 490 480 435 600 600 600 12
Index Section
Section
2/21
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
UA 3-pole Contactors
A.C. Operated
G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. in kg
voltage: I voltage: I I
Pack
ing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece
UA 3-pole contactors
UA 26-30-10 I 1SBL 24 1022 R I I 10 1 0.60
UA 30-30-10 I 1SBL 28 1022 R I I 10 1 0.71
UA 50-30-00 I 1SBL 35 1022 R I I 00 1.16
UA 50-30-11 I 1SBL 35 1022 R I I 11 1 1 1.20
UA 63-30-00 I 1SBL 37 1022 R I I 00 1.16
UA 63-30-11 I 1SBL 37 1022 R I I 11 1 1 1.20
UA 75-30-00 I 1SBL 41 1022 R I I 00 1.16
UA 75-30-11 I 1SBL 41 1022 R I I 11 1 1 1.20
UA 95-30-00 I 1SFL 43 1022 R I I 00 2.00
UA 95-30-11 I 1SFL 43 1022 R I I 11 1 1 2.04
UA 110-30- 00I 1SFL 45 1022 R I I 00 2.00
UA 110-30- 11I 1SFL 45 1022 R I I 11 1 1 2.04
Accessories
UA contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
UA Type 3-pole Contactors
For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single bank or stepped bank compensation.
Max. peak current : 100 times the capacitor nominal r.m.s. current at U
e
< 500 V or 90 times for U
e
> 500 V
Electrical durability: 100 000 operating cycles - Ordering details: see below.
Power in kvar 50/60 Hz Max. permissible
Type 230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500/550 V 660/690 V peak current (kA)
40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40C 55C 70 C U
e
< 500 V U
e
> 500 V
UA 26 12 11 8.5 20 18.5 14.5 22 20 16 22 22 19.5 30 30 25 3 2.7
UA 30 16 16 11 27.5 27.5 19 30 30 20 34 34 23.5 45 45 32 3.5 3.1
UA 50 20 20 19 33 33 32 36 36 35 40 40 40 55 55 52 5 4.5
UA 63 25 25 21 45 43 37 50 48 41 50 50 45 70 70 60 5.5 5
UA 75 30 30 22 50 50 39 55 53 43 62 62 47.5 75 75 65 6 5.8
UA 95 35 35 29 60/65* 60/65* 50/55* 65 65 55 70 70 60 86 86 70 9.3 8
UA 110 40 39 34 74 70/75* 65 75 75 67 80 80 75 90 90 85 10.5 9
* Use these values for U
e
= 415 V
For kvar rated power at 220 V and 380 V, apply factor 0.9 on kvar rated power at 230 V and 400 V respectively.
Example with 50 kvar/400 V : 50 x 0.9 = 45 kvar/380 V.
UA 50-30-00
S
B

7
5
9
7
S
4
S
B

7
5
9
8
S
4
UA 95-30-00
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/22
UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
A.C. Operated
UA .. -R type 3-pole Contactors
For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single bank or stepped bank compensation.
Rated operational power: according to U
e
rated operational voltage and air temperature close to contactor (see table below).
Insertion of resistors releases the contactor from overloading making currents.
Description
UA .. -R contactors are equipped with resistors and the relevant insertion contacts.
The insertion contacts make and break prior to the main poles (shifted operation about a few milliseconds).
Making sequence
first step: the early-make insertion contacts switch-on the current to the capacitor via the damping resistors.
second step: main poles are making.
The insertion contacts stay closed, ready to operate as early-breaking contacts for the next breaking sequence.
Breaking sequence
first step: the insertion contacts operate as early-breaking ones and switch-off the resistances circuitry.
second step: main poles are breaking the capacitor load.
Block Diagram
The capacitors must be discharged (maximum residual voltage at terminals <50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are
making.
Rated Operational Power
Type Power in kvar - 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 380/400/415 V 440 V 500/550 V 660/690 V
40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C 40 C 55 C 70 C
UA 16-30-10-R 8 7.5 6 12.5 12.5 10 15 13 11 18 16 12.5 22 21 17
UA 26-30-10-R 12.5 11.5 9 22 20 15.5 24 20 17 30 25 20 35 31 26
UA 30-30-10-R 16 16 11 30 27.5 19.5 32 30 20.5 34 34 25 42 42 32
UA 50-30-00-R 25 24 20 40 40 35 50 43 37 55 50 46 72 65 60
UA 63-30-00-R 30 27 23 50 45 39 55 48 42.5 65 60 50 80 75 65
UA 75-30-00-R 35 30 25 60 50 41 65 53 45 75 65 55 100 80 70
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
aux. cont. in kg
State coil to be completed
voltage: I with coil voltage II Pack
ing
(See page 0/1) (See page 0/1) 1 piece
UA 16-30-10-R I 1SBL 18 1023 RII10 1 - 0.460
UA 26-30-10-R I 1SBL 24 1023 RII10 1 - 0.710
UA 30-30-10-R I 1SBL 28 1023 RII10 1 - 0.810
UA 50-30-00-R I 1SBL 35 1023 RII00 - - 1.350
UA 63-30-00-R I 1SBL 37 1023 RII00 - - 1.350
UA 75-30-00-R I 1SBL 41 1023 RII00 - - 1.350
Index Section
Section
2/23
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
S
B
7
8
2
3
S
2
UA 26-30-10-R
S
B
7
8
2
0
S
2
UA 30-30-10-R
S
B
7
8
2
1
S
2
UA 75-30-00-R
UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
A.C. Operated
Technical Data
Durability 250 000 operating cycles at U
e
<440 V
100 000 operating cycles at U
e
>500 V
Operating frequency 240 cycles/h
Degree of protection UA 16..-R, UA 26..-R UA 30..-R UA 75..-R
acc. to IEC 529,IEC 947-1
and EN 60529, EN 60947-1
Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20
Auxiliary terminals IP 20 IP 20
Connecting capacity UA 16..-R UA 26..-R UA30..-R UA 50..-RUA 75..-R
Main conductors (poles)
rigid solid (<4 mm
2
)
or rigid stranded (>6 mm
2
) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm
2
1 4 1.5 6 2.5 16 6 50
2 x mm
2
2.516 + 2.56 625 + 616
flexible without cable end min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm
2
0.75 2.5 1 4 2.5 10 6 35
2 x mm
2
2.510 + 2.54 616 + 610
Short-circuit protection gG fuses sized 1.5 1.8 I
n
of the capacitor.
Other characteristics are the same as those of standard A contactors.
Accessories
UA .. - R contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
G Accessories, coils, contacts ................................. Section 4 G Terminal Marking and Positionning ...................... Section 8
G Generals, Approvals ............................................... Section 7 G Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9
S
B
7
8
2
2
S
2
UA 16-30-10-R
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/24
TBC and TAE Contactors
with Large Coil Voltage Range
D.C. Operated - A.C. Circuit Switching
Application
TBC and TAE contactors with a large coil voltage range are designed to operate in control circuits with large
voltage variations. Example: battery supply.
Ordering Details, 3-pole Contactors
voltage: I voltage: I . . I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
See table opposite See table opposite A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece
TBC 9-30-10 I FPL 141 3061 R I 10 I 1 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
TBC 9-30-01 I FPL 141 3061 R I 01 I 1 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
TBC 16-30-10 I FPL 181 3061 R I 10 I 1 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
TBC 16-30- 01 I FPL 181 3061 R I 01 I 1 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
TBC 25-30-10 I GJL 241 3061 R I 10 I 1 45 25 6.5 11 11 11 0.62
TBC 25-30-01 I GJL 241 3061 R I 01 I 1 45 25 6.5 11 11 11 0.62
TBC 30-30-00 I GJL 281 3061 R I 00 I 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.70
TBC 30-30-22 I GJL 282 3061 R I 22 I 2 2 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.76
TAE 50-30-00 I 1SBL 35 9061 R I I 00 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
TAE 50-30-11 I 1SBL 35 9061 R I I 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.24
TAE 75-30 -00 I 1SBL 41 9061 R I I 00 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
TAE 75-30-11 I 1SBL 41 9061 R I I 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.24
TAE 95-30-00 I 1SFL 43 9061 R I I 00 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
TAE 95-30-11 I 1SFL 43 9061 R I I 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07
TAE 110-30-00 I 1SFL 45 9061 R I I 00 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
TAE 110-30-11 I 1SFL 45 9061 R I I 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07
Coil operating limits:
Voltage V-d.c. Code
R I . . I
or
min. U
c
max. R I I . .
17 ........... 32 I I
25 ........... 45 I I
36 ........... 65 I I
42 ........... 78 I I
50 ........... 90 I I
77 ......... 143 I I
90 ......... 150 I I
152 ........ 264 I I
Other voltages: please consult us.
TBC 9-30-01
S
B

6
9
9
6
S
3
5 4
5 2
5 1
5 5
6 6
6 8
6 2
5 8
G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 G Cited Acceptable Accessories ............................... Section 4
G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8 G Railway/Traction Projects ...................................... on request
TBC 16-22-00
TBC 25-40-00
F
R
C
T
L

6
9
9
5
S
5
F
R
C
T
L

6
9
9
1
S
5
Ordering Details, 4-pole Contactors
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current in kg
voltage: I voltage: I . . I AC-1 AC-1
40C 55C Pack
ing
See table opposite See table opposite A A 1 piece
4-pole contactor fitted with 4 N.O. main poles
TBC 9- 40-00 I FPL 141 3261 R I 00 I 22 20 0.54
TBC 16- 40-00 I FPL 181 3261 R I 00 I 28 25 0.54
TBC 25- 40-00 I GJL 241 3261 R I 00 I 45 40 0.62
TAE 45-40-00 1SBL 33 9261 R II 00 70 60 1.43
TAE 50-40-00 1SBL 35 9261 R II 00 100 85 1.43
TAE 75-40-00 1SBL 41 9261 R II 00 125 105 1.43
4-pole contactor fitted with 2 N.O. main poles and 2 N.C. main poles
These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagram page 2/18).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles and
N.C. main poles: BREAK before MAKE.
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
TBC 9-22-00 I FPL 141 3561 R I 00 I 22 20 0.54
TBC 16-22-00 I FPL 181 3561 R I 00 I 28 25 0.54
TBC 25-22-00 I GJL 241 3561 R I 00 I 45 40 0.62
Index Section
Section
2/25
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
TBC and TAE Contactors
D.C. Operated - A.C. Circuit Switching
Mounting positions: Add-on accessories
Contactors Max. number of auxiliary contact blocks Timer Interlock Function
CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 CA5-31 CA5-22 CA5-04 TP - A unit marker
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - 30 - 00
TBC - 30 - 10 4 2 1 1 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
TBC - 40 - 00
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - 30 - 01 4 1 1 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - 22 - 00 4 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
pos. 1 30
TBC - all types VBC 30 BA 5-50
all positions
TAE - 6 6 1 1 1 1 1 VE5-2
(1)
BA 5-50
(1) Only valid for TAE 50-30-00 and TAE 75-30-00.
Note: Railway (traction) projects on request.
For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diodes, varistors, etc.) with TBC contactors
see notes p. 4/14.
Coil Characteristics
No extra voltages applicable on the U
c
min. - max. values of the Coil Voltage table, page 2/24.
Coil consumption at U
c
max. and = 20 C:
- 9 W pull-in/holding for TBC type
- 450 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 50 and TAE 75 types
- 950 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 95 and TAE 110 types
Replacement coils: please consult us (standard BC and AE contactor coils are not suitable for TBC and TAE
contactors).
"Mounting Distance" for coil operating limits U
c
min. - U
c
max.
d D Ambient temp. Max. switching frequency
2 20 20 1200
5 20 55 1200
Technical Data
Identical to standard BC and AE contactor data (see page 2/38) except:
Air temperature close to contactor: 55 C max.
Shock withstand in position 1 for contactors screwed on their support and without N.C. add-on aux. contact block.

1
/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2
Making
TBC 15 g* 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g
position TAE 20 g 10 g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Breaking
TBC 10 g 5 g** 6 g*** 4 g 4 g
position
TAE 20 g 5 g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Exceptions: *12g for TBC 30-30-00 ; **4g for TBC 16-22-00 ; ***5g for TBC 25-30-01
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/26
General
The AF contactors have the same appearance and same dimensions as the a.c. operated A contactors of equal
rating.They are fitted with an electronic coil interface. For a given coil, this interface allows the contactor to
accept a wide control voltage range in d.c. as well as in a.c., 50 or 60 Hz.
The current flow through the coil is a regulated d.c. current and is therefore independent from the control voltage
level and frequency.
Operating advantages :
The device withstands large control voltage variations without nuisance reopening.
Reduced holding coil consumption.
Noiseless working: d.c. regulated coil.
Pull-in and drop-out voltages are clearly defined.
AF contactors comply with international standards IEC 947-1, 947-4-1 and European standards
EN 60 947-1, 60 947-4-1. Moreover, in environment 2, they meet the electromagnetic compatibility rules
(EMC) : amendment A11 for IEC 947-1 and amendment 2 for IEC 947-4-1.
Using these materials in environment 1 may lead to radio-interferences requiring the use of additional mitigation
methods.
Here are the definitions given in the amendment A11 to standard EN 60 947-1.
Environment 1 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage public networks (see EN 50 082-1 article 5) such as residential,
commercial and light industrial locations/ installations. Highly disturbing sources such as arc welders are not
covered by this environment".
Environment 2 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage non public or industrial networks/ locations/installations
(see EN 50 082-2 article 4) including highly disturbing sources".
Block diagram and operating diagram
S
B
7
3
9
2
S
3
S
B
7
4
0
6
S
5
AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. operated
with controlled supply
a.c. circuit switching
Technical data
Type AF 45 AF 75 AF 95, AF 110
Max. electrical switching frequency cycles/h 600 600
Coil consumption - pull-in a.c. VA 210 450
- pull-in d.c. (U min./U max.) W 135/210 290/450
- holding a.c. VA/W 5/1.5 11/3
- holding d.c. W 1.5 3
Operating time
Between coil energization and : - N.O. contact closing ms 20 45 25 40
- N.C. contact opening ms 17 40 22 37
Between coil de-energization and : - N.O. contact opening ms 40 70 60 120
- N.C. contact closing ms 45 75 65 125
AF 95-30
AF 95-30
Sommaire Gnral Sommaire Chapitre
Index Section
Section
2/27
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Coil voltages :
Rated control Code
voltage U
c
:
d.c., 50 and 60 Hz a.c.
V .............. V I I
58 ............ 92 6 4
90 .......... 130 6 5
100 .......... 160 6 6
150 .......... 240 6 7
Operating limits 0.85 ... 1.1 x Uc
AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. operated
a.c. circuit switching
Ordering details, 3-pole contactors
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage : I voltage code : I I contacts AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
AF 50-30-00 I 1SBL 35 7001 R I I 00 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.180
AF 50-30-11 I 1SBL 35 7001 R I I 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.220
AF 63-30-00 I 1SBL 37 7001 R I I 00 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.180
AF 63-30-11 I 1SBL 37 7001 R I I 11 1 1 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.220
AF 75-30-00 I 1SBL 41 7001 R I I 00 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.180
AF 75-30-11 I 1SBL 41 7001 R I I 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.220
AF 95-30-00 I 1SFL 43 7001 R I I 00 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.030
AF 95-30-11 I 1SFL 43 7001 R I I 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.070
AF 110-30-00 I 1SFL 45 7001 R I I 00 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.030
AF 110-30-11 I 1SFL 45 7001 R I I 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.070
Ordering details, 4-pole contactors
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational current Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary in kg
voltage : I voltage code : I I contacts AC-1 AC-1
40C 55C Pack
ing
See table opposite See table opposite A A 1 piece
4 N.O. main poles :
AF 45-40-00 I 1SBL 33 7201 R I I 00 70 60 1.420
AF 50-40-00 I 1SBL 35 7201 R I I 00 100 85 1.420
AF 75-40-00 I 1SBL 41 7201 R I I 00 125 105 1.420
2 N.O. and 2 N.C. main poles :
AF 45-22-00 I 1SBL 33 7501 R I I 00 70 60 1.420
AF 75-22-00 I 1SBL 41 7501 R I I 00 125 105 1.420
These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagrams below).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles
and N.C. main poles : Break before Make.
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
G 1 single supply and 2 separate loads G 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
Accessories (section 4)
AF 45 AF 110 contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors.
AF contactor main contacts sets are the same as those of standard A contactors of equal rating ; see page 4/28.
Specific coils are required, see page 4/29.
S
B
7
5
3
6
S
3
AF 63-30
S
B
7
5
3
4
S
3
AF 45-40
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/28
GA75 and GAE75 Contactors
For D.C. Circuit Switching
General
Arc suppression is more difficult in d.c. than in a.c. To choose a contactor, it is necessary to know the current and
voltage to be broken as well as the L/R time constant of the power circuit to be controlled.
For your information, here are some typical time constant values:
non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces: ......................... L/ R ~ 1ms.
shunt motors: ................................................................................ L/ R ~ 2ms.
series motors: ............................................................................... L/ R ~ 7.5ms.
Remark: the addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding makes arc suppression easier.
Types
GA75-10-
. .
a.c. operated contactor
GAE75-10-
. .
d.c. operated contactor.
Description
GA and GAE contactors are fitted with arc chutes with permanent magnets specially designed for d.c. breaking.
The three contactor paths are arranged in series via two supplied and fitted insulated connections (25mm
2
).
The GA75 and GAE75 are "single-pole" devices for which the connection polarities indicated next to the connection
terminals must be respected. Furthermore, they are marked 1L1 for the positive terminal and 2T1 for the negative
terminal.
Connection Diagrams
In d.c. circuits, the source to earth (or frame) connection mode is an important element.
Three modes are mainly used
A insulated source, i.e. unearthed (or not connected to the frame).
B source earthed via its central point.
C source earthed via one of its outer poles.
Modes A and B do not impose any constraints with regard to the distribution of the contactor poles between the two
source/load connecting branches. Mode C requirements are therefore suitable for modes A and B.
For mode C, all the poles necessary for breaking must be installed in series between the load and the
unearthed (also not connected to the frame) source polarity.
We recommend this solution for all connection modes.
The above provisions relate to power circuit switching, the SCPD (Short-Circuit Protection Device) must comply with
protection rules.
Ordering Details
Rated insulation voltage U
i
= 1000V d.c. according to IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1.
Maximum switching frequencies: 300 operating cycles/h
Type Order code Mounted Max. rated operational current Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary DC-1 DC-3 DC-5 in kg
voltage:I voltage:I I contacts U
e
440V U
e
600V U
e
440V U
e
220V U
e
440V
40C 40C Pack
ing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A A A A 1 piece
GA75-10-00 I 1SBL 41 1025 R I I 00 100 75 85 85 35 1.22
GA75-10-11 I 1SBL 41 1025 R I I 11 1 1 100 75 85 85 35 1.26
GAE75-10-00 I 1SBL 41 9025 R I I 00 100 75 85 85 35 1.26
GAE75-10-11 I 1SBL 41 9025 R I I 11 1 1 100 75 85 85 35 1.30
Accessories (section 4)
Standard A and AE40 - 75 contactor accessories are suitable for GA75 and GAE75 contactors.
Coils are the standard coils for A and AE50 - 75 contactors.
Contacts cannot be changed.
G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
S
B

7
5
7
3
S
4
GA75-10-11
GAE75-10-11
S
B

7
5
7
4
S
4
Index Section
Section
2/29
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Description
Magnetically latched contactors are fitted with a double-winding coil and a built-in rectifier for both a.c. and d.c.
operation.
On closing, the first winding is energized by a voltage impulse. The contactor remains latched in closed position
owing to the permanent magnet.
For tripping, the effect of the permanent magnet is cancelled by the second winding.
The contactor can also be unlatched manually by exerting pressure on the side of the contactor where the
contact holder is located.
Ordering Details
State coil to be completed with aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: I coil voltage: I I AC-1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
40C 400 V 240 V Pack
ing
3-pole contactors
EHL 210-30-11 I SK 825 502 - I I 1 1 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EHL 210-30-22 I SK 825 512 - I I 2 2 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.7
EHL 300-30-11 I SK 826 502 - I I 1 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.2
EHL 300-30-22 I SK 826 512 - I I 2 2 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25
4-pole contactors
EKL 150-40-11 I SK 824 542 - I I 1 1 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.35
EKL 150-40-22 I SK 824 552 - I I 2 2 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.40
EKL 210-40-11 I SK 825 542 - I I 1 1 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.60
EKL 210-40-22 I SK 825 552 - I I 2 2 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.65
Winding Consumption
Consumption varies according to the U
c
voltage value applied for each winding.
For a given voltage range from the table opposite, the lowest consumption corresponds to the lowest voltage
in the range and the highest consumption to the highest voltage in the range.
EHL 210 and EKL 150 EHL 300 and EKL 210
Making winding W 300 - 600 400 - 800
Breaking winding W 190 - 350 190 - 380
Wiring Diagram
G Other Technical Data ............................................. page 2/39 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
G Accessories ............................................................. Section 4
EHL and EKL
Magnetically Latched Contactors
A.C./D.C. Operated
S
B

7
5
9
3
S
4
EHL 210-30-11
EKL 150-40-11
S
B

7
5
9
6
S
4
Coil Voltages:
Rated control Code
voltage U
c
:
d.c., 40 - 400 Hz a.c.
V ............. V I I
20 ............ 29 L B
30 ............ 41 L C
42 ............ 59 L D
59 ............ 82 L T
90 .......... 130 L E
140 .......... 180 L V
178 .......... 240 L F
Operating limits 0.85 - 1.1 x Uc
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/30
D.C. Coil Voltages
Code
V I I
24 D B
110 D E
Note: for other voltages,
please consult us.
A.C. Coil Voltages
50 Hz 60 Hz Code
V V I I
24 (1) - A B
110 120 A F
220-230 240 A L
380-400 440 A P
500 - A U
(1) only for EH 145 - EH 300
A.C. Coil Voltages
50 Hz 60 Hz Code
V V I I
24 (1) - A B
110 120 A F
220-230 240 A L
380-400 440 A P
500 - A U
(1) only for EH 145 - EH 300
EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors
EH Mechanically Latched Contactors
G Technical Data ..................................... pages 2/33 and 2/39 G General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
G Accessories ............................................................ Section 4 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
G Thermal O/L Relays ............................................... Section 5 G Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors - A.C. Operated
Two mechanically interlocked contactors with the same rating mounted side by side on a base plate without
any wiring.
It is also possible for you to put together these combinations yourself using the components figuring in this
section and in section 4, "Accessories".
A mechanical latching device can be added: see page 4/12.
Ordering Details
Type Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Mechanical interlocking Weight
aux. cont. current AC-3 220 V 380 V for contactors in kg
to be completed with 400V 230 V 400 V 690 V
coil voltage code 240 V Pack
ing
table opposite: I I A kW kW kW 1 piece
SK 824 024- I I 1 1 145 45 75 110 EH 145 EH 145 5.9
SK 825 423- I I 1 1 185 55 90 132 EH 175 EH 175 9.9
SK 825 424- I I 1 1 210 59 110 160 EH 210 EH 210 9.9
SK 826 423- I I 1 1 260 80 140 200 EH 260 EH 260 14.0
SK 826 424- I I 1 1 305 90 160 250 EH 300 EH 300 14.0
SK 827 023- I I 1 1 400 110 200 355 EH 370 EH 370 30.0
SK 827 024- I I 1 1 550 160 280 500 EH 550 EH 550 30.0
SK 828 023- I I 1 1 700 220 370 600 EH 700 EH 700 40.5
SK 828 024- I I 1 1 750 220 400 650 EH 800 EH 800 41.0
Technical Data:
To prevent the risk of a short circuit occurring during changeover switching at high current levels or an arc time
of 40 ms and more on the contactor poles, use a TP 40 IA timer block mounted on an N contactor relay.
If the consumption of the contactor coils to be operated is too high for the timer block contacts (see
characteristics, page 4/9), use an additional contactor relay.
The time delay must be long enough for the arc to be suppressed on the opening of the first contactor before
the second contactor is closed.
EH Mechanically Latched Contactors - A.C. operated
or
- D.C. operated
EH contactor fitted with a WH latching mechanism both mounted on a base plate
Description and operating details: see page 4/12.
Ordering Details
Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Latching for Weight
aux. cont. current AC-3 220 V 380 V contactors in kg
to be completed with 400 V 230 V 400 V 690 V
coil voltage 240 V Pack
ing
table opposite: I I A kW kW kW 1 piece
SK 824 026- I I 1 1 145 45 75 110 EH 145 4
SK 825 425- I I 1 1 185 55 90 132 EH 175 6
SK 825 426- I I 1 1 210 59 110 160 EH 210 6
SK 826 425- I I 1 1 260 80 140 200 EH 260 7.7
SK 826 426- I I 1 1 305 90 160 250 EH 300 7.7
SK 827 025- I I 1 1 400 110 200 355 EH 370 16.1
SK 827 026- I I 1 1 550 160 280 500 EH 550 16.1
SK 828 025- I I 1 1 700 220 370 600 EH 700 21
SK 828 026- I I 1 1 750 220 400 650 EH 800 21.2
S
K

8
2
3

0
2
3
S
K

8
2
5

0
2
5
Index Section
Section
2/31
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
G Contactors .................................. pages 2/12, 2/13 G Accessories (timer, set of connections, etc.) ........................ Section 4
G Contactor Relays ................................... Section 3 G Thermal O/L Relays .............................................................. Section 5
Ordering Details:
Controlgear Selection Guide
Ambient temperature = 40C; 30 operating cycles/hour (if compatible with starting time)
Motor power, kW Max. Contactors Thermal Timer Set of power Wiring
starting O/L Relay connections diagram
time from (1)
220- 240V 380- 415V 500V 660-
cold
KM1 KM3 KM2
230V 400V 690V seconds Main Delta Star
4 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 5.5 15 A 9 A 9 A 9 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 16-1
5.5 5.5 11 11 7.5 7.5 15 A 12 A 12 A 9 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 16-1
9 11 15 15 15 11 15 A 16 A 16 A 12 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 16-1
12.5 12.5 22 22 22 15 15 A 26 A 26 A 16 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 26-1
15 15 25 25 25 18.5 15 A 30 A 30 A 26 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 40-1
18.5 22 37 37 37 37 30 A 40 A 40 A 26 TA 42 DU TE 5 S BED 40-1
25 25 45 45 45 45 30 A 50 A 50 A 30 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 50-1
30 33 55 55 63 59 30 A 63 A 63 A 40 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 50-1
37 40 63 70 75 63 30 A 75 A 75 A 50 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 75-1
page
45 45 75 75 90 90 20 A 95 A 95 A 75 TA 110 DU TE 5 S BED 95 8/10
55 59 90 100 110 132 20 A 110 A 110 A 95 TA 110 DU TE 5 S BED 110
75 75 132 132 160 160 20 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 145
90 90 160 160 200 250 20 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 210
355 355 600 600 700 800 20 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 700 page
400 400 670 670 750 900 20 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 800 8/10
1) The setting current value is: motor nominal current x 0.58.
(2) Interpose an N contacteur relay between the TE 5 S timer and the coil of the delta contactor. (see diagram page 8/10)
Star-Delta Starting
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/32
{
A Contactors - A.C. Operated
Technical Data
Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Insulation Characteristics
i
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage U
imp.
8 kV
Main Pole Utilization Characteristics
e
V 690 690 1000 1000
Conventional free-air thermal current I
th
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, open contactors 40C A 26 28 30 45 65 65 100 100 125 125 145 160
2
4 4 4 6 16 16 35 35 50 50 50 70
e
/AC-1 for air temperature
close to contactor. U
e
max. 690 V
40C A 25 27 30 45 55 60 70 100 115 125 145 160
55C A 22 25 27 40 55 60 60 85 95 105 135 145
70C A 18 20 23 32 39 42 50 70 80 85 115 130
2
2.5 4 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 50 50 70
Utilization category AC-3 for air temperature
close to contactor 55C
e
/AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V A 9 12 17 26 33 40 40 53 65 75 96 110
380-400 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 37 50 65 75 96 110
415 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 37 50 65 72 96 110
440 V A 9 12 16 26 32 37 37 45 65 70 93 100
500 V A 9 12 14 22 28 33 33 45 55 65 80 100
690 V A 7 9 10 17 21 25 25 35 43 46 65 82
1000 V A - - - - - - - 23 25 28 30 30
220-230-240 V kW 2.2 3 4 6.5 9 11 11 15 18.5 22 25 30
380-400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
415 V kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 18.5 25 37 40 55 59
440 V kW 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 25 37 40 55 59
500 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55 59
690 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 40 55 75
1000 V kW - - - - - - - 30 33 37 40 40
Rated frequency limits Hz 25 - 400
Mechanical durability in millions of operating cycles 10 10
Max. mechanical switching frequency cycles/h 3600 3600
Max. electrical switching for AC-1 cycles/h 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 300 300
frequency for AC-3 cycles/h 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 300 300
for AC-2, AC-4 cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 150
Electrical durability see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 10 x I
e
AC-3 10 x I
e
AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 8 x I
e
AC-3 8 x I
e
AC-3
Max. breaking capacity cos = 0.45 at 440 V A 250 250 250 420 820 820 900 1300 1300 1300 1160 1160
(cos = 0.35 for I
e
> 100 A) at 690 V A 100 100 100 170 340 340 490 630 630 630 800 800
Short-circuit protection for contactors
without thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded (2)
U
e
500 V a.c. - gG (gl) type fuses A 25 32 32 50 63 63 80 100 125 160 160 200
Rated short-time withstand current I
cw
1 s A 250 280 300 400 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1320 1320
at 40C ambient temp., in free air, 10 s A 100 120 140 210 400 400 650 650 650 650 800 800
from a cold state 30 s A 60 70 80 110 225 225 370 370 370 370 500 500
1 min A 50 55 60 90 150 150 250 250 250 250 350 350
15 min A 26 28 30 45 65 65 100 100 100 100 160 175
Heat dissipation per pole I
e
/AC-1 W 0.8 1 1.2 1.8 2.5 3 2.5 5 6.5 7 6.5 7.5
I
e
/AC-3 W 0.1 0.2 0.35 0.6 0.9 1.3 0.65 1.3 1.5 2 2.7 3.6
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/ 0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.
3-phase Motors
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz
1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz
3-phase Motors
Index Section
Section
2/33
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
{
EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated
Technical Data
Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
U
i
V 1000
V 600
U
imp.
unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV
U
e
V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I
th
40C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
Conductor cross-sectional area
with preparation mm
2
95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
e
/AC-1
U
e
max. 690 V
40C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
55C A 180 200 230 230 270 310 340 375 470 650 800
70C A 155 160 200 170 215 250 290 325 400 575 720
2
95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
Utilization category AC-3 - 55C
Rated operational current
I
e
/AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 120 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 120 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 120 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 120 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 64 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
Rated operational power
AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V kW 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 75 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 110 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 90 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315
Mechanical durability 10 10 10 5 5 5
cycles/h 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600
Max. electrical cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
switching cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
frequency cycles/h 150 120 120 120 120 120
Rated making capacity AC-3 10 x I
e
/AC-3 10 x I
e
/AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 8 x I
e
/AC-3 8 x I
e
/AC-3
Max. breaking 440 V A 1400 1500 1800 2000 2600 5000 5400 7200 7500
capacity at cos = 0.35 690 V A 1100 1200 1500 1700 2500 5000 5400 6700 6900
gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1 s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current I
cw
30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/34
Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to IEC 947-1;
EN 60 947-1 and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See also section 7
Certifications - approvals See section 7
Air temperature close to contactor
fitted with thermal O/L relay C - 25 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 U
c
) -25 to +55 (0.85 -1.1Uc)
without thermal O/L relay C - 40 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 U
c
) / - 40 to + 70 (U
c
) -25 to +70 (0.85 -1.1Uc)
for storage C - 60 to + 80 - 40 to +70
Climatic withstand acc. to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100 specification II acc. to IEC 68-2-30
Mounting positions: Positions 1 to 5 - Ambient temperature 55C and control voltage 0.85 - 1.1 U
c
(see diagram, p. 2/37) - Ambient temperature 55 - 70C and control voltage equal to U
c
Position 6 - Ambient temperature 55C and control voltage 0.95 - 1.1 U
c
- Ambient temperature > 55C unauthorized
Operating altitude m 3000
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5 g
(See page 2/37) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110
Fixing on mounting rail acc. to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 acc. to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
by screws (not supplied) 2 x M 4 2 x M 6
Connecting terminals Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw M 8 HC, M 8 hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M 4 M 5 with slotted screw head socket screw with
with cable clamp with 2x(5.6x6.5mm) with single connector single connector
clamp double connect. 13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screws with cable clamp
Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw and cable clamp
M 3.5 M 4 M 3.5
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min.-max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid (4 mm
2
) / rigid stranded (6 mm
2
) 1 x mm
2
1 - 4 1.5 - 6 2.5 - 16 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm
2
1 - 4 1.5 -6 2.5 - 16 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/ Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/ Cu cables)
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4
(1)
2.5 - 10 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4
(1)
2.5 - 10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm 8 10
hole mm > 3.7 4.2
Auxiliary conductors (built-in aux. terminals + coil terminals) min. - max.
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm
2
1 - 4 0.75 - 2.5
2
0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
and EN 60529
Coil terminals IP 20
Auxiliary terminals IP 20
(1) 1 or 2 times 0.75 - 4mm
2
but with 0.75 and 1mm
2
cable end.
30 with LW 110
(see section 4)
6
Technical Data (cont.)
Index Section
Section
2/35
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1 and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to the above standards
and amendment 2 to standard IEC 947-4-1 - see section 7
Air temperature
close to C 25 to +55 (0.85 - 1.1 U
c
)
contactor C 40 to +70 (1) (0.85 - 1.1 U
c
)
C 50 to +70
Climatic Withstand according to IEC 68-2-30
Mounting position Position 1 : 30
Positions 3, 4 and 5 : tolerated
Position 6 : only tolerated for 0.90 - 1.1 U
c
not suitable for devices fitted with a dual frequency coil
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 15 ms: without change in contact position
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A : 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g
Fixing
2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4 x M 6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals
M 6 M 10
Cable clamp with M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Connecting
capacity
min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min.-max.
(Cu cable) 25 - 120 25 - 185 70 - 300 70 - 300 - -
(AI/Cu cables) 10 - 70 35 - 120 70 - 300 70 - 300 95-300 -
(AI/Cu cables) - - - 35 - 185 95-300 -
mm 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2
1 or 2 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
1 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
2 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
Earth screw M10
Degree of protection
Main terminals IP 00 (terminal shroud, see section 4)
(1) For large coil voltage range, please consult us. (2) Screws and bolts as well as damping elements supplied.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/36
Magnet System Characteristics
Coil operating limits acc. to IEC 947-4-1: 0.85 - 1.1 X U
c
55C 70C
Drop-out voltage in % of U
c
roughly 40 - 65 %
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180 350
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210 450
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180 410/365
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 22/6.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 26/8
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 27/7.5
Rated control circuit voltage U
c
at 50 Hz V 20 - 690
at 60 Hz V 24 - 600
Operating time Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing ms 10 - 26 8 - 21 8 - 27 10 - 25
- N.C. contact opening ms 7 - 21 6 - 18 7 - 22 7 - 22
Between coil de-energization and:
- N.O. contact opening ms 4 - 11 4 - 11 4 - 11 7 - 15
- N.C. contact closing ms 9 - 16 7 - 14 7 - 14 10 - 18
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I I to I I, see page 0/1.
Characteristics of A 9 - A 40 Contactor Built-in Auxiliary Contacts
(for additional auxiliary contact blocks: see section 4)
e
V 690
Conventional free air thermal current I
th
- 40C A 16
Rated operational current 24-127 V 50/ 60 Hz A 6
I
e
/AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 220-240 V 50/ 60 Hz A 4
380-440 V 50/ 60 Hz A 3
500 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2
690 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2
I
e
/DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V d.c. A/W 6 / 144
48 V d.c. A/W 2.8 / 134
72 V d.c. A/W 2 / 144
125 V d.c. A/W 1.1 / 138
250 V d.c. A/W 0.55 / 138
Operational current frequency Hz 25 - 400
Rated making capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
Rated breaking capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) type fuses A 10
cw
for 1.0 s 100 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
Insulating resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 M
Min. switching capacity 17 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C. contacts ms 2
Heat dissipation per pole at 6 A W 0.10
Electrical durability
Max. switching frequency 1200 cycles/h
AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x I
e
with cos = 0.7 and U
e
breaking current: I
e
e
The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the
built-in auxiliary contacts with respect to the breaking current.
This curve has been drawn for resistive and inductive
loads up to 690V, 40 - 60Hz.
8 0 8 8
Index Section
Section
2/37
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
70 C
roughly 45 - 65 %
Coil consumption
- 50 Hz VA 800 430 800 1100 2600 3500 2600 3500
- 60 Hz VA 900 490 900 1200 2900 4000 2900 4000
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/VA 500 460/400 500 630 2800/2450 3800/3400 2800/2450 3800/3400
- 50 Hz VA/ W 44/15 30/10 44/15 52/18 90/ 36 125/ 50 90/36 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/ W 52/18 35/12 52/18 65/22 105/ 44 140/ 60 105/ 44 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/ W 2.5/2.5 38/12 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 100/47 140/60 100/47 140/60
Rated control circuit
voltage U
c
V 24 - 500 24 - 500 48 - 500
V 24 - 600 48 - 600 110 - 600
Operating
time ms 20 - 40 (30 - 50
(2)
) 30 - 60
ms 15 - 35 (25 - 45
(2)
) 25 - 55
ms 7 - 15 (95 - 120
(2)
) 10 - 20
ms 10 - 18 (100 - 125
(2)
) 13 - 23
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I Ito I I and E I (see page 0/1) (2) 40 - 400 Hz coils with built-in rectifier (see page 0/1)
Mounting Positions (See pages 2/34 and 2/35)
8 0 8 8
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/38
BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated
Technical Data
Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
i
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600
imp.
8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
e
V 690 690 1000 1000
th
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, open contactors 40C A 26 28 36 45 65 100 100 125 125 145 160
2
4 4 6 6 10 35 35 50 50 50 70
e
/AC-1 for air temperature
close to contactor. U
e
max. 690 V
40C A 22 28 36 45 55 70 100 115 125 145 160
55C A 20 25 32 40 45 60 85 95 105 135 145
70C A 17 23 28 32 36 50 70 80 85 115 130
2
2.5 4 6 6 6 25 35 50 50 50 70
Utilization category AC-3 for air temperature
close to contactor 55C
e
/AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V A 9 16 16 25 33 (2) 40 53 65 75 96 110
380-400 V A 9 16 16 25 30 37 50 65 75 96 110
415 V A 9 16 16 25 30 37 50 65 72 96 110
440 V A 9 16 16 20 27 37 45 65 70 93 100
500 V A 7 13 13 17 23 33 45 55 65 80 100
690 V A 6 8 9 13 18 25 35 43 46 65 82
1000 V A - - - - - - 23 25 28 30 30
220-230-240 V kW 2.2 4 4 6.5 (3) 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 30
380-400 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
415 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 37 40 55 59
440 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 22 25 37 40 55 59
500 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 59
690 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 40 55 75
1000 V kW - - - - - - 30 33 37 40 40
Mechanical durability in millions of operating cycles 10 10 10 10 10
Max. mechanical switching frequency cycles/h 6000 6000 3000 3600 3600
Max. electrical switching for AC-1 cycles/h 600 600 600 300 300
frequency for AC-3 cycles/h 1200 1200 600 300 300
for AC-2, AC-4 cycles/h 300 300 150 150 150
Electrical durability see page 2/60 see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 10 x I
e
/ AC-3 10 x I
e
/ AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 8 x I
e
/ AC-3 8 x I
e
/ AC-3
Max. breaking capacity with cos = 0.45 at 440 V A 200 200 315 380 1300 1160
(cos = 0.35 for I
e
> 100 A) at 690 V A 120 120 210 290 630 800
thermal O/L relay - Motor protection excluded (4)
U
e
500 V a.c. - gG (gl) type fuses A 25 32/35 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200
Rated short-time withstand 1 s A 200 280 280 350 400 1000 1000 1000 1000 1320 1320
current I
cw
10 s A 90 130 130 200 250 650 650 650 650 800 800
at 40C ambient temperature, in free air, 30 s A 50 70 70 110 150 370 370 370 370 500 500
from cold state 1 min A 40 50 50 90 120 250 250 250 250 350 350
15 min A 22 28 28 45 55 100 100 115 125 160 175
Heat dissipation per pole I
e
/AC-1 W 0.55 1.5 1.80 2.4 2.2 2.5 5 6.5 7 6.5 7.5
I
e
/AC-3 W 0.10 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.65 1.3 1.5 2 2.7 3.6
(2) 32 A at 240V (3) 7.5 kW at 240 V
{
3-phase motors
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz or
1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz
3-phase motors
Index Section
Section
2/39
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated
Technical Data
{
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
U
i
V 1000
V 600
U
imp.
Unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV
U
e
V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I
th
40C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
Conductor cross-sectional area
with preparation mm
2
95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
e
/AC-1
U
e
max. 690 V
40C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
55C A 180 200 230 230 270 310 340 375 470 650 800
70C A 155 160 200 170 215 250 290 325 400 575 720
2
95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
Utilization category AC-3 55C
Rated operational current
I
e
/AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 120 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 120 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 120 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 120 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 64 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
Rated operational power
AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V kW 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 75 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 110 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 90 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315
Mechanical durability 10 10 10 5 5 5
cycles/h 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600
Max. electrical cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
switching cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
frequency cycles/h 150 120 120 120 120 120
Rated making capacity AC-3 10 x I
e
/AC-3 10 x I
e
/AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 8 x I
e
/AC-3 8 x I
e
/AC-3
Max. breaking 415 V A 1400 1500 1800 2000 2600 5000 5400 7200 7500
capacity 690 V A 1100 1200 1500 1700 2500 5000 5400 6700 6900
gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1 s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current I
cw
30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/ 0.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/40
30 avec LW 110
(voir ch. 4)
6
Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1
fitted with a thermal O/L relay C -25 to +50 (0.85 to 1.1 U
c
) -25 to +50 (0.85 to 1.1 U
c
) -25 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1Uc)
without thermal O/L relay C -40 to +55(0.85 to 1.1 Uc) / +55 to +70(Uc) -40 to +55(0.85 to 1.1 Uc) / +55 to +70(Uc) -25 to +70 (0.85 to 1.1Uc)
for storage C -60 to +80 -60 to +80 -40 to +70
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100 specification II
Mounting positions: Positions 1,3 ,4 - 55 C: 0.85 to 1.1 U
c
Positions 1to 5 - 55 C: 0.85 to 1.1 U
c
(see drawing p. 2/43) - = 55 to 70 C: ........ U
c
- = 55 to 70 C: ....... U
c
Positions 2,6 - 55 C: 0.95 to 1.1 U
c
Position 6 - 55 C: 0.95 to 1.1 U
c
- > 55 C: not acceptable - > 55 C: not acceptable
Position 5: see tables p. 2/14; 2/19; 2/24
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5 g
(see page 2/43) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110
Fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 according to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
by screws (not supplied) 2 x M 4 2 x M 6
Connecting terminals Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp M8 HC, M8, hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M 4 M 5 slotted screw head socket screw with
with single connector single connector
13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
M 3.5 M 4
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid ( 4 mm
2
) / rigid stranded ( 6 mm
2
) 1 x mm
2
1 - 4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm
2
1 - 4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/Cu cables)
2
1 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5- 6 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5-6 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm 8 10 13
hole mm > 3.7 4 5
Auxiliary conductors (built-in auxiliary terminals + coil terminals) min. - max. min. - max.
2
1 - 4 0. 75 - 2.5
Flexible without cable end (1) 1 x mm
2
1 - 2.5 min. - max.
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 and EN 60529 Protection against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Main terminals IP 10 IP 10
Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20
Auxiliary terminals IP 10 IP 20
(1) Except auxiliary built into BC 25: 0.75 - 4 mm
2
Index Section
Section
2/41
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1/947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1/60 947-4-1.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to the above standards
and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See section 7
Certification - approvals See section 7
Air temperature
close to C 25 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1 U
c
)
contactor C 40 to +70 (1) (0.85 to 1.1 U
c
)
C 50 to +70
Climatic Withstand according to IEC 68-2-30
Mounting position Position 1 : 30
Positions 3, 4 and 5 : tolerated
Position 6 : only tolerated for 0.90 - 1.1 U
c
unsuitable for devices fitted with dual frequency coil
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A: 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g
Fixing
2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4 x M 6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals
M 6 M 10
Cable clamps with M 3.5 pozidriv (+,-) screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Connecting
capacity
min. - max. min. - max. min.-max. min. - max. min.-max.
(Cu cables) 25 - 120 25 - 185 70-300 70 - 300 - -
(AI/Cu cables) 10 - 70 35 - 120 70-300 70 - 300 95-300 -
(AI/Cu cables) - - - 35 - 185 95-300 -
mm 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2
1 or 2 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
1 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
2 x mm
2
0.5 - 2.5
Earth screw M10
Degree of protection
Main terminals IP 00 (terminal shroud see section 4)
(1) For large coil voltage range, please consult us. (2) Screws and bolts as well as damping elements supplied.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/42
Coil operating limits acc. to IEC 947-4-1: 0.85 to 1.1 X U
c
55C 70C
Drop-out voltage % of U
c
roughly 15 - 40 %
Coil consumption (average value)
- pull-in, from cold state W 7 200 400
- holding, from warm state W 7 4 2.4
Rated control circuit voltage U
c
- open L/R ms 40 15 6
- closed L/R ms 90 25 30-40
V 6 - 250 12 - 250 12 - 250
Operating time Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing ms 50 - 75 13 - 30 15 - 25
- N.C. contact opening ms 45 - 70 10 - 27 12 - 22
- N.O. contact opening ms 15 - 30* 5 - 15* 15 - 20*
- N.C. contact closing ms 17 - 32* 8 - 18* 18 - 23*
*The use of surge suppressors increases the opening time on a scale of 1.1 to 1.5
for a varistor suppressor and on a scale of 4 to 8 for a diode suppressor.
Characteristics of BC 9 - BC 25 Contactor Built-in Auxiliary Contacts
(for additional auxiliary contact blocks: see section 4)
e
V 690
th
A 10
Rated operational current 24-127 V 50/ 60 Hz A 6
I
e
/AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 220-240 V 50/ 60 Hz A 4
380-440 V 50/ 60 Hz A 3
500 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2
690 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2
I
e
/DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V d.c. A/W 6 / 144
48 V d.c. A/W 2.8 / 134
72 V d.c. A/W 2 / 144
125 V d.c. A/W 1.1 / 138
250 V d.c. A/W 0.55 / 138
Operational current frequency Hz 25 - 400
Rated making capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
Rated breaking capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
cw
for 1.0 s 50 A
for 0.1 s 100 A
Insulation resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 M
Min. switching capacity 24 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C. contacts ms 2
Heat dissipation per pole at 6 A W 0.15
Max. switching frequency 1200 cycles/h
e
e
breaking current: I
e
e
The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the built-in
auxiliary contacts with respect to the breaking current.
This curve has been drawn for resistive and inductive
loads up to 690V, 40 - 60Hz.
Index Section
Section
2/43
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
70 C
roughly 15 - 50 %
Coil
consumption W 450 330 500 630 800 1100 800 1100
W 3.6 22 2.5 2.5 20 20 20 20
Rated control circuit
voltage U
c
V 12 - 220 24 - 220
Operating
time ms 30 - 50 60 - 80
ms 27 - 47 55 - 75
ms 10 - 35
ms 13 - 38
Mounting Positions (See pages 2/40 and 2/41)
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/44
Control of lighting circuits
General
Contactor choice criteria for control of lighting circuits are as follows:
type, power rating and number of lamps
connection mode
current values on closing and in steady state
power factor
presence or not of correction capacitors
Lighting circuits
In a given circuit, the number and power rating of lamps are defined and cannot result in overload. Only short-circuit protection has to be provided.
gG fuses or modular circuit-breakers will be chosen for this purpose.
The lamps have very specific technical data, according to their construction type.
Incandescent lamps have a very high current on closing: more than 15 times normal current.
They do not introduce a large phase displacement between current and voltage.
Fluorescent tubes are equipped with a ballast whose purpose is two-fold: contribute to ignition and limit current to nominal value once steady state
is reached. This ballast is a reactor that considerably lowers the power factor. It may or may not be compensated.
Individual compensation Serial compensation in dual mounting
(parallel compensation)
Choice of contactors
The following tables indicate, for each contactor type, the maximum permissible number of lamps per phase. Air temperature, near the contactor,
must be limited to 55 C.
Numbers are given for a 230 V voltage distributed between phase and neutral: single-phase (phase + neutral) or three-phase
(3 phases + neutral) distribution.
In the case of a three-phase supply without neutral, 230 V phase-to-phase, the permissible number of lamps per phase will be that given in the tables
multiplied by 0.58.
Example: 120 x100W/230V incandescent lamps - 400 V three-phase network with distributed neutral.
Calculate the number of lamps per phase: 120 : 3 = 40. On the 100 W line of the incandescent lamp table, contactor A12 is limited to
38 lamps per phase, you must thus select contactor A 16 which accepts up to 42 lamps per phase.
Contactors with a.c. coil Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Contactors with d.c. coil Type AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Lamp technical data Maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A F
Incandescent and halogen lamps
60 0.27 57 65 70 103 142 155 220 246 272 355 390
100 0.45 34 38 42 62 85 93 132 147 163 210 240
220/240V a.c.
200 0.91 17 19 20 30 42 46 65 73 80 105 120
300 1.37 11 12 13 20 28 30 43 48 53 70 80
500 2.28 6 7 8 12 16 18 26 29 32 42 48
1000 4.55 3 4 4 6 8 9 13 14 16 21 24
Fluorescent lamps without compensation - Fluorescent lamps with electronic starter
20 0.38 40 44 50 73 100 110 157 173 192 250 278
40 0.45 33 37 42 62 84 93 133 145 162 210 234
220/240V a.c.
65 0.70 21 24 27 40 54 60 85 94 104 135 150
80 0.80 18 21 23 35 47 52 75 82 91 118 132
100 1.15 13 14 16 24 33 36 52 57 63 82 92
110 1.20 12 14 15 23 31 35 50 55 60 79 88
Index Section
Section
2/45
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Lighting Circuit Switching
a.c. operated contactors Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
d.c. operated contactors Type AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Lamps characteristics Maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A F
Fluorescent lamps with parallel compensation
20 0.18 5 83 94 105 155 215 233 335 360 400 530 580
40 0.26 5 58 65 75 107 150 160 230 255 280 365 400
220/240 Va.c.
65 0.42 7 35 40 45 66 92 100 142 158 173 225 250
80 0.52 7 28 32 36 53 74 80 115 126 140 180 200
100 0.65 16 23 26 29 43 59 64 92 101 112 145 160
110 0.70 18 21 24 27 40 55 59 85 94 104 135 150
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting
2 x 20 2 x 0.14 2 x 54 2 x 62 2 x 67 2 x 99 2 x 137 2 x 148 2 x 214 2 x 236 2 x 260 2 x 336 2 x 375
2 x 40 2 x 0.25 2 x 30 2 x 35 2 x 38 2 x 56 2 x 77 2 x 84 2 x 120 2 x 133 2 x 147 2 x 190 2 x 208
220/240 Va.c.
2 x 65 2 x 0.40 2 x 19 2 x 21 2 x 23 2 x 35 2 x 48 2 x 52 2 x 75 2 x 83 2 x 90 2 x 120 2 x 130
2 x 80 2 x 0.48 2 x 16 2 x 18 2 x 19 2 x 29 2 x 40 2 x 43 2 x 62 2 x 68 2 x 76 2 x 100 2 x 110
2 x 100 2 x 0.60 2 x 12 2 x 14 2 x 15 2 x 22 2 x 32 2 x 34 2 x 49 2 x 55 2 x 60 2 x 80 2 x 88
2 x 110 2 x 0.65 2 x 11 2 x 13 2 x 14 2 x 21 2 x 29 2 x 32 2 x 46 2 x 51 2 x 56 2 x 73 2 x 82
Compact fluorescent lamps
5 0.045 342 388 422 622 855 930 1330 1470 1630 2100 2350
7 0.075 205 233 252 372 512 558 798 886 978 1250 1400
220/240 Va.c. 11 0.105 146 166 180 266 366 398 570 632 700 900 1000
15 0.135 114 128 140 205 285 310 440 490 540 700 780
20 0.160 96 109 118 175 240 262 375 415 458 590 650
23 0.180 85 96 105 155 212 230 330 368 408 525 580
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps without compensation
35 1.4 10 11 12 17 23 26 36 41 45 58 63
55 1.4 10 11 12 17 23 26 36 41 45 58 63
220/240 Va.c. 90 2.1 6 7 8 11 16 17 24 27 30 39 42
135 3.1 4 5 5 8 11 12 16 18 20 26 28
180 3.1 4 5 5 8 11 12 16 18 20 26 28
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps with parallel compensation
35 0.6 20 21 23 25 38 46 50 83 96 104 135 147
55 0.6 20 21 23 25 38 46 50 83 96 104 135 147
220/240 Va.c. 90 0.9 25 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98
135 0.9 45 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98
180 0.9 45 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98
High pressure sodium vapour lamps without compensation
150 1.8 6 7 8 11 15 17 23 26 29 38 41
250 3 4 4 5 7 9 10 14 16 17 23 25
220/240 Va.c. 400 4.4 3 3 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 15 17
600 6.2 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 8 8 11 12
1000 10.3 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7
High pressure sodium vapour lamps with parallel compensation
150 1 20 13 14 15 23 28 30 50 58 63 81 88
250 1.5 36 8 9 10 15 18 20 33 38 42 54 59
220/240 Va.c. 400 2.5 48 5 5 6 9 11 12 20 23 25 32 36
600 3.3 65 4 4 5 7 8 9 15 17 19 24 27
1000 6.2 100 4 4 5 8 9 10 13 14
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/46
d.c. Circuit Switching
A(E), GA(E), EH and EK Contactors
A

8
2
9

D
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
2

D
A

8
2
9

D
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
2

D
A

8
2
9

D
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
2

D
General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
G For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
G For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/ R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
G The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
G All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).
Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details page 2/ 12
a.c. operated contactors Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 GA 75
d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 BC30 see page 2/48 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 GAE 75
Utilization category DC-1, L/ R 1 ms
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 120
110 V A 10 15 20 120
220 V A 120
440 V A 100
600 V A 75
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
220 V A 10 15 20
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
220 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
72 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
220 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
440 V A 10 15 20
Utilization category DC- 3, L/R 2 ms
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 120
110 V A 6 7 8 120
220 V A 100
440 V A 85
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
220 V A 6 7 8
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
220 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
72 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
220 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
440 V A 6 7 8
Utilization category DC- 5, L/R 7.5 ms
72 V A 9 12 16 25 30 40 50 50 63 75 85
110 V A 4 4 4 85
220 V A 85
440 V A 35
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 10 15 20 30 45 50 80 80 90 100
220 V A 4 4 4
72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120
220 V A 9 12 16 25 30 40 50 50 63 75
72 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
110 V A 25 27 30 45 70 100 120
220 V A 10 15 20 30 70 70 100
440 V A 4 4 4
Index Section
Section
2/47
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Technical data
G The tables indicate for the standard contactors the I
e
max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage U
e
and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a 25 +70 C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/32) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
G Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/h.
G For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
G For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63 2000 A).
G Accessories, see section 4.
A(E), GA(E), EH and EK Contactors
a.c.operated Type A 95 A 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
d.c.operated Type AE 95 AE 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
72 V A 145 160 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 750
110 V A 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 750
72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
440 V A 170 210 210 210 270 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A 450 650 800 800
72 V A 200 200 260 300
110 V A 200 200 260 300
220 V A 200 200 260 300
440 V A 200 200 260 300
600 V A 260 300
Utilization category DC-3, L/R 2 ms
72 V A 96 110 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 700
72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A 450 650 800 800
72 V A 135 135 170 210
110 V A 135 135 170 210
220 V A 135 135 170 210
440 V A 135 135 170 210
600 V A 170 210
Utilization category DC-5, L/ R 7.5 ms
72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A 450 650 800 800
72 V A 135 135 170 210
110 V A 135 135 170 210
220 V A 135 135 170 210
440 V A 135 135 170 210
600 V A 170 210
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/48
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
2

D
A

8
2
9

D
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
2

D
BC 9 BC 30 Contactors
General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
G For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
G For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/ R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
G All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).
Technical data
G The tables indicate for the standard contactors the I
e
max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage U
e
and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a 25 +70 C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/38) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
G Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/ h.
G For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
G For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63 2000 A).
Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details pages 2/ 14, 2/17.
d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 25 BC 30
72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 5 10
72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 22 28 45 55
220 V A 5 10
72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 22 28 45 55
220 V A 22 28 45 55
72 V A 22 28 45
110 V A 22 28 45
220 V A 22 28 45
440 V A 5 10
Utilization category DC- 3, L/R 2 ms
Utilization category DC- 5, L/R 7.5 ms
72 V A 5 9 15 25
110 V A 2 2
72 V A 9 18 25 30
110 V A 8 16 20 30
220 V A 2 2
72 V A 10 16 25 30
110 V A 10 16 25 30
220 V A 10 10 15 25
72 V A 10 16 25
110 V A 10 16 25
220 V A 10 16 20
440 V A 2 2
A

8
2
9

D
Index Section
Section
2/49
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Switching the primary of 3-phase transformers, on energization of the transformer, is characterized by high current peaks due to the magnetization
phenomena. These current peaks are roughly 20 to 30 times the transformer nominal current.
The tables below show the operational powers for a maximum switching frequency of 60 operating cycles per hour.
A.C. operated contactors Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95
D.C. operated contactors Type AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95
Operational power at U
e
: 50/60 Hz
220/240 V kVA 4 4 5 9.5 13 15 19 20 22 23
380/400 V kVA 7 7 8 16.5 22 26 33 35 37.5 39
415/440 V kVA 8 8 9 18 24 28.5 36 38 41 43
500 V kVA 9.5 9.5 10.5 21.5 28 34.5 43 46 49 52
660/690 V kVA 12.5 12.5 14 28.5 37 45.5 57 60.5 65 68
Max. permissible
peak
A 330 330 360 750 1000 1200 1500 1600 1700 1800
A.C. operated contactors Type A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
D.C. operated contactors Type AE 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Operational power at U
e
: 50/60 Hz
220/240 V kVA 26 35 45 50 55 60 95 105 130 130
380/400 V kVA 46 60 75 90 95 100 165 180 240 240
415/440V kVA 50 65 80 100 110 115 180 200 260 260
500V kVA 60 80 100 120 130 140 220 240 310 310
660/690V kVA 80 105 130 150 170 180 290 310 410 410
Max. permissible
peak
A 2100 2800 3500 4200 4600 4900 7700 8400 11000 11000
LV/LV 3-phase Transformer Switching
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/50
Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors
General
Three kinds of contactor are used to control three-phase slip-ring motors: the stator contactor, the acceleration contactor(s) and the rotor short-
circuit contactor. Refer to the diagram opposite.
The selection tables below concern complete smooth starting, excluding specific cases, such as: intermittent operation, regenerative current,
controlled slipping, etc. for which you need to consult our specialised departments.
The starting and breaking technical data for slip-ring motors are defined in standard IEC 947-4-1 in the AC-2 utilization category.
Operating cycle
The load factor is defined by the equation: L. F. (%) =
Cycle time (Operating cycle + Rest cycle)
x 100
Stator contactor
Closing of the starting current, conditioned by the value of the rotor resistances: it may reach 1.5 to 4 times motor rated operational current.
Breaking of the rated operational current, or of the starting current, with possible regenerative current.
The following table gives the permissible values of the rated operational stator current, as a function of load factor.
Maximum switching frequency of 600 cycles an hour and temperature of 55 C maximum near the contactor.
Contactors with a.c. coil A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Load factor 15 % A 13.5 19 26 35 50 55 70 95 125 200 220
25 % A 12 17 23 32 45 50 63 85 110 165 185
40 % A 10.5 15 19.5 27 39 42 54 73 95 135 150
60 % A 9.5 13 17.5 24 34 37 48 65 85 120 135
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 9 12 17 26 32 35 45 60 75 96 110
Acceleration contactors
The sizing of these contactors is based on the rated
operational current AC-1 (see p. 2/32 and 2/33) that we
recall below for the maximum ambient temperature of
55 C.
Delta connection of these contactors is considered: reduce
currents by 35% if star connection is used.
The table opposite lists the factors to be applied to
current AC-1 of the contactors in order to obtain the
permissible limit value of the motor rated operational rotor
current. This table takes into account the number of cycles
an hour (without inching) and the current flow time per
cycle, in the contactor.
Number of cycles an hour 1 3 6 12 20 30 60 120
Current flow time per cycle Factors applicable to Ie /AC-1
5 s 5.2 4.9 4.7 4.3 4.0 3.7 3.4 2.8
10 s 3.8 3.6 3.4 3.1 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.2
20 s 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.6
30 s 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.1 1.9 1.7 -
40 s 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.7 1.5 -
60 s 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.5 - -
Rated operational current Ie /AC-1
for air temperature near the
contactor 55 C A 22 25 27 40 55 60 85 95 105 135 145
Rotor short-circuit contactor
The duty of this contactor is characterised by small closing stresses. The decisive factor is the thermal stress. Delta connection of the contactor
is considered: reduce currents by 35% if star connection is used.
The following table gives the permissible values of the rated operational rotor current, as a function of load factor.
Temperature: 55 C maximum near the contactor.
Load factor 15 % A 45 58 70 105 112 125 160 210 245 290 330
25 % A 40 51 63 93 102 115 140 180 215 260 300
40 % A 35 42 54 80 87 95 120 155 185 230 260
60 % A 30 39 47 70 76 86 110 140 163 200 230
periodical continuous
duty with electrical braking A 28 35 40 58 72 85 100 130 152 170 200
Rated operational rotor voltage:
G Maximum values for starting and breaking V 1100 (1320 if star connection) 2200 (2600)
G Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 550 (600 if star connection) 690 (730)
Index Section
Section
2/51
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Example of a three-stroke starter
The first stroke corresponds to energisation of the
motor by the stator contactor: all the resistances are
operational in the rotor circuit.
At the second stroke, the acceleration contactor
short-circuits the first resistance stack.
At the third stroke, the rotor short-circuit contactor
is activated by eliminating the last resistance stack, thus
completing the starting period.
Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors
Contactors with a.c. coil EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Load factor 15 % A 335 360 425 530 625 850 1130 1400 1500
25 % A 270 300 350 440 515 680 930 1200 1250
40 % A 215 250 300 370 430 580 780 980 1050
60 % A 180 220 255 315 370 480 670 850 900
with electrical braking A 145 175 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
Rated operational current Ie /AC-1
for air temperature near the
contactor 55 C A 200 230 270 340 375 470 650 800 800
Load factor 15 % A 480 580 660 810 950 1200 1600 2050 2200
25 % A 420 530 600 710 830 1050 1400 1800 2000
40 % A 370 460 520 620 720 950 1250 1500 1700
60 % A 330 400 460 560 650 810 1100 1400 1500
with electrical braking A 290 350 400 470 550 700 950 1200 1300
Rated operational rotor voltage:
G Maximum values for starting and breaking V 2200 (2600 if star connection) 3000 (3600) 4000 (4800 if star connection)
G Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 690 (730 if star connection) 690 (730) 690 (730 if star connection)
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/52
Example:
A 9 contactor
Coil voltage: 230 V 50 Hz, contactor coil inrush power consumption: 70 VA,
control circuit conductor cross-sectional area: Cu 1.5 mm
2
. Max. permissible length: 2000 m.
Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in
Contactor Control Circuit
Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor closing:
Depending on the coil inrush power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor cross-sectional area.
Under certain conditions the excessive length of the control circuit conductors may prevent the contactor from
carrying out closing and opening orders.
no closing: due to excessive voltage drop (in a.c. or d.c.).
no opening: due to excessive capacitance (in a.c.).
1
st
case: closing (contactor with a.c. or d.c. fed control circuit).
The voltage drop is due to the inrush current (inrush power) and to the resistance of the control circuit
conductors.
The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
G the inrush coil consumption.
G the supply voltage.
G the connecting wire cross-sectional area.
The graph has been drawn for a max. line voltage drop of 5%.
Inrush coil consumption (average value)
A.C. control circuit 50 Hz D.C. control circuit
N Contactor relays KC Contactor relays
4 and 8-pole 70 VA 4 and 8-pole 7 W
Contactors: Contactors:
A 9, 12, 16 70 VA BC 9, 16, 18, 25, 30 7 W
A 26, 30, 40 120 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 180 VA AE 45, 50, 63, 75 200 W
A 95, 110 450 VA AE 95, 110 400 W
EH 145 430 VA EH 145 330 W
EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 800 VA EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 500 W
EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 1100 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 630 W
EH 370, 550 2600 VA EH 370, 550 800 W
EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 3500 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 1100 W
Index Section
Section
2/53
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in
Contactor Control Circuit
2
nd
case: opening (contactor with a.c. fed control circuit)
Under certain conditions, an a.c. operated contactor does not open when the control circuit is de-energized.
This is due to a critical capacity of the excessively long control circuit line and the type of contactor coil control
layout (see diagrams A and B opposite).
This may be caused by the following factors:
G high control voltage.
G low coil holding consumption.
G low contactor drop-out voltage (according to IEC 947-4-1: 0.2 to 0.75 x U
c
).
If lines longer than those indicated are required, the following measures must be taken:
G select a contactor with a higher rating.
G select a lower control voltage.
G connect "R
P
" impedances in parallel with the contactor coil:
10
3
sizing of parallel resistor: R
P
= (with C in F)
C
The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
G the coil holding consumption VA.
G the supply voltage.
G the capacity in F/km (depending on the control layout).
Wiring diagrams A and B oppposite show two supply and coil control wiring examples.
Coil holding consumption (average value)
For a.c. control circuit 50Hz For a.c. control circuit 50Hz
Contactor relays: Contactors:
N, 4-pole 8 VA A 95, 110 28 VA
N, 8-pole 8 VA EH 145 30 VA
Contactors: EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 44 VA
A 9, 12, 16 8 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 52 VA
A 26, 30, 40 12 VA EH 370, 550 90 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 18 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 125 VA
Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor opening:
Depending on the coil holding power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor capacity.
Examples:
A 16 contactor
Coil voltage U
c
= 500V, 50Hz, 8 VA contactor coil holding consumption,
control type: diagram A, via maintained pushbutton, and 2-core cable with
a capacity of 0.2 F/km.
Max. permissible length: 60 m.
Single control line length
Wiring diagram A
Via maintained pushbutton and
2-core cable (with a capacity of
0.2 F/km, for example).
Single control line length
Wiring diagram B
Via momentary pushbutton plus
hold-in contact and 3-core cable
(with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 = 0.4 F/km,
for example).
A 50 contactor
Coil voltage U
c
= 230V, 50Hz, 18 VA contactor coil holding consumption,
control type: diagram B via momentary pushbutton, hold-in contact and
3-core cable with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 F/km = 0.4 F/km.
Max. permissible length: 380 m.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/54
Parallel Connection of Main Poles
Temporary or Intermittent Duty
Parallel Connection of Main Poles
Purpose: Increasing the a.c. resistive load.
Remark: Parallel connection of main poles to increase the d.c. resistive load is not acceptable.
Means: The poles can be connected in parallel via connecting strips: see accessories section 4.
LP and LH for parallel connection of 2 poles
LY and LF for parallel connection of 3 poles
LG for parallel connection of 4 poles
The table below shows the uprating factor for I
e
/AC-1 max. in relation to the number of poles in parallel and for a max. switching frequency of:
600 operating cycles per hour for A 9 - EH 300 and EK 110 - EK 210 contactors.
300 operating cycles per hour for EH 370 - EH 800, EK 370 and EK 550 contactors.
2 poles in // 3 poles in // 4 poles in //
Contactors Factor to be applied to the rated operational current I
e
/AC-1 to obtain the permissible current I
e
/AC-1
a.c. Operated d.c. Operated with "n" poles in parallel.
A 9, A 12, A 16 BC 9, BC 16
A 26 BC 25
1.6 2.2 2.6
A 26, A 30 BC 18, BC 30
A 40, A 50 AE 50
A 63, A 75 AE 63, AE 75
1.6 2.2
A 95, A 110 AE 95, AE 110

A 45-40, A 50-40 AE 45-40, AE 50-40
A 75-40 AE 75-40
1.6 2.2 2.6
EH145
EH175, EH210
a.c. and d.c.
EH260, EH 300
Operated
1.6 2.2
EH370, EH550 }
EH700, EH800
EK110, EK150
EK175, EK210
a.c. and d.c.
1.6 2.2 2.8
EK370, EK550
} Operated
Utilization of A 9 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 Contactors for Temporary/Intermittent Duty
The table below shows the factor to be applied to the rated operational current I
e
/AC-1 to obtain the permissible operational current I
e
/ AC-1 in relation
to the switching frequency and the current flow time per cycle.
Operating cycles per hour 120 60 20 6 2 1
Current flow time Factor to be applied to the rated operational current I
e
/ AC-1 max.
per cycle in seconds. to obtain the permissible current I
e
/ AC-1 for temporary/intermittent duty.
5 2.8 3.4 4 4.7 5 5.2
10 2.2 2.6 3 3.4 3.7 3.8
20 1.6 2 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.8
30 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
40 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2
60 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9
Example:
A 9 contactor (intermittent duty, resistive load)
e
/ AC-1 at 55C (page 2/32) 22 A
Switching frequency 2 operations/h
Current flow time per cycle 20 s
Factor to be applied to the current I
e
/ AC-1 2.7
Permissible current: 2.7 x 22 = 59 A
Index Section
Section
2/55
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Contactor Utilization Categories
and Electrical Durability
General
Utilization categories determine the current making and breaking conditions relating to the characteristics of the loads to be controlled by the
contactors. International standard IEC 947-4-1 and European standard EN 60 947-4-1 are the standards to be referred to.
If I
c
is the current to be broken by the contactor and I
e
the rated operational current normally drawn by the load, then:
Categories AC-1 and AC-3: I
c
= I
e
- Category AC-4: I
c
= 6 x I
e
Generally speaking I
c
= m x I
e
where m is a multiple of the load operational current.
On pages 2/56 - 2/59, the curves corresponding to categories AC-1, AC-3 and AC-4 represent the electrical durability variation of standard contactors
in relation to the breaking current I
c
.
Electrical durability is expressed in millions of operating cycles.
These curves have been plotted for 400 V - 50 Hz 3-phase currents but remain valid up to 690 V - 40-60 Hz provided that a check is carried out
to make sure that at the operational voltage U
e
, the current I
e
normally drawn by the load does not exceed the value of the contactor rated operational
current: I
e
/ AC-1 for category AC-1 and I
e
/ AC-3 for categories AC-3 and AC-4. The values are given for each type of contactor in pages 2/32 and
2/33: Technical data.
Curve Utilization Mode
Electrical durability forecast and contactor selection for categories AC-1, AC-3 or AC-4
G Note the characteristics of the load to be controlled:
Operational voltage ............................................................................ U
e
Current normally drawn ...................................................................... I
e
- U
e
/ I
e
/ kW relation for motors, see page 0/0.
Utilization category ............................................................................. AC-1, AC-3 or AC-4
Breaking current ................................................................................. I
c
= I
e
for AC-1 and for AC-3 ; I
c
= 6 x I
e
for AC-4
G Define the number of operating cycles N required.
G On the diagram corresponding to the operational category, select the contactor with the curve immediately above the intersection point (Ic; N).
Electrical durability forecast and contactor selection for mixed duty motor control: AC-3 (I
c
= I
e
) type switching off while "motor running"
and, occasionally, AC-4 (I
c
= 6 x I
e
) type switching off while "motor accelerating" .
G Note the characteristics of the motor to be controlled:
Operational voltage ............................................................................ U
e
Current normally drawn while "motor running" ................................... I
e
- U
e
/ I
e
/ kW relation for motors, see page 0/0.
Breaking current for AC-3 ................................................................... I
c
= I
e
Breaking current for AC-4 while "motor accelerating" ........................ I
c
= 6 x I
e
Percentage of AC-4 operations .......................................................... K (on the basis of the total number of operating cycles)
G Define the total number of operating cycles N required.
G Note the smallest contactor rating compatible for AC-3 (U
e
/ I
e
) on pages 2/32 and 2/33.
G For the selected contactor make a note of the following in relation to the voltage using diagram AC-4 page 2/58 or 2/59:
The number of operating cycles A for I
c
= I
e
The number of operating cycles B for I
c
= 6 x I
e
G Calculate the estimated number of cycles N' (N' is always below A)
A
N' =
1 + 0.01 K (A/B - 1)
G If N' is too low in relation to the target N, calculate the estimated number of cycles for a higher contactor rating.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/56
A, EH and EK Contactor Utilization Categories
Electrical Durability for AC-1 Utilization Category. Ambient Temperature < 55 C
Switching non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. The breaking current I
c
for AC-1 is equal to the rated operational current of the load.
Example:
I
c
/ AC-1 = 24A Electrical durability required = 2 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the A 30 contactor at intersection " " (24A / 2 million operations).
Index Section
Section
2/57
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current I
c
for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current I
e
(I
e
= motor full load current).
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - U
e
< 440 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 C
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - 440 V < U
e
A and EH Contactor Utilization Categories
Example:
Motor power 40 kW for AC-3 - U
e
= 400 V utilization Electrical durability required = 1.5 million operations.
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 40 kW, 400 V corresponds to I
e
= 79 A. Select the A110 contactor at intersection " " (79A/ 1.5 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - U
e
< 440 V).
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/58
e
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current I
c
is equal to 6 x I
e
, keeping in mind that I
e
is
the motor rated operational current (I
e
= motor full-load current).
Example:
e
As stated on cover page 0/0: 45 kW, 400 V corresponds to I
e
= 85 A.
For AC-4: I
c
= 6 x I
e
= 510 A - Select the EH 260 contactor at intersection " " (510A/ 0.2 million operations) on the curves (AC-4 - U
e
< 440 V).
Index Section
Section
2/59
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-4 - 440 V < U
e
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current I
c
is equal to 6 x I
e
, keeping in mind that I
e
is
the motor rated operational current (I
e
Example:
e
As stated on cover page 0/0: 59 kW, 600 V corresponds to I
e
= 71.1 A.
For AC-4: I
c
= 6 x I
e
= 426.6 A - Select the EH 145 contactor at intersection " " (427A/ 0.04 million operations) on the curves
(AC-4 - 440 V < U
e
< 690 V).
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2/60
BC Contactor Utilization Categories
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-1. Ambient Temperature < 55 C
Switching non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. The breaking current I
c
for AC-1 is equal to the rated operational current of the load.
Example:
e
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 9 kW, 400 V corresponds to I
e
= 18.3 A. Select the BC 25 contactor at intersection " " (18.3 A/2.3 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - U
e
< 500 V).
Example:
I
c
/ AC-1 = 21A Electrical durability required = 1.1 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the BC 16 contactor at intersection " " (21A / 1.1 million operations).
e
< 500 V. Ambient Temperature < 55 C
Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current I
c
for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current I
e
(I
e
Index Section
Section
3/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3
N and KC Contactor Relays
Contents
Description and Accessories
N Contactor Relays .............................................................................................................. 3/2
KC and TKC Contactor Relays ............................................................................................ 3/4
Ordering Details
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated.................................................................................... 3/6
KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated ................................................................................. 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range ............................. 3/7
Technical Data
General Technical Data ....................................................................................................... 3/8
Electrical Durability Technical Characteristics ..................................................................... 3/8
Pole Utilization Characteristics ............................................................................................ 3/9
Magnet System Characteristics ........................................................................................... 3/9
Specific TKC Contactor Relay Characteristics..................................................................... 3/7
Accessories and Coils................................................................................................. Section 4
General Technical Data and Approvals ...................................................................... Section 7
Terminal Marking and Positioning............................................................................... Section 8
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. Section 9
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3/2
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated
Description
Application
N contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.
Description
G a.c. operated with laminated magnetic circuit.
G 2 versions: 4-pole/1 stack or 8-pole/2-stack.
The width of 8-pole devices is identical to that of 4-pole devices; only the depth is increased.
G Side by side mounting possible.
G Self-cleaning auxiliary contacts.
G Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.
G Ordering Details ....................................................................... page 3/6 G General - Approvals ............................................................... Section 7
G Technical Data .......................................................................... page 3/8 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
G Accessories ............................................................................. Section 4 G Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
N
4
0
E
14NO
24NO
34NO
44NO
13NO
23NO
33NO
43NO
5-
6-
7-
8-
5-
6-
7-
8-
A 1 A 2
2 2 0 - 2 3 0 V 5 0 H z
2 3 0 - 2 4 0 V 6 0 H z
R 8 0
E
0
5
3
7
D
3
Clear marking of coil voltages
and frequencies.
Distances between holes according to
EN 50 002.
Location of side-mounted accessories:
mounting on right or left hand side.
Terminal marking according to
IEC 947-5-1 and EN 50 011.
Stops for attaching front-
mounted accessories.
All terminal screws:
Pozidriv (+, -) N 2
Location of surge suppressors
Quick fixing on 35 x 7.5 mm mounting rail
according to IEC 715 and EN 50 022.
Terminals delivered in open position with
captive screws (screws of unused terminals
should be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all screws makes
it possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
All terminals provide protection against
accidental direct contact with live parts
according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100 and
offer IP 20 degree of protection according
to IEC 947-1.
Index
Section
Section
3/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3
N Contactor Relays
Accessories
4-Pole, 1 Stack N Contactor Relays
8-Pole, 2 Stack N Contactor Relays
02
NC
NC
01
NC
02
01
NC
V
M
5
-1
RV 5
RC 5-1
Surge
suppressor
VM 5-1
VE 5-1
Interlock unit
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole
auxiliary contact block
N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
Contactor Relay
N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
Contactor Relay
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole
E
0
5
7
4
D
G
02
NC
NC
01
NC
02
01
NC
RV 5
RC 5-1
Surge
suppressor
VM 5-1
VE 5-1
Interlock unit
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole

CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole auxiliary contact block
N 22 E
N 31 E
N 40 E
Contactor Relay
N 22 E
N 31 E
N 40 E
Contactor
Relay
CA 5-10 and CA 5-01
Front-mounted 1-pole
auxiliary contact blocks
CA 5...
E
0
5
7
3
D
G
TP 40 DA
TP 180 DA
TP 40 IA
TP 180 IA
Pneumatic timer
Index
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3/4
13
A1
23
33
43
5-
V DC
24
6-
7-
8-
14
24
34
44
5-
6-
7-
8-
KC 40 E
E
0
5
3
6
D
3
KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
Description
Application
KC and TKC contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.
Description
G Magnetic circuit variants:
KC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuits.
TKC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuit and large coil voltage range.
G 2 versions: 4-pole/1-stack or 8-pole/2-stack
The width of 8-pole devices is identical to that of 4-pole devices; only the depth is increased.
G Double sharp auxiliary contacts.
G Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.
Location of surge suppressors.
Quick fixing on 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm
mounting rail according to IEC715 and
EN 50022.
Distances between holes according to
EN 50002.
Clear marking of coil voltages.
G Ordering Details ........................................................ pages 3/6 and 3/7 G General - Approvals ............................................................... Section 7
G Technical Data ........................................................... pages 3/7 and 3/8 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
G Accessories ............................................................................. Section 4 G Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
Terminals delivered in open position with
captive screws (screws of unused terminal
should be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all screws makes
it possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
All terminals provide protection against
accidental direct contact with live parts
according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
Terminal marking according to
IEC 947-5-1 and EN 50 011.
All terminal screws:
M 3.5, pozidriv (+,-) N 2
Location of function marker
and surge suppressor.
Stops for attaching front-
mounted accessories.
Index
Section
Section
3/5
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3
KC and TKC Contactor Relays
Accessories
4-Pole, 1 Stack KC and TKC Contactor Relays
E
0
5
7
1
D
G

RV-BC 6
RT 7
Surge suppressor*
VBC 30
Interlock unit
VBC 30
Interlock unit
spacer
KC 22 E
KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay
KC 22 E
KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay
CA 5-10 and CA 5-01
auxiliary contact blocks
CA 5...
TP 40 DA
TP 180 DA
TP 40 IA
TP 180 IA
Pneumatic timer
8-Pole, 2 Stack KC and TKC Contactor Relays
E
0
5
7
2
D
G
RV-BC 6
RT 7
Surge suppressor*
KC 44 E
KC 62 E
Contactor Relay
* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.
Index
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3/6
N 40 E
S
B

7
3
6
2
S
2
KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
Mounting Distance required between KC contactor relays.
d D Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency
2 20 < 20 1200
5 20 < 55 1200
Mounting Positions of KC contactor relays.
The following table shows permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
Ambient Contactor relay Permissible Coil Add-on accessories
temp. without access. mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
Built-in auxiliary positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
contacts
(N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) or TP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
C Pos. x U
c
Qty : Qty : Qty : Qty :
1, 3, 4 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 1** 1
KC 40 E
130, 2, 6 0.95-1.1 1 to 4 1** 1
KC 31 E
5* 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
< 55
1, 2, 3, 4 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
KC 22 E 1 30 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
6 0.95-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
> 55
KC 40 E
1, 130, 2, 3, 4 U
c
1 to 4 1** 1
and
KC 31 E
5* U
c
1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
70
KC 22 E
1, 2, 3, 4 U
c
1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
1 30 U
c
1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: U
e
< 440 V a.c.
**The CA5-04 four-pole auxiliary contact block (4 x N.C. contacts) can be used on those type.
}
}
}
}
Pos.1, 2, 5, 6
d
DPos. 3, 4
ABB ABB A
B
B
A
B
B
E
0
2
0
1
D
1
A B B
A
B
B
A
B
B
ABB
E
0
2
0
3
D
G
1
Pos. 1 30 Pos. 1
30 30
Pos. 3
Pos. 2
( 55 C)
Pos. 4
Pos. 5
except KC 22 E
Pos. 6 ( 55 C)
N 44 E
KC 44 E
S
B

6
5
1
4
S
3
KC 22 E
S
B

6
5
2
3
S
3
S
B
7
5
8
6
S
4
Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
1
st
stack 2
nd
stack in kg
State coil to completed with coil
voltage: I voltage code: II Pack
ing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece
4-pole, 1 stack, a.c. operated
N 22 E I (1) 1SBH 14 1001 RII22 2 2 0.340
N 31 E I (1) 1SBH 14 1001 RII 31 3 1 0.340
N 40 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 40 4 0.340
(1) In mounting position 5, do not use more than 2 front-mounted N.C. The CAL5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.
8-pole, 2 stack, a.c. operated
N 44 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 44 4 4 0.400
N 53 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 53 4 1 3 0.400
N 62 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 62 4 2 2 0.400
N 71 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 71 4 3 1 0.400
N 80 E I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 80 4 4 0.400
with overlapping of lagging/leading contacts (see page 8/4)
N 33/11 I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 39 3 1 2 1 1 0.400
N 51/11 I 1SBH 14 1001 RII 59 4 1 1 1 1 0.400
4-pole, 1 stack, d.c. operated
KC 22 E I FPH 141 3001 RI22I 2 2 0.540
KC 31 E I FPH 141 3001 RI31I 3 1 0.540
KC 40 E I FPH 141 3001 RI40I 4 0.540
8-pole, 2 stack, d.c. operated
KC 44 E I FPH 142 3001 RI44I 4 4 0.600
KC 62 E I FPH 142 3001 RI62I 4 2 2 0.600
Index
Section
Section
3/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3
TKC 22 E
F
R
C
T
L

6
5
2
4
S
5
Mounting positions:
TKC 62 E
Voltage: V-d.c. Code
min. U
c
max. R I .. I
9 .......... 15 5 .. 6
17 .......... 32 5 .. 1
25 .......... 45 5 .. 2
36 .......... 65 5 .. 4
50 .......... 90 5 .. 5
77 ........ 143 6 .. 2
90 ........ 150 6 .. 6
120 ........ 167 6 .. 3
Other voltages: consult us.
A
B
B
A
B
B
ABB
E
0
2
0
4
D
F
R
C
T
L

6
5
2
2
S
2
TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
Application
TKC contactor relays with a large coil voltage range have been designed to operate in control circuits
characterized by large variations in voltage supply. Example: battery supply.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
st
stack 2
nd
stack in kg
voltage: I voltage code: I . . I
Pack
ing
See table opposite See table opposite 1 piece
4-pole, 1 stack
TKC22 E I FPH 141 3061 RI22 I 2 2 0.540
TKC31 E I FPH 141 3061 RI31 I 3 1 0.540
TKC40 E I FPH 141 3061 RI40 I 4 0.540
8-pole, 2 stack
TKC44 E I FPH 142 3061 RI44I 4 4 0.600
TKC62 E I FPH 142 3061 RI62I 4 2 2 0.600
Coil Characteristics
No extra tolerances applicable to the U
c
min. ... max. values quoted in table opposite.
c
max. = 20 C: 9 W pull-in/holding
Replacement coils: consult us (standard coils used on KC contactor relays are not suitable for TKC contactor
relays).
Mounting Distance for coil operating limits U
c
min. U
c
max.
d D Ambient temp. Max. switching frequency
2 20 < 20 1200
5 20 < 55 1200
Technical Characteristics
Identical to those of standard KC contactor relays (see page 3/8) except:
Air temperature near contactor: 55 C max.
Mounting positions : 1, 130, 3 and 4 only
Shock withstand in position 1 for contactors screwed on their support and without N.C. add-on aux. contact block.

1
/2 sinusoidal shock of 11 ms: no change in contact position
Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2
Making position 15 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g
Breaking position 10 g 5 g* 6 g** 4 g 4 g
Exceptions: *4g for TKC 22 ; **5g for TKC 31 ; Consult us for TKC 44
*3g for TKC 62 ; **3g for TKC 62
Add-on Accessories
Contactor Max. number of auxiliary contact blocks Timer Mechanical Function
relays CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 CA5-31 CA5-22 CA5-04 TP interlock marker
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 40-E 4 2 1 1 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 31-E 4 1 1 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 22-E 4 1 VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1 30
TKC - all types VBC 30 BA 5-50
For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diodes, varistors, etc.) with TKC contactor relays, see notes page 4/14.
Note: Railway (Traction) projects ..... on request.
Pos.1
d
DPos. 3, 4
ABB ABB
A
B
B
A
B
B
E
0
2
0
1
D
2
A A B1 B2
C2
C1
ABB
E
0
2
0
2
D
!
Index
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3/8
Technical Data
Type N22, N31, N40 N44 ... N80, N33/11, N51/11 KC22, KC31, KC40 KC44, KC62
Number of poles 4 8 4 8
i
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 690
acc. to UL/ CSA V 600
imp
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 kV 8
Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-5-1/947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-5-1/60 947-4-1
Air temperature near contactor
for operation in free air: C -40 to +55 (0.85 - 1.1 U
c
) / +55 to +70 (U
c
)
for storage: C -60 to +80
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100, Specification II
Mounting positions: Positions 1 to 5 - < 55C : 0.85 ........ 1.1U
c
Pos. 1, 3, 4 and 5 - < 55C : 0.85 ... 1.1 U
c
- = 55 ... 70C : ............ U
c
Pos. 130, 2 and 6 - < 55C : 0.95 ... 1.1 U
c
Position 6 - < 55C : 0.95 ........ 1.1U
c
Pos. 1 or 130 to 5 - = 55 ... 70C : ........ U
c
(see diagrams below) - > 55C : not acceptable . Pos. 6 - > 55C : not acceptable
Operating altitude m < 3000
Shock withstand according to 1/2 sinusoidal shock, 11 ms: no change in contact position
IEC 68-2-27 and
EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting pos. 1 B1 : 5 g
(see below) B2 : 15 g
Fixing on mounting rail 35 mm according to IEC 715 and EN 50022
with screws (not supplied) 2 x M4
Connection terminals (delivered in open position, M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
screws of unused terminals must be tightened)
Connecting capacity
Rigid solid 1 x mm
2
1 - 4
2 x mm
2
1 - 4
Flexible without 1 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 1 - 2.5
cable end 2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
With lugs max. width mm 8
hole mm 3.7
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 529, EN 60529
- Pole terminals IP 20 IP 10
- Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20
Mounting positions Electrical durability of contacts
utilization category AC - 15 according to IEC 947-5-1
e

e
breaking current: I
e

e
The curves opposite
show the electrical
durabi l i ty of the
contactor relays as
well as the add-on
auxi l i ary contact
blocks in relation to
the breaking current I
c
.
These curves have
been drawn for
resistive and inductive
loads up to 690 V,
40...60Hz.
Breaking current (A)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n

o
p
s
CA5, CAL 5
4
a
n
d
8
-p
o
le
N
ty
p
e
s
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1
2
3
5
10
20
30
4 6
4
a
n
d
8
-p
o
le
K
C
ty
p
e
s
E
0
2
9
8
D
G
ABB
E
0
2
0
0
D
1
B2 A A B1
C2
C1
ABB
E
0
2
0
2
D
1
Index
Section
Section
3/9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3
Technical data
Type N22, N31, N40 N44 ... N80, N33/11, N51/11 KC22, KC31, KC40 KC44, KC62
Number of poles 4 8 4 8
Pole Utilization Characteristics
e
V 690
Conventional thermal current in free air I
th
according to IEC 947-5-1 40C A 16 10
Rated operating current I
e
in AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
24-127 V 50/ 60 Hz A 6 6
230-240 V 50/ 60 Hz A 4 4
400-415 V 50/ 60 Hz A 3 3
500 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2 2
690 V 50/ 60 Hz A 2 2
in DC-13 according to IEC 947-5-1
24 V d.c. A/W 6/144 6/144
48 V d.c. A/W 2.8/134 2.8/134
72 V d.c. A/W 1/72 1/72
125 V d.c. A/W 0.55/69 0.55/69
250 V d.c. A/W 0.3/75 0.3/75
Field of rated frequencies Hz 25 - 400
Mechanical durability in operating cycles > 20 million 30 million
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 6000 6000
Electrical durability in operating cycles See curves page 3/8
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity according to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
Rated breaking capacity according to IEC 947-5-1 10 x I
e
/AC-15
gG (gl) protection fuse A 10
Rated short-time withstand current 1.0 s 100 A 50 A
at ambient temp. of 40 C, in free air, from cold state 0.1 s 140 A 100 A
Insulation resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 M
Min. switching capacity
with failure rate below 10
-6
17 V / 5 mA 24 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C.
contacts ms 2
Power loss per pole at 6A W 0.10 0.15
Coil operating limits 40C according to IEC 947-5-1 : 0.85 - 1.1 U
c
Drop-out voltage in % of U
c
roughly 40 - 65% roughly 10 - 30%
a.c. operation: 50 Hz pull-in VA 70
60 Hz pull-in VA 80
50/60 Hz (1) pull-in VA/VA 74/70
50/60Hz holding VA/W 8/2
d.c. operation: cold pull-in W 7
warm holding W 7
Rated control voltage U
c
a.c. operation: 50/60 Hz V 20 - 690 -
d.c. operation: V d.c. - 24 - 240
Max. permissible short supply interruption
without opening of contacts ms 2 2
Operating time
between coil energization and:
closing of N.O. contact ms 10 - 26 50 - 75
opening of N.C. contact ms 7 - 21 45 - 70
between coil de-energization and:
opening of N.O. contact ms 4 - 11 15 - 30 *
closing of N.C. contact ms 9 - 16 17 - 32 *
*Using surge suppressors increases the opening time by a
ratio of 1.1 to 1.5 for a varistor suppressor and by 4 to 8 for a
diode suppressor .
Influence of length of conductors in control
circuit on contactor opening and closing see pages 2/52 and 2/53
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes I I to I I, see page 0/1. 8 0 8 8
Index
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
3/10
Notes
Index
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Contents
Main Accessories for Contactors and Contactor Relays: Compatibility ................................ 4/3
Auxiliary Contact Blocks ....................................................................................................... 4/4
TE5S Electronic Timer for Star-Delta Starters ...................................................................... 4/6
TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks .................................................................................................. 4/8
Mechanical Interlock Units/ Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units ............................... 4/10
Mechanical Latching Units .................................................................................................. 4/12
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils .............................................................................. 4/14
RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays ....................................................................................... 4/16
Connection Auxiliaries for Control Leads- Impulse Contact Blocks .................................... 4/18
Lamp Holder - Fuse Holder - Function Markers .................................................................. 4/19
Terminal Connecting Strips ................................................................................................. 4/20
Connectors - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks ................................................................................ 4/21
Terminal Accessories .......................................................................................................... 4/22
Terminal Shrouds ................................................................................................................ 4/23
Connection Sets .................................................................................................................. 4/24
Plates for: EH 145 - EH 800 3-pole Contactors
EK 110 - EK 550 4-pole Contactors ................................................................... 4/26
Main Contact Sets - Arc Chutes .......................................................................................... 4/28
Contactor Operating Coils ................................................................................................... 4/29
Accessories for Contactors
and Contactor Relays
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
4/2
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
02
NC
NC
01
NC
02
01
NC
VM 5 ...
VE 5 ...
Interlock unit
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted
2-pole auxiliary
contact block
CA 5...
Front-mounted
1-pole auxiliary
contact blocks
CA 5...
Front-mounted
4-pole auxiliary
contact block
TP...
Pneumatic
timer
E
0
5
6
6
D
G
*
A 9 - A 110 and AE 45 - AE 110 Contactors
N Contactor Relays
VH ...
VK ...
CAL 16-11
E
0
5
6
7
D
EH 145 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 Contactors
*Use Electronic Timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 Contactors
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole reversing contactors VH 145 - VH 300 mechanical and electrical interlock units
with VH.. mechanical and electrical interlock units. Factory-mounted auxiliary contact blocks (A or E) and add-on blocks (B, C, D)
"Lefthand"
Interlocking
"Righthand"
contactor contactor
EH 145 VH 145 EH 145
EH 175 - EH 210 VH 210A EH 145
EH 175 - EH 300 VH 300 EH 175 - EH 300
EK 110 - EK 150 VH 145 EK 110, EK 150
EK 175, EK 210 VH 210A EK 110, EK 150
EK 175, EK 210 VH 300 EK 175, EK 210
EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole contactors CAL16-11. 2-pole auxiliary contact blocks with side mounting
and reversing contactors with VH 550 and VH 800
mechanical interlock units (rear-mounted)
Built-in
Type Main auxiliary
poles contacts
EH 145 - EH 800 - 3 0 1 1 - - - - >
and 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ->
EK 110 - EK 550 - 4 0 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -> - - ->
Main Accessories for Contactors
and Contactor Relays
Compatibility
E
0
5
4
2
D
3
E
0
5
5
2
D
3
E
0
5
4
3
D
3
E
0
5
4
4
D
3
E
0
7
2
2
D
C A B D
E
0
7
2
8
D
E E
E
0
7
2
9
D
40 ...
400 Hz
40 ...
400 Hz
E
E
0
7
3
0
D
KP KP
E
Configurations of accessories are different depending on whether these are front-mounted or side-mounted.
N Contactor Relays Accessories - Front mounting Accessories - Side mounting
A and AE Contactors Auxiliary contact blocks TP - A Pneumatic Auxiliary contact Blocks Interlock units
1-pole CA 5- 4-pole CA 5- timer block 2-pole CAL5-11 G mechanical VM 5-
Type
Main Built-in
G mech. + elec. VE 5-
poles auxiliary
contacts
N ............................... (1) 2 2 E
1 to 4 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
N ............................... (1) 3 1 E
1-pole blocks
or
4-pole block
or 1 TP - A block +
CAL 5-11 blocks
or
N ................................... 4 0 E
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
N ................................... 4 4 E
N ................................... 5 3 E
1 to 2 1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
N ................................... 6 2 E +
CAL 5-11 blocks
or
N ................................... 7 1 E
+ 1 CAL5-1 block
N ................................... 8 0 E
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 1 0
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 0 1 (1) 1 to 4 CA 5-
or
1 CA 5-
or 1 TP. - A block +
1 to 2 1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks 4-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks
or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
A 9 - A 26 - 2 2 - 0 0 (1)
A 9 - A 16 - 3 0 - 2 2
+
1 to 2
or
1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 3 2 CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 30, A 40 - 3 0 - 1 0 1 to 5 CA 5-
or
1 CA 5- 4-pole block
or
1 TP - A block
+
1 to 2
or
1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
A 30, A 40 - 3 0 - 0 1 1-pole blocks + 1 CA 5- 1-pole block + 1 CA 5- 1-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 30, A 40 - 3 0 - 3 2 1 CA 5-
+
1 to 2
or
1 V
M
/
E
5-1 block
1-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
A 45 - A 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks
or
+ 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks
or
+ 2 CA 5-
+
1 to 2
or
1 VE 5-2 block
A 45, A 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2) 1-pole blocks CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 0 0
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 2 2 2 CA 5-
+
1 to 2
or
1 VE 5-2 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 2 2 1-pole blocks CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
AE 50 - AE 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
AE 45 - AE 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5-
or
+ 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks or + 2 CA 5-
+
1 CAL 5-11 block
or
1 VE 5-2 block
AE 45, AE 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2) 1-pole blocks 1-pole blocks
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 0 0
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block 1 CAL 5-11 block
or
1 VE 5-2 block
AE 50, AE 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 to 6 CA 5-
or
+ 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks
or
+ 2 CA 5-
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 1 1 1-pole blocks 1-pole blocks
+
1 CAL 5-11 block
or
1 VE 5-2 block
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 1 1
(1) In mounting position 5 (see pages 2/37 and 3/8), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.
(2) Whatever the mounting position (see page 2/37), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.
21
22
13
14
CAL16-11 A CAL16-11 B CAL16-11 C CAL16-11 D CAL16-11 E
E
0
7
2
3
D
47
48
35
36
83
84
71
72
61
62
53
54
43
44
31
32
C A B D
E
0
7
2
4
D
C A B D
E
0
7
2
5
D
C A E
E
0
7
2
6
D
40 ...
400 Hz
C A E
KP
E
0
7
2
5
D
Contact 35-36
delivered wired
in the coil circuit
Index Section
Section
4/4
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Auxiliary Contact Blocks
G Terminal Marking and Positioning ........................ Section 8 G Mounting and Compatibility ................................. page 4/3
G Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9
Description
Auxiliary contact blocks are available in 1-pole, 2-pole or 4-pole versions.
Types CA- : instantaneous, N.O. or N.C.
CC- : N.O. leading or N.C. lagging.
They are equipped with screw type connecting terminals delivered open and protected against accidental direct
contact and have function marking.
The CA 5 4-pole block, mounted on the A 9 to A 16 and BC 9 to BC 16 contactors or on the N and KC contactor
relays, provides "positive safety", i.e. there is no overlapping between auxiliary contacts performing opposite
functions (N.O.//N.C.) in accordance with regulations (ZH 1/457, INRS, SV specifications).
Front mounting:
CA-, CC- 1-pole or 4-pole blocks: clipped onto the front of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110, BC 9 to BC 30
contactors, N and KC contactor relays (refer to the configurations shown on the "ordering details" pages in section 2 for the BC type
and section 3 for the KC type)
Side mounting:
CAL 5-11 2-pole blocks: clipped onto the right and/or lefthand side of A 9 to A 110 contactors and onto the
lefthand side of AE 45 to AE 110 contactors.
CAL16-11 2-pole blocks: screwed onto the right and/or lefthand side of the EH 145 to EH 800 and
EK 110 to EK 550 contactors.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Contact blocks Max. number of blocks Pack
ing
Weight
that can be clipped onto
the contactors
pieces kg
1-pole auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting (1)
for A(E), N, BC, KC contactors
CA 5-10 1SBN 01 0010 R1010 1 G 4 blocks:- A 9 to A 26 10 0.014
CA 5-01 1SBN 01 0010 R1001 1 - N 10 0.014
CC 5-10 1SBN 01 0011 R1010 1 - BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.014
CC 5-01 1SBN 01 0011 R1001 1 - KC 10 0.014
G 5 blocks:- A 30, A 40
G 6 blocks:- A 45 to A 110
- AE 45 to AE 110
2-pole auxiliary contact blocks Side mounting
for A(E) and N contactors
CAL 5-11 1SBN 01 0020 R1011 1 1 G 2 blocks: A 9 to A 110, N 2 0.050
G 1 block: AE 45 to AE 110
for EH and EK contactors
CAL 16-11 A SK 829 002-A 1 1 G 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 B SK 829 002-B 1 1 G 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 C SK 829 002-C 1 1 G 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 D SK 829 002-D 1 1 G 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CCL 16-11 E (2) SK 829 002-E 1 1 G 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
4-pole auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting (1)
for A(E), N, BC, KC contactors
CA 5-40 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1040 4 G 1 block: - A 9 to A 26-40-00 2 0.060
CA 5-31 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1031 3 1 - A 45 to A 110 2 0.060
CA 5-22 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1022 2 2 - AE 45 to AE 110 2 0.060
CA 5-04 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1004 0 4 - BC9 to BC25-40-00 2 0.060
CA 5-11/11 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1018 1 1 1 1 - BC 30-30-00 2 0.060
CA 5-31 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1131 3 1 G 1 block: - A 9 to A 40-30-10 2 0.060
CA 5-22 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1122 2 2 - BC9 to BC25-30-10 2 0.060
CA 5-04 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1104 0 4 2 0.060
CA 5-11/11 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1118 1 1 1 1 2 0.060
CA 5-40 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1240 4 G 1 block: N and KC 2 0.060
CA 5-22 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1222 2 2 4-pole 2 0.060
CA 5-04 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1204 0 4 2 0.060
(1) a) In mounting position 5 (see p. 2/37 and 3/8), there should be no more than 2 N.C. front-mounted auxiliary contacts on types N 22 E, N 31 E,
A 9 to A 26-30-01, A 9 to A 26-22-00. The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.
b) Whatever the mounting position (see p. 2/37), there should be no more than 2 N.C. front-mounted auxiliary contacts on types A(E) 45 to A(E) 75-22-00.
The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.
(2) Mounting of a CCL 16-11 E block does not allow an additional second block to be added on top of it.
A

1
4
4

D
CAL 16-11 .
CAL 5-11
S
B
7
3
7
5
S
4
CA 5-10
S
B
7
6
0
3
S
2
CA 5-40 E
S
B
7
3
7
9
S
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Technical Data
Types 1-pole CA 5, 4-pole CA 5 2-pole CAL 16-11
2-pole CAL 5-11 and 1-pole CC 5 2-pole CCL 16-11
Standards IEC947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals See section 7
i
according to IEC947-5-1 V 690 690
according to UL/ CSA V 600 600
e
~ V 24 to 690 24 to 690
Conventional thermal current I
th
A 16 10
e
in AC-15 acc. to IEC947-5-1 24 to 127 V A 6 6
220 to 240 V A 4 6
380 to 440 V A 3 4
500 to 690 V A 2 1
in DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6 6
48 V A 2.8 6
72 V A 1 4
125 V A 0.55 1.8
250 V A 0.3 0.6
Connecting terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw
(delivered in open position. Screws of unused terminals should be tightened). with cable clamp
Connecting capacity
G Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm
2
1 to 4 0.5 to 2.5
G Flexible with cable end 1 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
2 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
G Flexible with sleeve 1 or 2 x mm
2
0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability cycles 10 million
Electrical durability See curve below
Rated making capacity 10 x I
e
AC-15
Rated breaking capacity 10 x I
e
AC-15
cw
1 s A 100 50
= 40C 0.1 s A 140 100
Min. switching capacity 17 V / 5 mA 0.25 VA / 12 V or 0.25 VA / 5 mA
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) fuses A 10 10
Power loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15 0.2
Degree of protection according to IEC 529,
IEC 144, DIN 40 050 and NFC 20-010 IP 20 IP 20
e
where cos = 0.7 and U
e
breaking current: I
e
e
The curves opposite show the electrical durability of the auxiliary
contact blocks according to breaking current I
c
.
These curves have been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to
690 V, 40 to 60 Hz.
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1 2 4 5 10
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1
2
3
5
10
20
30
M
i
l
l
i
o
n

o
p
s
3 6 0.2
E
0
7
3
1
D
G
CA 5, CAL 5
CAL 16
Index Section
Section
4/6
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
TE5S Electronic Timer
for Star-Delta Starters
Application
Utilization
When used in star-delta starters, the TE5S lags the star connection and provides a lapse of 50 ms before the
switchover to delta connection.
Description
Accordi ng to the type of devi ce chosen, the el ectroni c ci rcui t has a 24 V a.c/d.c.,
110 to 120 V a.c., 220 to 240 V a.c. or 380440 V a.c. supply. An output relay with reversing contact ensures
high current switching. A two-position switch allows selection of one of the two time delay ranges: 0.8 to 8 s
or 6 to 60 s. The 0.1 to 1.0 graduated button allows an initial setting without steps within the previously selected
range which can then be adjusted using a chronometer.
Note: We recommend that you allow for temperature drift for the final adjustment of the time delay setting.
Drift: 0.2% per C.
For example, a setting made at 20 C will yield a time delay shorter by 7% at 55 C in a cubicle.
( 0.2% per C i.e. 0.2 x 35 = 7%).
The TE5S, which is not affected by these settings, establishes a fixed "lapse" of 50 ms between the opening
of contact 15-16 and the closing of contact 15-18. It is this time delay that prevents from arc short-circuit during
star to delta switching.
Operation
On energization, the green U indicator light (voltage applied) comes on. Contact 15-16 then immediately moves
to the closed position.
Count-down of the programmed time immediately commences.
When the time delay has elapsed, contact 15-16 opens and at the same time the 50 ms lapse, t2, begins after
which contact 15-18 moves to the closed position. The yellow R indicator light comes on.
On de-energization, the U and R indicator lights go out and, after the 250 ms resetting time, the device is ready
for a new cycle.
Mounting
On 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm mounting rail according to EN 50022.
Ordering details
Type Order code Rated control For contactors Pack
ing
Weight
voltage U
c
V piece kg
TE5S-24 1SBN 02 0010 R1001 24 a.c./d.c. A 9 ... EH 800
(1)
1 0.080
TE5S-120 1SBN 02 0010 R1002 110 ... 120 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800
(1)
1 0.080
TE5S-240 1SBN 02 0010 R1003 220 ... 240 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800
(1)
1 0.080
TE5S-440 1SBN 02 0010 R1004 380 ... 440 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800
(1)
1 0.080
(1) Interpose an N Contactor Relay between the TE 5S Timer and the Coil of EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors.
TE5S ...
Chart
Equivalent diagram
Front face
U
15-16
t1 (t2 = 50ms)
15-18
R
E
0
7
1
9
D
t2
t1 t1+t2
A
1
A
2
1
6
1
5
1
8
E
0
7
1
8
D
TE5S
R
Star-Delta Timer
U
x 0.1
0.5
1.0
8s t1
A1 15
16 A2 18
60s
E
0
7
2
0
D
Uc=
S
B
7
5
5
8
S
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Technical data
Type TE5S - 24 TE5S - 120 TE5S - 240 TE5S - 440
Compliance with standards IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0435
i

according to IEC947-5-1 V 440
Rated supply voltage U
c
V d.c. 24
V a.c. 24 110 to 120 220 to 240 380 to 440
Rated frequency limits Hz 48 to 63
Supply voltage range 0.85 to 1.1 U
c
Overvoltage protection Built-in varistor
Load factor % 100
Average consumption in d.c. W 0.7
in a.c. VA 1.5 3.5 6.5 12.5
Time delay range (t
1
) selected by switch S 0.8 to 8 and 6 to 60
Temperature drift % per C - 0.2
Mechanical setting accuracy 15 % of the setting range
On-load reiteration accuracy
under constant conditions 2 % after 1 million operations
Minimum time lapse (t
2
) ms 50
Min. time lapse after 1 million operations ms 40
Resetting time (maximum) ms 250
Front panel display: green indicator light Energization
yellow indicator light Output relay activated
e
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V d.c. 24
V a.c. 24 to 240 440
th
A 10
e

acc. to IEC 947-5-1
DC-13 24 V d.c. A 4
AC-15 24 to 120 V a.c. A 5
220 to 240 V a.c. A 4
380 to 440 V a.c. A
Permissible air temperature
for operation C - 25 to + 60
for storage C - 40 to + 85
Mechanical durability in millions of operations 5
Electrical durability in millions of operations 1
On-load maximum switching frequency ops./h 720 600
Vibration withstand acc. to
IEC68-2-6 and EN60 068-2-6 3g from 10 to 300Hz in the 3 directions
Shock withstand acc. to 20g/11ms in directions A and C
IEC68-2-27 and EN60 068-2-27 15g/11ms in direction B
Fixing on mounting rail according to EN 50022 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15
Connecting terminals (+,-) pozidriv 1 screw
Tightening torque N.m 0.6 to 0.8 max.
Connecting capacity
2
1 to 2.5
Flexible without cable end 1 or 2 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 and EN 60 529
Housing IP 50
Terminals IP 20
B A A B
C
C
E
0
8
6
3
D
Index Section
Section
4/8
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks
Application
The timer blocks are equipped with adjustable time delay auxiliary contacts.
Types:
TP- DA (blue button) for time delay on energization.
TP- IA (black button) for time delay on de-energization.
Description:
G Pneumatic timer with 350 linear scale and setting via marked knurled knob.
G Block equipped with 2 time-delayed auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. and 1N.C. (electrically separate).
G Captive screw type connecting terminals with built-in cable clamps. M 3.5 (+, ) pozidriv 2 screw with
screwdriver guidance, supplied untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.
Mounting:
Clipped onto the front panel of A 9 to A 75, BC 9 to BC 30, AE 45 to AE 75, GA 75, GAE 75 contactors and
N and KC contactor relays, except for devices equipped with TBC and TKC type coils having large voltage
ranges.
For further details, please turn to page 4/3 describing mounting compatibility with the other accessories.
Accessory:
BX-TP plastic sealed cover protecting access to the time delay setting.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Time delay Pack
ing
Weight
setting
piece kg
TP 40 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1000 0.1 to 40 s 1 0.07
TP 180 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1001 10 to 180 s 1 0.07
TP 40 IA 1SBN 02 0301 R1000 0.1 to 40 s 1 0.07
TP 180 IA 1SBN 02 0301 R1001 10 to 180 s 1 0.07
BX-TP FPTN 472 657 R0001 1 0.006
TP 40DA
S
B
7
5
8
9
S
3
P
T
M

8
9

6
1
8
5
BX-TP
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks
G Mounting and Compatibility .................................................... page 4/3 G Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1 2 4 5 10
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1
2
3
5
10
20
30
M
i
l
l
i
o
n

o
p
s
3 6 0.2
E
0
7
3
2
D
G
TP
Technical Data
Standards IEC 947-5-1 ; EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals see section 7
Connection capacity
rigid mm
2
1 or 2 x 1to 2.5
supple 1 x mm
2
1 to 2.5
2 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5
i
acc. to IEC 947-1 ~V 690
e
~V 24 to 690
th
A 10
e
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24-127 V A 6
220-240 V A 4
380-400 V A 3
500/690 V A 1/0.5
DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6
48 V A 2.8
72 V A 1
125 V A 0.55
250 V A 0.3
Electrical durability see curve below
e
AC-15
e
AC-15
cw
at = 40C
1 s A 50
0.1 s A 100
Short-circuit protection - Gg (gl) fuses 10 A
Heat loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15
N.O. and N.C. contact non-overlapping time ms 1 to 2
Resetting time ms approx. 40
Accuracy (measured over 10 successive cycles) 2 %
Drift (variation in mean value during TP lifetime) TPDA: 15 to 15 %
TPIA: 25 to +15 %
Drift according to ambient temperature
between 20C and +20C 0.25 % per Kelvin
between +20C and +65C 0.20 % per Kelvin
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1:
e
e
breaking current: I
e
e
The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the timer blocks in relation to the breaking current I
c
.
This curve has been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to 690 V, 40 to 60 Hz provided that the contactor is activated by the control device
in random manner with respect to the mains phase.
Terminal marking
TP 40 DA TP 40 IA
TP 180 DA TP 180 IA
67
68
55
56
A

4
0
6

D
65
66
57
58 A

4
0
7

D
Index Section
Section
4/10
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Mechanical Interlock Units
Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units
G Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ............................................... page 4/3 G Dimensions .................................................................................................... Section 9
Utilization
When mounted between two contactors, the mechanical interlock unit prevents one of the contactors from closing as long as the other contactor is closed.
Range
G Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type For contactors Fixing
On left On right
VBC 30 KC, BC 9 to 30 (1 stack) KC, BC 9 to 30 (1 stack)

or plate not supplied
VM 5-1 N, A 9 to 40 N, A9 to 40 or plate not supplied
VH 550 EH 370, 550 EH 260 to 550 pre-drilled plate supplied
VH 800 EH 700, 800 EH 370 to 800 pre-drilled plate supplied
EK 370, 550 EK 370, 550 pre-drilled plate supplied
VH 145 W EH 145 EH 145 pre-drilled plate supplied for
VH 210 W EH 175, 210 EH 175, 210 utilization with WH mechanical
VH 300 W EH 260, 300 EH 260, 300 latching units
G Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
On left On right
VE 5-1 N, A 9 to 40 N, A 9 to 40 or plate not supplied
VE 5-2 (1) A(E) 45 to 110 A(E) 45 to 110 or plate not supplied
VH 145 EH 145 EH 145 additional plate PN 145-21 (see p.4/26)
EK 110, 150 EK 110, 150 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 210 A EH 175, 210 EH 145 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 300 EH 175 to 300 EH 175 to 300 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
EK 175, 210 EK 175, 210 additional plate PN 300-22 (see p.4/26)
(1) The combination of A(E) 45 - 75 interlocked with A(E) 95/110 cannot be mounted on symmetrical rail (75mm EN50023).
(2) Suitable for interlocking of 2 contactors with the same number of poles (3P or 4P), the same magnetic circuit type (A or AE type), a same or different rating (as per selection tables below).
G Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors, a.c. coil only
Optional mounting of two additional CA 16 - auxiliary contact blocks
Up Down
VHV 145 EH 145 EH 145
VKV 150 EK 110, 150 EK 110, 150
VHV 210 EH 175, 210 EH 175, 210
}

additional plate not supplied
VHV 300 EH 260, 300 EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210 EK 175, 210
VHV 210 A EK 175, 210 EH 145
Selection tables
G Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Left
Right
KC, BC 9 - 30 N, A 9 - 26 A 30, 40 A(E) 45- 75 A(E) 95, 110 EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EH 370, 550 EH 700, 800
KC, BC 9 - 30 VBC 30
N, A 9 - A 26 V
M
/
E
5-1 V
M
/
E
5-1
A 30, 40 V
M
/
E
5-1 V
M
/
E
5-1 VE 5-2
A(E) 45- 75 VE 5-2 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
A(E) 95, 110 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
EH 145 VH 145
EH 175, 210 VH 210 A VH 300
EH 260 VH 300 VH 300
EH 300 VH 300
EH 370, 550 VH 550 VH 550
EH 700, 800 VH 800 VH 800
G Interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors,
a.c. coil only
Up
Down
EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210
EH 145 VHV 145
EH 175, 210 VHV 210
EH 260, 300 VHV 300
EK 110, 150 VKV 150
EK 175, 210 VHV 300
G Interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors,
a.c. or d.c. coil
Left
Right
EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210 EK 370, 550
EK 110, 150 VH 145
EK 175, 210 VH 300
EK 370, 550 VH 800
G For mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted
contactors equipped with mechanical latching units:
see page 4/12
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Mechanical Interlock Units
Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units
G Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ........ Page 4/3 G Plates ...................................................................... page 4/26
G Power Connections .............................................. Page 4/24 G Dimensions .............................................................. Section 9
Ordering Details
Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type Order code Pack
ing
Weight
piece kg
VBC 30 GJL 280 1911 R0001 1 0.015
VM 5-1 1SBN 03 0100 R1000 1 0.066
VH 550 SK 829 070-E 1 5.00
VH 800 SK 829 070-F 1 6.00
VH 145 W SK 829 070-B 1 2.300
VH 210 W SK 829 070-C 1 2.400
VH 300 W SK 829 070-D 1 2.800
Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
ing
Weight
piece kg
VE 5-1 1SBN 03 0110 R1000 1 0.076
VE 5-2 1SBN 03 0210 R1000 1 0.146
VH 145 SK 829 071-A 1 0.130
VH 210 A SK 829 071-D 1 0.390
VH 300 SK 829 071-B 1 0.130
Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors, a.c. coil only
ing
Weight
piece kg
VHV 145 SK 829 072-A 1 0.250
VKV 150 SK 829 072-B 1 0.430
VHV 210 SK 829 072-C 1 0.220
VHV 300 SK 829 072-D 1 0.430
VHV 210 A SK 829 072-F 1 0.600
Additional contact blocks for VH 145 - VH 300 and VHV 145 - VHV 300.
Type Order code Contacts Pack
ing
Weight
93 91
94 92 piece kg
CA 16-10 SK 829 003-A 1 - 1 0.013
CA 16-01 SK 829 003-B - 1 1 0.013
VHV
A

8
5
9
CA 16-.
A

8
6
0
VBC30
VH 145
SK 829 070 .
A

0
9
0
6
5
3
0
VE 5-1
S
B
7
2
8
2
S
4
Technical Data
Types VE 5-1 VH(V)
VE 5-2 145 - 300
Standards IEC 947-5-1 &
EN 60947-5-1
i
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V 690
acc. to UL/CSA V 600
e
~V 24 to 690
th
A 16 10
e
in AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1
24 to 127 V A 6 6
220 to 240 V A 4 6
380 to 440 V A 3 4
500 to 690 V A 2 1
in DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1
24 V A 6 6
48 V A 2.8 6
72 V A 1 4
125 V A 0.55 1.8
250 V A 0.3 0.6
Types VE 5-1/ VE 5-2
VH(V)145...300
Connecting terminals delivered M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2
in open position (screws of unused screw
terminals should be tightened) with cable clamp
Connection capacity
G Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm
2
1 to 4
(1)
G Flexible with end 1 or 2 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5
(2)
Max. switching
frequency cycles /h 600
e
AC-15
e
AC-15
Rated short-time withstand
current I
cw
- = 40C
1 s A 100
0.1 s A 140
Short-circuit protection
gG (gl) fuses A 10
Heat loss per pole at 6A W 0.15
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529,
IEC 144, DIN 40050, NFC 20010 IP 20
(1) 1 2.5 mm
2
for VH(V)145 to 300
(2) 1 million for VH(V)145 to 300
Technical note
When, during switching, the arc time is estimated at more than 40 ms, the closing signal of one of the two contactors
must be delayed with respect to the opening signal of the other contactor in order to prevent a short-circuit.
Use a TP 40 pneumatic timer or a TE5S electronic timer with time lapse, as applicable.
Index Section
Section
4/12
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Mechanical Latching Units
WB 75-A
Utilization
For converting standard contactors into latched contactors.
Types
WB 75-A for A9 - A75, BC 9 - BC 30, AE45 - AE75 contactors and N and KC 1-stack contactor relays.
WH 145 - WH 800 for EH 145 - EH 800 contactors with a.c. and d.c. coil.
WH 145 R - WH 800 R for mounting on the righthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
WH 145 L - WH 800 L for mounting on the lefthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
Description
G WB 75-A block: contains a mechanical latching device with electromagnetic impulse unlatching (a.c. or
d.c.) or manual unlatching.
Captive screw type connecting terminals, built-in cable clamps, M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 1 screw with screwdriver
guidance; delivered untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.
Operation:
after closing, the contactor continues to be held in the closed position by the latching mechanism should the
supply voltage fail at the contactor coil terminals.
Contactor opening can be controlled:
electrically by an impulse* (a.c. or d.c.) on the WB 75-A block coil.
* the coil is not designed to be permanently energized.
manually by pressing the pushbutton on the front face of the WB 75-A block.
G WH145 - WH800: consisting of a block containing the latching mechanism and a plate for fixing to a
contactor, they come with an a.c. impulse operated coil* or a d.c. impulse operated coil*.
* the coils are not designed to be permanently energized.
As regards the horizontal mounted reversing contactors, these can be directly fixed onto the plate holding the
2 contactors.
Each (or only one contactor with the same or different) ratings can be equipped with a mechanical latching
mechanism (see table below).
Note: EH contactors equipped with a WH device are described on page 2/30.
Operation: closing of the K1 contactor (see overleaf) causes it to be mechanically latched by the WH .. block
which holds it in the closed position and cuts off the power supply to its coil via the built-in auxiliary contact
(11 12). (Contactors equipped with d.c. coils must be controlled by the K5 contactor relay). The contactor
is opened by an electrical impulse at the terminals of the WH ... block coil.
With respect to a 380 V d.c. operated contactors with mechanical latching, the economy resistor device of
the K1 contactor must be removed and the N.C. contact (11 12) of the latching unit must be connected as
shown on the diagram: see page opposite
For d.c. operation, connect 2 auxiliary contacts in series with the latching unit coil, i.e. 13 14 and 43 44.
Mounting
WB 75-A ................................... : Clipped onto the front face of the contactor where it takes up two slots
and prevents other accessories from being mounted on the two slots
immediately to the right and left.
WH 145 - WH 800 .................... : The contactor and the mechanical latching unit are screwed
onto the same plate.
WH 145 - WH 800 (R or L) ...... : The contactors and the mechanical latching units are screwed
onto the mechanical interlocking plate of the reversing combination.
The WH mechanical latching units do not prevent other contactor accessories from being mounted.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
to be completed with the
state coil coil voltage code acc. to
voltage: I the table opposite piece kg
WB 75-A I FPTN 372 726 R10 I I A9 to A75, BC 9 to BC 30, AE 45 to AE 75, N, KC 1 0.12
WH 145 I SK 829 051 I I EH 145 1 1.65
WH 210 I SK 829 052 I I EH 175, 210 1 1.70
WH 300 I SK 829 053 I I EH 260, 300 1 1.80
WH 550 I SK 829 054 I I EH 370, 550 1 3.70
WH 800 I SK 829 055 I I EH 700, 800 1 3.90
Righthand side contactor With mechanical
of the reversing combination interlock:
WH 145 R I SK 829 061 I I EH 145 VH 145 W / SK 829 070-B 1 1.05
WH 210 R I SK 829 062 I I EH 175, 210 VH 210 W / SK 829 070-C 1 1.07
WH 300 R I SK 829 063 I I EH 260, 300 VH 300 W / SK 829 070-D 1 1.09
WH 550 R I SK 829 064 I I EH 370, 550 VH 550 W / SK 829 070-E 1 2.30
WH 800 R I SK 829 065 I I EH 700, 800 VH 800 W / SK 829 070-F 1 2.40
Lefthand side contactor With mechanical
of the reversing combination interlock:
WH 145 L I SK 829 081 I I EH 145 VH 145 W / SK 829 070-B 1 1.05
WH 210 L I SK 829 082 I I EH 175, 210 VH 210 W / SK 829 070-C 1 1.07
WH 300 L I SK 829 083 I I EH 260, 300 VH 300 W / SK 829 070-D 1 1.09
WH 550 L I SK 829 084 I I EH 370, 550 VH 550 W / SK 829 070-E 1 2.30
WH 800 L I SK 829 085 I I EH 700, 800 VH 800 W / SK 829 070-F 1 2.40
D.C. Coil
EH contactors
WH mechanical latching units
Code Code
V d.c. I I V d.c. I I
12 D A 75 D G
24 D B 110 D E
36 D C 125 D U
48 D D 220 D F
60 D T
A.C. Coil
EH contactors
WH mechanical latching units
Code
V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) I I
24 24 A B
42 42-48 A C
48 48 A D
110-115 110-120 A F
127 127 A G
208 A Z
220-240 220-255 A L
380- 400 380-440 A P
400- 415 A R
440 480 A S
500 A U
600 A V
A.C. and D.C. Coil
WB 75-A mechan. latching units
V d.c. Code
V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) . . I I
24 24-28 . . 0 1
42 42-48 . . 0 2
48 48-55 . . 0 3
110 110-127 . . 0 4
220-230 220-255 . . 0 6
230-240 230-277 . . 0 5
380-415 380-440 . . 0 7
415-440 440-480 . . 0 8
WH 300
A
_
0
3
1
WH 300 L
A
_
0
9
1
S
B
6
5
4
8
S
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Mechanical Latching Units
9
1

A

4
2
6
A2
K1
23
24
33
34
13
14
K5
K5
K5
S0 S1 O I
E2
As
US N
US
A2
K5
11
12
43
44
13
14
K1
K1
A1 E1 A1
S0 O
A2
A1
K1 AS
S1 I
E2
E1
US
US N
12
11
() +
Technical Data
Types WB75-A WH145 WH210 WH300 WH550 WH800
i
V 690 690
Cable cross-sectional area:
1 or 2 rigid conductors mm
2
1 to 4 0.5 to 1.5
1 or 2 flexible conductors mm
2
0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability million ops. 1 1
Max. switching ops/h 3600 with 1200 with
frequency
on-load factor of 8% on-load factor of 25%
Rated control voltage U
C
a.c. 24 to 480 V 24 to 600 V
d.c. 24 to 415 V 12 to 220 V
Coil operating range 0.85 to 1.1 U
C
0.85 to 1.1 U
C
Max. electrical impulse time
on a.c. coil s 20 20
with load factor % 5 20
on d.c. coil s 8 20
with load factor % 3 20
Min. electrical impulse time
for latching: BC 9 - 30 A 9 - 40
A(E)45 - 75
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 40 50 30 30 50
contactor coil)
ms in d.c. 80 50 30 40 80
for pull-out:
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 30 20
WB/WH block coil)
ms in d.c. 50 20
Coil consumption (mean value)
a.c. operated coil inrush VA 90 300
holding VA 60 35
d.c. operated coil W 110 350
Operating time
on contactor closing (latching)
between coil energization and:
N.O. contact closing
}
see pages 2/36 and 2/42: no difference with the operation of a contactor only.
N.C. contact opening
on contactor opening (unlatching)
between WB.. coil energization and: A, BC, AE
N.O. contact opening ms 5 to 25 10 to 18 13 to 25
N.C. contact closing ms 7to 28 13 to 20 15 to 28
Suggestion for a diagram of an EH contactor with a WH mechanical latching unit
a.c. coil d.c. coil
I/O impulse pushbuttons I/O impulse pushbuttons
S0 OFF pushbutton
K1 Contactor
S1 ON pushbutton
AS Mechanical latching unit
K5 Contactor relay
Block diagram:
(+)
9
1

A

4
2
5
9
1

A

3
0
3
Index Section
Section
4/14
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils
A

8
8
4
D
General
The operation of inductive circuits causes overvoltages, in particular on opening of the contactor coil.
The electromagnetic energy stored by the coil during contactor closing is restored on opening in the form of
surges, the slope and amplitude of which may rise to several kilovolts. A number of drawbacks are observed
ranging from interference on the electronic devices to breakdown of insulators and even destruction of certain
sensitive components.
The graph opposite reproduces the oscillogram showing voltage discharges at the terminals of a 42V/50Hz coil
without peak clipping. The coil was switched by 8 series-connected poles of a contactor relay.
Following a burst of discharges with a very steep slope a damped oscillation emerges with a peak value of
3500V.
Overvoltage Factor
The overvoltage factor k is defined as the ratio of the maximum overvoltage peak value

s
to the peak value
c
of the coil rated control voltage U
c
:
s
max.
s
max.
s
max.
k =
_______
in d.c.: k =
_______
or in a.c.: k =
_______
c
U
c
U
c
2
3500
For example the following is obtained for the above graph: k =
_____
60
42 2
Surge Suppressors
To guard against the harmful effects of these overvoltages, ABB has developed a range of surge suppressors
designed to reduce the k factor defined above and to limit or even completely eliminate the high pre-damping
voltage frequencies.
Each case is different, but the technical data tolerances and the generous sizing of parts have enabled us to
reduce the number of variants.
We have chosen the following solutions: transil diodes, varistors and RC blocks.
Note: A varistor is a resistor whose value increases to a very large extent when a certain voltage is applied
at its terminals.
Wiring Diagrams
Transil diode Varistor (only) RC type Varistor + RC
The housings and impregnation resins of the surge suppressors are made of flame-resistant materials in
accordance with the UL 94 standard.
These systems are not polarized, i.e. d.c. operated devices do not have to be connected in a specific direction.
G Operating temperature: -20 to +70 C
G Connection to the coil terminals (parallel mounting)
For RT 7, RV-BC 6 and RC-EH: flexible, accessible leads, equipped with forked lugs.
Except for the RV-BC 6 F variant: 2.8 mm faston.
For RT 5, RV 5, RC 5-1 and RC 5-2: clip-on for both fixing and connection.
G Fixing:
RV-BC 6 and RT 7: dovetail mounting on both the top and bottom part of the contactor base.
Alternatively, they can be clipped onto the front part of the contactor head.
RT 5, RV 5 and RC 5: clipped onto the top part of the contactor base. This mounting method
prevents any projections and change in contactor dimensions.
RC-EH: glued to the top part of the contactor base.
RT 7/...
A1
A2 E
0
7
3
3
D
A1
A2 E
0
7
3
5
D
A1
A2 E
0
7
3
4
D
A1
A2 E
0
7
3
6
D U
S
B
7
6
1
0
S
3
RC-EH/...
A
_
0
7
8
RC 5-1/150
S
B
7
3
8
9
S
4
RV 5/50
S
B
7
4
0
0
S
4
0
1000
100
(V)
T (s)
0
1000
100
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils
Technical Data
Type Control Opening time Residual overvoltage Remarks
circuit growth factor or clipping voltage
RT 7 or RT 5 /... transil diode 2.5 to 3 Advantages G Good energy absorption
32 d.c. 50 V G Unpolarized system
65 d.c. 100 V G Simple, reliable system
90 d.c. 150 V Drawback G A certain delay on drop out which does not
150 d.c. 210 V however reduce contactor breaking capacity.
264 d.c. 390 V
Varistor RV-BC 6 /... 1.1 to 1.5 Advantages G High energy absorption: good damping
60 d.c. 137 V G Unpolarized system
127 d.c. 305 V
250 d.c. 510 V
380 d.c. 730 V Drawback G Clipping as from U
vdr
*, thus voltage
RV 5/... 1.1 to 1.5 front up to this point.
50 a.c./d.c. 132 V
133 a.c./d.c. 270 V
250 a.c./d.c. 480 V
440 a.c./d.c. 825 V
RC 5-1/... or RC 5-2/...
}
see table a.c. 1.2 to 3 2 to 3 x U
c
Advantages G Very fast clipping
RC-EH 300/...
below
G Attenuation of steep fronts and thus of
high frequencies
G No operating delays
Varistor + RC RC-EH ... 1.1 to 1.5 Advantages G High energy absorption: good damping
800/110 a.c./d.c. 205 V G Unpolarized system
800/600 a.c. 1100 V G The RC system damps the voltage
front under the U
vdr
* threshold.
*U
vdr
= Varistor operating voltage (voltage dependent resistor), tolerance 10%
Ordering Details
Type Order code Control voltage Mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
V d.c. a.c. kg
RT 7/32 FPTN 377 043 R0001 12 to 32 G 10 0.007
RT 7/65 FPTN 377 044 R0001 25t to 65 G 10 0.007
RT 7/90 FPTN 377 045 R0001 50 to 90 G (T)KC and (T)BC9 to (T)BC 30 10 0.007
RT 7/150 FPTN 377 046 R0001 77 to 150 G 10 0.007
RT 7/264 FPTN 377 047 R0001 150 to 264 G 10 0.007
RV-BC 6/60 GHV 250 1902 R0002 24 to 60 G 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/127 GHV 250 1908 R0002 50 to 127 G KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/250 GHV 250 1903 R0002 110 to 250 G 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/380 GHV 250 1904 R0002 200 to 420 G 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R0003 24 to 60 G 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/127 GHV 250 1908 R0003 50 to 127 G KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/250 GHV 250 1903 R0003 110 to 250 G The coils must be equipped with 2.8 mm flat pin lugs. 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/380 GHV 250 1904 R0003 200 to 420 G 10 0.004
RT 5/32 1SBN 05 0020 R1000 12 to 32 G 2 0.015
RT 5/65 1SBN 05 0020 R1001 25 to 65 G 2 0.015
RT 5/90 1SBN 05 0020 R1002 50 to 90 G (T)AE 45 to (T)AE 75 and AE 95/110 2 0.015
RT 5/150 1SBN 05 0020 R1003 77 to 150 G 2 0.015
RT 5/264 1SBN 05 0020 R1004 150 to 264 G 2 0.015
RV 5/50 1SBN 05 0010 R1000 24 to 50 G G 2 0.015
RV 5/133 1SBN 05 0010 R1001 50 to 133 G G 2 0.015
RV 5/250 1SBN 05 0010 R1002 110 to 250 G G N, A 9 to A 110 and AE 45 to AE 110 2 0.015
RV 5/440 1SBN 05 0010 R1003 250 to 440 G G 2 0.015
RC 5-1/50 1SBN 05 0100 R1000 24 to 50 G 2 0.012
RC 5-1/133 1SBN 05 0100 R1001 50 to 133 G N and A 9 to A 40 2 0.012
RC 5-1/250 1SBN 05 0100 R1002 110 to 250 G 2 0.012
RC 5-1/440 1SBN 05 0100 R1003 250 to 440 G 2 0.012
RC 5-2/50 1SBN 05 0200 R1000 24 to 50 G 2 0.015
RC 5-2/133 1SBN 05 0200 R1001 50 to 133 G 2 0.015
RC 5-2/250 1SBN 05 0200 R1002 110 to 250 G A 45 to A 110 2 0.015
RC 5-2/440 1SBN 05 0200 R1003 250 to 440 G 2 0.015
RC-EH 300/48 SK 829 007-A 24 to 48 G EH 145 to EH 300 and 1 0.015
RC-EH 300/415 SK 829 007-B 110 to 415 G EK 110 to EK 210 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/110 SK 829 007-C 48 to 110 G EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015
24 to 125 G EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/600 SK 829 007-D 220 to 600 G EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015
E
0
7
3
7
D
E
0
7
3
8
D
E
0
7
4
0
D
E
0
7
3
9
D
Index Section
Section
4/16
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Utilization
RA30 and RA5 interface relays are designed to receive 24 V d.c. signals delivered by PLC's or other sources
with a low output power and to restore them with sufficient power to operate the coils of the relevant
contactors.
Types
RA30 for combination with BC 9 to BC 30 contactors and KC contactor relays.
RA5 for combination with A 9 - A 110 contactors and N contactor relays.
Description
RA30 and RA5 interface relays are made up of a miniature electromechanical relay equipped with a N.O.
contact and with a low consumption 24 V d.c. coil.
The interface relay coil is controlled by the PLC while the N.O. contact ensures switching of the power contactor.
Coil switching gives rise to overvoltages which have adverse effects on the electronic devices, insulators and,
more generally, on component lifetime. The RA 30 and RA 5 are equipped with surge suppressors:
on the 24 V d.c. relay coil via a diode
on the power contactor coil via a varistor.
Furthermore, the RA30 and RA5 are protected against relay pole reversal by a diode inserted between the
E1 and E2 input terminals.
Connection
The "E1+" and "E2" input terminals must be connected, according to their polarity, to the PLC output.
G The RA30 has two leads to be connected to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil. This coil is supplied
between its own A2 terminal and the A0 terminal of the RA 30.
G The RA 5 is equipped with two terminal pads for connection to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil.
This coil is supplied between the A0 and A2 terminals of the RA 5.
RA 30 interface relay for the BC 9 - BC 30 RA 5 interface relay for the A 9 - A 110
contactors and KC contactor relays contactors and N contactor relays
Mounting
RA30: dovetail mounting at the top of the contactor base.
RA5: terminal pads clamped inside the contactor coil terminals.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Control Mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
voltage types coil voltages
U
c
piece kg
RA30 FPTN 472 770 R0002 24V d.c. KC, BC9 - BC30 12 - 250V d.c. 1* 0.035
RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 R1001 24V d.c. N, A 9 - A 110 24 - 250V 50, 60Hz 1* 0.050
* Packing 10 : RA 30 FPTN 472 770 R0001 Qty/Order: 10 or multiple of 10
RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 T1001 Qty/Order: 10 or multiple of 10
RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays
U
c
250 V a.c. 24 V d.c.
+
RA 5
A0 E2 E1 +
KM1
A1
A2
PLC
Output
A2
E
0
7
4
2
D
G
24 V d.c.
+
RA 30
A0 E2 E1 +
KM1
A1
A2
PLC
Output
U
c
250 V d.c.
E
0
7
4
1
D
G
A 75 + RA 5
S
B

7
6
1
4
S
3
S
B
7
1
1
7
S
4
BC 9-30-10 + RA 30
S
B

7
6
1
5
S
3
RA 30
RA 5
S
B

7
6
1
1
S
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
RA30 and RA 5 Interface Relays
Technical Data
Types RA 30 RA 5
Standards IEC 255-5
i
acc. to IEC 947-4-1

and VDE 0110 (Gr.C) V a.c. 250
Permissible ambient temperature:
G for free air operation:
at U
c
= 24V d.c. (between E1 and E2) C 25 to + 70
from 0.85 to 1.1U
c
C 25 to + 55
G for storage C 40 to + 70
Climatic withstand Complies with that of associated contactors
Mounting position No limitation
Operating height metres 3000
Fixing Dovetail mounting in the top part Using the contactor A1 and A2
of the contactors terminal connecting parts
Connecting terminals (open on delivery) Cable clamps and M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw
Cable cross-sectional area:
G rigid solid 2 x mm
2
1 to 4
G flexible 2 x mm
2
0.75 to 2.5
Degree of protection Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Construction Data
Surge suppression:
G for contactor coil Varistor
G for interface relay coil Diode
Protection against polarity reversal between terminals E1 and E2 Diode
Use on contactors with coils:
G 24 to 250V / 50, 60 Hz types N, A9 - A110
G 12 to 250V d.c. types KC, BC9 - BC30
Interface relay operating time ms Closing and drop-out 10
Total operating time,
interface relay + contactor:
G between energization and:
N.O. contact closing ms 59 to 84 19 to 36
N.C. contact opening ms 54 to 79 16 to 32
G between de-energization and:
N.O. contact opening ms 25 to 40 15 to 25
N.C. contact closing ms 27 to 42 18 to 28
Electrical Input Data
Control voltage (E1and E2 terminals) U
c
: rated value V d.c. 24
max. range V d.c. 17 to 30
Max. consumption for U
c
= 24V d.c., = 20 C W 0.3
"0" status (relay open) for U
c
V d.c. 2.4
or I
c
mA < 1
"1" status (relay closed) for U
c
V d.c. 17
Max. short supply interruption immunity time ms 4
Electrical Output Data
Switching voltage (A0 and A2 terminals) V a.c. 250
V d.c. 250
Electrical lifetime million of operations 10 (1200 ops./h) 4 (600 ops./h) on A 9 A 40
2 (600 ops./h) on A 45 A 110
Index Section
Section
4/18
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Connecting Auxiliaries
for Control Leads
Impulse Contact Blocks
Terminals for control lead connections: LK
Utilization
Terminals designed to connect the control conductors to the main poles of the A and AE 45 to 110 contactors.
Degree of protection IP 20
Connecting terminal delivered in open position: cable clamp and M3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw.
Cable cross-sectional area: - 1 or 2 rigid conductors 1 to 4 mm
2
- 1 or 2 flexible conductors 1 to 2.5 mm
2
Mounting
Clipped into the slots placed above each power terminal connector.
The LK 75 are fitted with a pin designed to hold them in place until the connector has been fully clamped
with its power cable.
The LK 110 must be held in place until the connector has been clamped.
Ordering details
Type Order code Connection Pack
ing
Weight
piece kg
LK 75-A 1SBN 07 3552 R1000 right and left on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 75-A 1 1SBN 07 3552 R1001 opposite on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 110 1SFN 07 4352 R1000 right and left on A(E) 95 to 110 2 0.010
Screw, for control lead connection to the main terminals of the EH/EK contactors
Utilization
M4 x 12 screws for connecting the control conductors to the terminal pads of the main poles of the
EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 contactors.
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on contactor Pack
ing
Weight
piece kg
- 2121 2415 - 291 EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 10 0.002
Impulse Contact Blocks: CB 5 -
Utilization
Impulse contact blocks are available in two different types:
CB 5-10 - N.O. contact with a black pushbutton ("ON" contact of d.o.l. starter)
CB 5-01 - N.C. contact with a red pushbutton ("OFF" function)
These blocks are equipped with 2 connecting leads with end, approx. 10 cm long.
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 - A 110, AE 45 - AE 110 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors.
Ordering details
Type Order code Contact Pack
ing
Weight
piece kg
CB 5-10 1SBN 01 0013 R1010 1 - 1 0.012
CB 5-01 1SBN 01 0013 R1001 - 1 1 0.012
LK 75-A
S
B
7
5
7
6
S
3
CB 5
S
B
7
5
7
1
S
3
LK ... positioning
E
0
2
6
6
D
LK 110
S
B
7
5
7
5
S
3
LK 75-A 1
S
B
7
5
7
7
S
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Lamp Holder
Fuse Holder
Function Markers
Lamp Holder Block: BL 5 - L
Utilization
Lamp holder for indicator light.
Description
Block designed to hold a bulb (BA 9 s type, max. P = 1.2 W, max. voltage = 400 V, max. length = 28 mm), not
supplied.
Equipped with 2 connecting leads (1 mm
2
and approx. 10 cm long), with 3 lenses (green, red, colourless) for
fixing on the front face of the d.o.l. starter enclosures (insulated enclosures).
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110 and BC 9 to BC 30 contactors.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
piece kg
BL 5 - L 1SBN 07 0054 R1000 1 0.022
Fuse Holder Block: BL 5 - F
Utilization
Fuse holder for the control circuit.
Description
Block designed to hold a fuse cartridge (5 x 20, 4A max), not supplied.
Equipped with 2 connecting leads 1mm
2
and approx. 10 cm long.
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110 and BC 9 to BC 30 contactors and N or KC
4-pole contactor relays.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
kg
BL 5 - F 1SBN 07 0055 R1000 1 0.020
Function Marker: BA 5 - 50
Utilization
For marking contactors, thermal O/L relays, contactor relays and accessories.
Description
The BA 5 - 50 is a set of 50 function markers designed to be clipped onto the front face of devices.
Effective marking surface: 7 x 19 mm
Details can be added to these markers using a ball point pen, indelible felt-tip pen or pentel white. Self-
adhesive labels (not supplied) can also be added to them.
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on: Pack
ing
Weight
box kg
BA 5 - 50 1SBN 11 0000 R1000 contactors (except EH and EK), 1 0.017
thermal O/L relays, contactor relays,
accessories
BL 5 - L
BL 5 - F
BA 5 - 50
S
B
7
5
8
7
S
4
S
B
7
5
6
7
S
3
S
B
7
5
6
7
S
3
S
B
7
5
6
9
S
3
S
B
7
5
6
8
S
2
S
B
7
5
7
0
S
1
Index Section
Section
4/20
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Terminal Connecting Strips
Utilization
Parallel and series connection of 3-pole and 4-pole contactor poles:
G To obtain a star point (3 parallel-connected poles): LY, LF, (LY allows 3 phases to be short-circuited)
G To connect poles in parallel and thus increase the a.c. load passing through the flow path made up of the
parallel-connected poles: LP and LH (2 poles); LY and LF (3 poles); LG (4 poles).
The maximum permissible current values with parallel-connected poles are given on page 2/54.
The relevant cable cross-sectional area may limit the maximum permissible current. Consult the information
in the table below.
G To connect poles in series and thus increase the d.c. load controlled by the poles: LP and LH.
Types Mounting on contactors
G LP 16, LY 16, LH 16, LF 16, LG 16 A 9 to A 16, BC 9, BC 16.
G LP 25, LH 25 A 26, BC 25.
G LF 30 BC 30
G LH 75, LF 75 A 45 to A 75, AE 45 to AE 75
G LY 110 A 95, 110, AE 95, 110
G LY 210 EH 145, EH 175, EH 210
G LY 300 EH 260, EH 300
G LY 550 EH 370, 550.
Description
Strip for connection of "n" poles with terminal insulated
LP ... n = 2 no yes
LY 16, LY 110 n = 3 no yes
LH ... n = 2 yes no
LF ... n = 3 yes no
LG ... n = 4 yes no
LY 210 - LY 550 n = 3 no no
Ordering Details
Type Order code for max. nominal Cable cross- Pack
ing
Weight
contactor continuous sectional area
current with
"n" poles
A mm
2
piece kg
LP 16 FPEP 407 000 R0001 N, KC - 6 10 0.002
A 9, BC 9 30 6
A 12 32 6
A 16, BC 16 34 6
LP 25 FPEP 407 001 R0001 A 26, BC 25 50 10 10 0.004
LY 16 FPEP 407 002 R0001 A 9, BC 9 33 6 10 0.005
A 12 36 6
A 16, BC 16 39 6
LH 16 FPTN 477 017 R0001 A 9, BC 9 35 10 2 0.010
A 12 38 10
A 16, BC 16 45 10
LH 25 FPTN 472 669 R0001 A 26, BC 25 72 16 2 0.014
LH 75 FPTN 472 734 R0001 A(E) 45
to 200 95 2 0.085
A(E) 75
LF 16 FPTN 477 017 R0002 A 9, BC 9 50 16 2 0.010
A 12 54 16
A 16, BC 16 63 16
LF 30 FPTN 472 743 R0001 BC 30 121 50 2 0.035
LF 75 FPTN 472 735 R0001 A(E) 45 2 0.095
to 275 150
A(E) 75
LG 16 FPTN 477 017 R0003 A9, BC 9 62 16 2 0.012
A 12 67 16
A 16, BC 16 72 16
LY 110 1SFN 07 4303 R1000 A(E) 95, 110 350 1 0.055
LY 210 2631 0243-6 EH 145 510 1 0.100
EH 175 575
EH 210 660
LY 300 2631 0243-4 EH 260, 300 980 1 0.200
LY 550 2631 0243-5 EH 370 1250
1 0.250
EH 550 1800
LY 16
S
B
7
5
8
3
S
2
LP 25
S
B
7
5
8
4
S
2
LH
S
B
7
1
7
0
S
3
/
1
LF
S
B
7
1
7
0
S
3
/
2
LG
S
B
7
1
7
0
S
3
/
3
LY 210 - LY 550
A

2
0
0
Sommaire Gnral
Index
Sommaire Chapitre
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Connectors
Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
Connectors
Utilization
Connection of copper and aluminium cables to the terminal pads of the poles of EH and EK contactors.
Types
There are three kinds of connectors:
- OXFB ... for copper cables : single steel connector with brass core for
EH 145 - EH 550 and EK 110 - EK 550.
- TC ... for aluminium or copper cables : single aluminium connector for
EH 145 - EH 700 and EK 110 - EK 550.
- TCD ... for aluminium or copper cables : double aluminium connector for
EH 370 - EH 700, EK 370 and EK 550.
Ordering details
Type Order code Cable for contactors Pack
ing
Weight
cross-sectional
area in mm
2
pieces kg
Single connector for copper cables
OXFB 70 SK 175 0001 25 to 70 EK 110 3 0.05
OXFB 120 SK 175 0003 25 to 120 EK 110 3 0.06
OXFB 150 SK 175 0005 35 to 150 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.07
OXFB 185 SK 175 0007 25 to 185 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.07
OXFB 300 SK 175 0009 70 to 300 EH 260 to 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.13
Single connector for aluminium or copper cables
TC 70-15 SK 173 001-AB 10 to 70 EK 110 3 0.04
TC 120-20 SK 173 001-AC 35 to 120 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.08
TC 300-25 SK 173 001-AD 70 to 300 EH 260 to 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.16
TC 300-40 SK 173 001-AE 95 to 300 EH 700 3 0.20
Double connector for aluminium or copper cables
TCD 185-25 SK 173 001-BD 2 x (35 to 185) EH 370, 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.25
TCD 300-40 SK 173 001-BE 2 x (95 to 300) EH 700 3 0.26
Utilization
Flat pin terminal blocks are used to connect by means of clips the contactors equipped with screw terminals.
Types
Flat pin terminal blocks are available for A 9 to A 26 and BC 9 to BC 25 contactors, N and KC contactor relays
and CA-5 4-pole auxiliary contact blocks.
Description
Set made up of two flat pin terminals allowing two 6.3 mm or 2.8 mm clips to be connected to each pole
and two flat pins which are added to the coil terminals.
Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 106 - Part. 100.
As stipulated by the NFC 20-120 and DIN 46249 standards, the maximum permissible current for the flat
pins is 25 A.
Mounting
Flat pin terminal blocks are fixed by the screw terminals with which the contactor is equipped.
Ordering details
Type Order code for mounting Pack
ing
Weight
on contactors
set kg
LC 16-B GJL 280 1912 R0002 KC, BC 9 to BC 16 1 stack 1 0.025
For 2-stack contactors,
2 sets are required.
LC 26-B2 GJL 280 1912 R0005 BC 18 2 stacks 1 0.048
LC 25-B1 GJL 280 1912 R0003 BC 25 1 stack 1 0.023
LC 16-A 1SBN 07 1400 R1000 N, A 9 to A 16 1 stack 1 0.025
4-pole CA 5
LC 26-A1 1SBN 07 2400 R1000 A 26 1 stack 1 0.027
LC 26-A2 1SBN 07 2401 R1000 A 26 2 stacks 1 0.048
TCD . .
TC . .
A
0
4
7
A
0
7
9
OXFB . .
A
0
9
2
LC16-B
A
0
9
9
!
Index Section
Section
4/22
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Terminal Accessories
Additional Terminal Block: LD 110
Utilization
The LD 110 terminal block is designed to increase the connection capacity of the contactor on which it is
mounted: A(E) 95 or A(E) 110.
Description
Block housing three connectors: 1 per phase. Each connector is equipped with an HC, M8 socket head
screw and has the following connection details:
- Stranded rigid conductor: 1 x (10 to 70 mm
2
) or 2 x (10 to 35 mm
2
)
- Flexible conductor : 1 x (10 to 50 mm
2
) or 2 x (10 to 25 mm
2
)
- Bar : max. width 12 mm
Mounting
The LD 110 terminal block is fixed in the 3 apertures located above the built-in connectors.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
piece kg
LD 110 1SFN 07 4308 R1000 A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 1 0.150
Terminal Extension Pieces: LX ...
Utilization
LX ... extension pieces are designed to extend the terminal pads of the EH contactors for simultaneous mounting
of the connectors (see page 4/21) and the connection sets (see page 4/24).
Description
The LX ... set contains 3 bars delivered with straps to prevent them from rotating.
Ordering details
Type Order code Dimensions Mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
hole bar
mm mm set kg
LX 210 SK879 902-C 11 20 x 5 EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.15
LX 550 SK879 902-D 11 25 x 6 EH 260 - EH 550 1 0.30
LX 700 SK879 902-E 11 40 x 6 EH 700 1 0.70
Enlargement Pieces: LW ...
Utilization
LW ... enlargement pieces are designed to increase the width of the contactor terminal pads in order to
allow larger connectors to be mounted.
LW 210 pieces can be combined with the connectors provided for EH 260 and EH 300.
Description
LW ... sets contain 3 bars delivered with straps to prevent them from rotating.
Ordering details
Type Order code Dimensions Mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
hole bar
mm mm set kg
LW 110 1SFN 07 4307 R1000 6 15 x 3 A(E) 95, A(E) 110 1 0.10
LW 210 SK 879 901 - C 11 25 x 6 EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.30
LW 210
E
0
7
2
1
D
1
LD 110
LX
S
B
6
5
6
1
S
3
S
B
6
5
6
2
S
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Utilization
The use of terminal shrouds on the main terminals of EH contactors is required in electrical panels or cubicles
to be built in compliance with the rules for protection against accidental direct contact with live parts according
to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
A 9 to A 110, BC 9 to BC 30 and AE 45 to AE 110 contactors do not require additional terminal shrouds as their
terminals are all already protected against accidental direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
Types
On EH 145 to EH 800 and EK 110 to EK 550 contactors:
- the auxiliary contact blocks and coils are designed to provide an IP 20 degree of protection.
- the main terminals, equipped with lugs or connectors, can be protected against accidental direct contact after
wiring (VDE 0106 - Part. 100) by the addition of terminal shrouds (see table below).
Each terminal shroud protects all the terminals on one side of the contactor. Two terminal shrouds should be
provided for each separate contactor.
When the contactor is connected to a thermal O/L relay, use a single LT - E terminal shroud from the table below
for line side protection and a set of LT... terminal shrouds for thermal O/L relay side protection
(see page 5/9).
Ordering details
ing
Weight
piece kg
LT 210-EL SK 178 001-CB EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.060
with lugs
LT 210-EC SK 178 003-CB EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.057
with connectors
LT 300-E SK 178 001-DB EH 260, EH 300 1 0.157
with lugs or connectors
LT 550-E SK 178 001-EB EH 370, EH 550 1 0.168
LT 700-E SK 178 001-FB EH 700 1 0.182
LT 800-E SK 178 001-GB EH 800 1 0.182
with lugs
LT 150-EK SK 178 001-HB EK 110, EK 150 1 0.139
LT 210-EK SK 178 001-KB EK 175, EK 210 1 0.152
LT 550-EK SK 178 001-LB EK 370, EK 550 1 0.190
A
_
8
1
8
D
1
P
r
o
t
c
o
v
1
Terminal Shrouds
LT 210 terminal shroud
LT 300 - LT 800 terminal shroud
Index Section
Section
4/24
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Connections for reversing contactors
Utilization
Connections between the main poles of two 3-pole contactors mounted side by side so that they operate as
reversing contactors.
Description
The sets are made up of three upstream connections and three downstream connections.
BEM 16-30 - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BEM 26 and 40-30 - Insulated, stranded, rigid copper wires
BEM 75 and 110-30 - Insulated, solid copper bars
BSM 16-30, BSM 25 and 30-30 BC - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BSH 145 - BSH 250 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSH 550 - BSH 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
On the EH contactors, the power supply by bars or cables equipped with lugs is directly connected to the
terminal pads of the main poles. For flange connectors (see page 4/21), LX terminal extension pieces should
be used (see page 4/22).
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on 3-pole Pack
ing
Weight
contactors
set kg
BEM 16-30 1SBN 08 1401 R1000 A 9 - A 16 1 0.025
BEM 26-30 1SBN 08 2401 R1000 A 26 1 0.056
BEM 40-30 1SBN 08 2801 R1000 A 30, A 40 1 0.096
BEM 75-30 1SBN 08 3501 R1000 A 50 - A 75 1 0.243
BEM 110-30 1SFN 08 4301 R1000 A 95, A 110 1 0.450
BSM 16-30 FPTN 477 022 R0001 BC 9, BC 16 1 0.015
BSM 25-30 BC FPTN 477 041 R0001 BC 25 1 0.020
BSM 30-30 BC FPTN 477 041 R0002 BC 30 1 0.025
BSH 145 SK 829 091-C EH 145 1 1.000
BSH 210 SK 829 091-D EH 175, 210 1 1.100
BSH 300 SK 829 091-E EH 260, 300 1 2.500
BSH 550 SK 829 091-F EH 370, 550 1 5.600
BSH 700 SK 829 091-G EH 700 1 6.400
BSH 800 SK 829 091-H EH 800 1 6.400
3-pole Connections
Utilization
Connections between the main poles of two 3-pole contactors horizontal mounted.
Description
This set is made up of three downstream connections.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
contactors
set kg
BES 75-30 1SBN 08 3504 R1000 A(E) 50-30 A(E) 75-30 1 0.130
BES 110 1SFN 08 4304 R1000 A(E) 95, A(E) 110 1 0.250
Connection Sets
BEM
A1
A2
A1
A2
3 1 5 3 1 5
4 2 6 4 2 6
E
0
7
4
4
D
BSH 145 - BSH 250
E
0
7
4
5
D
BSH 550 - BSH 800
E
0
7
4
6
D
BES 110
A1
A2
A1
A2
3 1 5 5 3
4 2 6 6 4
1
2
E
0
8
6
0
D
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Connection Sets
Connections for 4-pole Changeover Contactors
Utilization
Connection between the main poles of two 4-pole contactors mounted side by side so that they operate as
source reversing contactors.
Description
These sets are made up of four downstream connections.
BES 75-40 - Insulated, stranded, rigid copper cables.
BSS 100 - BSS 210 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSS 550 - Bare, solid copper bars.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
contactors set kg
BES 75-40 1SBN 08 3302 R1000 A(E) 45, 50, 75 1 0.400
BSS 100 SK 829 090-B EK 110 1 0.400
BSS 145 SK 829 090-F EK 150 1 0.700
BSS 210 SK 829 090-G EK 175, 210 1 1.000
BSS 550 SK 829 090-E EK 370, 550 1 3.300
Connections for Star-delta Starters
Utilization
Connections between the main poles of a star-delta starter.
Description
These sets are made up of:
Three line contactor/star contactor connections - Upstream side.
Three connections for star and delta contactors mounting joined side by side - Downstream side.
The necessary elements to create the star point upstream of the star contactor.
Alternatively BED 16 BED 75 connection sets suitable for mechanically interlocked star and delta contactors
may be supplied if required.
BED 16-1 - BED 26-1 - Insulated, solid copper wires.
BED 40-1 - Insulated, stranded solid copper wires.
BED 50-1, BED 75-1 - Solid copper bars and insulated stranded copper wires.
BED 95 - BED 110 - Insulated, solid copper bars.
BED 145 - BSD 210 - BSD 300 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSD 550 - BSD 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
The above BED 95 BSD 800 connection sets allow a mechanical interlock unit to be mounted between the
star and delta contactors if required.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
Line and Delta Star set kg
BED 16-1 1SBN 08 1403 R1001 A 9 A 9
A 12 A 9 1 0.040
A 16 A 12
BED 26-1 1SBN 08 2403 R1001 A 26 A 16 1 0.050
BED 40-1 1SBN 08 2803 R1001 A 30 A 26 1 0.070
A 40 A 26
BED 50-1 1SBN 08 3503 R1001 A 50 A 30 1 0.280
A 63 A 40
BED 75-1 1SBN 08 4103 R1001 A 75 A 50 1 0.280
BED 95 1SFN 08 4303 R1000 A 95 A 75 1 0.400
BED 110 1SFN 08 4503 R1000 A 110 A 95 1 0.500
BED 145 SK 829 092-L EH 145 A 110 1 0.700
BSD 210 SK 829 092-E EH 175 EH 145 1 1.200
EH 210 EH 175
BSD 300 SK 829 092-F EH 300 EH 210 1 2.000
BSD 550 SK 829 092-G EH 370 EH 260 1 4.800
EH 550 EH 300
BSD 700 SK 829 092-H EH 700 EH 550 1 6.600
BSD 800 SK 829 092-K EH 800 EH 550 1 6.600
Controlgear selection guide for Star-Delta starters ............................................................................................................... page 2/27
E
0
8
5
9
D
BED 40
A

8
5
5
D
BED 75-1
BSD 550 BSD 800
A

8
5
4
D
BSD 145 BSD 300
BES 75-40
A1
A2
A1
A2
3 1 5 5 3 7
4 2 6 6 4 8
7 1
8 2
E
0
7
4
3
D
BSS 100 - BSS 550
A1
A2
A1
A2
3 1 5 3 5 1
4 2 6 4 6 2
7 7
8 8
E
0
7
4
7
D
1
3
5
E
1
1
4
3
D
Index Section
Section
4/26
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Plates for:
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
Plate
P
la
t
e
Description
The range is made up of plates for one contactor only, for two horizontal mounted contactors or for two vertical
mounted contactors and which may be combined with a thermal O/L relay (see section 5) for starters or with
other accessories such as, for example, a mechanical interlock unit (see page 4/10) for reversing contactors.
Ordering details
G Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors with or without a mechanical interlock unit and/or
thermal O/L relay.
Type Order code to use with: Pack
ing
Weight
Lefthand contactor Righthand contactor piece kg
PN 145-21 SK 829 075-B EH 145 VH 145 EH 145 1 1.180
PN 210-22 SK 829 075-C EH 175, 210 VH 210 A EH 145 1 1.400
EH 175, 210 VH 300 EH 175, 210
EK 110, 150 VH 145 EK 110, 150
PN 300-22 SK 829 075-E EH 260, 300 VH 300 EH 175, 210 1 2.070
(1) EH 260, 300 VH 300 EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210 VH 300 EK 175, 210
(1) To mount the thermal O/L relay, use the additional PR 450-9A plate below.
G Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors without mechanical interlock unit and/or thermal
O/L relay.
ing
Weight
Lefthand contactor Righthand contactor piece kg
PN 550-21 21 75 0297-5 EH 370, 550 EH 370, 550 1 4.100
PN 800-22 21 75 0297-6 EH 700, 800 EH 700, 800 1 5.000
EH 370, 550 EH 370, 550
G Additional plates for mounting a thermal O/L relay on a main plate holding the contactors.
ing
Weight
thermal O/L relay main plate piece
PR 450-9A SK 829 073-A T 450 DU PN 300-22 1 0.180
PR 900-9A SK 829 073-B T 450 DU, T 900 DU PN 550-21, plate 1 0.800
supplied with the
VH 550 interlocking
PR 900-9B SK 829 073-C T 900 DU PN 800-22, plate 1 0.960
supplied with the
VH 800 interlocking
G Plates for mounting a contactor combined with a thermal O/L relay.
ing
Weight
contactor thermal O/L relay piece
PN 300-11A 21 61 142-51 EH 145 to EH 210 T 200 DU 1 0.900
EH 175 to EH 300 T 450 DU
PN 700-11 21 61 142-98 EH 370, 550 T 450 DU 1 2.100
EH 550, 700 T 900 DU
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Dimensions in mm
PN 145-21
PN 210-22 PN 300-22
PN 550-21 PN 800-22
PN 300-11A PN 700-11
Plates for:
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
260
280
6.8
1
6
0
1
9
5
E
0
7
4
9
D
1
320
340
6.8
1
8
0
2
0
0
E
0
7
5
0
D
1
430
400
15
Additional plate
PR 450-9A
2
3
0
2
0
0
E
0
7
4
8
D
1
G
480
450
15
Additional plate
PR 900-9A
4
1
7
.
5
2
9
5
2
6
5
E
0
7
5
1
D
1
G
580
550
15
Additional plate
PR 900-9B
4
5
2
.
5
2
9
5
2
6
5
E
0
7
5
2
D
1
G
180
220
7
3
2
3
3
1
0
E
0
7
5
3
D
1
7
285
240
4
2
9
4
1
5
E
0
7
5
4
D
1
2
13
E
0
7
5
4
D
2
5
E
0
7
4
9
D
2
5
E
0
7
5
0
D
2
46
E
0
7
5
1
D
2
1.5
8
E
0
7
5
3
D
2
46
E
0
7
5
2
D
2
3
E
0
7
4
8
D
2
Index Section
Section
4/28
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Contact Sets
Arc Chutes
Main Contact Sets for 3-pole Contactors
Description
The contact sets for 3-pole contactors consist of six fixed contacts, three moving contacts, springs and the
necessary screws. In addition, the sets include three moving arcing contacts for EH 370 to EH 800 contactors.
Ordering details
Type Order code for contactors Pack
ing
Weight
set kg
KLC 9 FPTN 477 035 R0002 (T)BC 9-30 1 0.020
KLC 16 FPTN 477 037 R0002 (T)BC 16-30 1 0.020
KLC 18 GJL 220 1901 R0003 BC 18-30 1 0.040
KLC 25 GJL 200 1901 R0003 (T)BC 25-30 1 0.040
KLC 30 GJL 280 1901 R0002 (T)BC 30-30 1 0.050
ZL 50 1SBN 16 3503 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 50-30 1 0.115
ZL 63 1SBN 16 3703 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 63-30 1 0.130
ZL 75 1SBN 16 4103 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 75-30 1 0.145
ZL 95 1SFN 16 4303 R1000 A/AE/AF 95-30 1 0.190
ZL 110 1SFN 16 4503 R1000 A/AE/AF 110-30 1 0.190
KZ 145 SK 824 220-B EH 145 1 0.320
KZ 175 SK 825 200-B EH 175 1 0.500
KZ 210 SK 825 200-A EH 210 1 0.500
KZ 260 SK 826 200-B EH 260 1 0.600
KZ 300 SK 826 200-A EH 300 1 0.600
KZ 370 SK 827 200-D EH 370 1 1.800
KZ 550 SK 827 200-C EH 550 1 1.800
KZ 700 SK 828 200-D EH 700 1 2.000
KZ 800 SK 828 200-C EH 800 1 2.000
ZLU 50 1SBN 16 3502 R1000 UA 50, UA 50-R 1 0.115
ZLU 63 1SBN 16 3702 R1000 UA 63, UA 63-R 1 0.145
ZLU 75 1SBN 16 4102 R1000 UA 75, UA 75-R 1 0.145
ZLU 95 1SFN 16 4302 R1000 UA 95 1 0.190
ZLU 110 1SFN 16 4502 R1000 UA 110 1 0.190
Main Contact Sets for 4-pole Contactors
Description
The contact sets for 4-pole contactors consist of eight fixed contacts, four moving contacts, springs and the
necessary screws. In addition, the sets include four moving arcing contacts for EK 370 to EK 550 contactors.
Ordering details
ing
Weight
set kg
ZLT 45 1SBN 16 3304 R1000 A/AE/AF 45-40 1 0.150
ZLT 50 1SBN 16 3504 R1000 A/AE/AF 50-40 1 0.150
ZLT 75 1SBN 16 4104 R1000 A/AE/AF 75-40 1 0.160
KZK 110 SK 824 204-A EK 110 1 0.450
KZK 150 SK 824 204-B EK 150 1 0.450
KZK 175 SK 825 204-A EK 175 1 0.700
KZK 210 SK 825 204-B EK 210 1 0.700
KZK 370 SK 827 204-A EK 370 1 2.400
KZK 550 SK 827 204-B EK 550 1 2.400
Arc Chutes
Ordering details
ing
Weight
set kg
KW 145 5223 351-V EH 145 1 0.395
KW 175 5223 351-AD EH 175 1 0.820
KW 210 5223 351-AE EH 210 1 0.820
KW 260 5223 351-AF EH 260 1 1.070
KW 300 5223 351-AG EH 300 1 1.070
KW 370 5223 351-L EH 370 1 2.360
KW 550 5223 351-M EH 550 1 2.360
KW 700 5223 351-N EH 700 1 2.890
KW 800 5223 351-P EH 800 1 2.890
KWK 110 5223 351-AH EK 110 1 0.660
KWK 150 5223 351-AK EK 150 1 0.660
KWK 175 5223 351-AL EK 175 1 1.260
KWK 210 5223 351-AM EK 210 1 1.260
KWK 370 5223 351-Y EK 370 1 3.170
KWK 550 5223 351-Z EK 550 1 3.170
KZ
S
B
6
5
4
3
KL
Arc Chutes
S
B

7
6
0
2
S
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
4
Contactor Coils
S
B

7
3
8
0
S
4
ZA 16
ZAF 110
S
B

7
8
6
8
S
3
A.C. Operated Coils for N Contactor Relays
and A 9 to A 110 Contactors
Coils
ing
Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: I coil voltage code: I I ..
see page 0/1 see page 0/1 piece kg
ZA 16 I 1SBN 15 1410 R I I 06 N, A 9 to A 16 ; UA 16..-R 1 0.093
ZA 40 I 1SBN 15 2410 R I I 06 A 26 to A 40 ; UA 26, UA 30 1 0.148
UA 26..-R, UA 30..-R
ZA 75 I 1SBN 15 3510 R I I 06 A 45 to A 75 ; UA 50 to UA 75 1 0.166
UA 50..-R to UA 75..-R ; GA 75
ZA 110 I 1SFN 15 4310 R I I 06 A 95 to A 110 ; UA 95 to UA 110 1 0.195
AF Contactors - a.c./d.c. operated with controlled supply
Coils c/w electronic coil interface
Type Order code For contactors Pack
ing
Weight
voltage: I coil voltage code: I I
ZAF 75 I 1SBN 15 3570 R I I 06 AF 45 AF 75 0.170
ZAF 110 I 1SFN 15 4370 R I I 06 AF 95, AF 110 0.200
D.C. Operated Coils for KC Contactor Relays,
BC 9 to BC 30 and AE 45 to AE 110 Contactors
ing
Weight
voltage: I coil voltage code: I .. I
Coils only
KBC 30 G I GJL 200 1530 R I 46 I KC and BC 9 to BC 30 1 0.170
ZAE 75 I 1SBN 15 3590 R I I 06 AE 45 to AE 75 ; GAE 75 1 0.170
ZAE 110 I 1SFN 15 4390 R I I 06 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.195
Auxiliary device including an insertion contact and a varistor
CDL 5-01 1SBN 01 3522 R1001 AE 45 to AE 75 1 0.040
CCL 5-01 1SFN 01 4321 R1001 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.040
Index Section
Section
4/30
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
KH145
A
_
0
8
1
A
_
0
8
8
KH 550 - KH 800
KX 800
A
_
0
8
3
Contactor Coils
A.C. or D.C. Operated Coils for EH and EK Contactors
ing
Weight
voltage: I coil voltage code: - I I piece
or
see page 0/1 see page 0/1 set kg
a.c. or d.c. coils only
KH 145 I SK 824 101 - I I EH 145 1 0.240
KH 210 I SK 825 400 - I I EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 0.360
KH 300 I SK 826 400 - I I EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 0.440
KH 550 I SK 827 100 - I I EH 370, 550 1 0.780
KH 800 I SK 828 100 - I I EH 700, 800 ; EK 370, 550 1 0.950
Sets including a d.c. coil, an economy resistor and an insertion contact
KP 145 I SK 824 151 - I I EH 145 1 set 0.240
KP 210 I (1) SK 825 450 - I I EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 set 0.360
KP 300 I (1) SK 826 450 - I I EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 set 0.440
KP 550 I SK 827 150 - I I EH 370, 550 1 set 0.780
KP 800 I SK 828 150 - I I EH 700, 800 ; EK 370, 550 1 set 0.950
(1) The KP 210 and KP 300 have a double coil winding instead of an economy resistor
Sets including a multi-frequency coil and an insertion contact for contactor with built-in rectifier
KP 210 I SK 825 450 - E I EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 set 0.300
KP 300 I SK 826 450 - E I EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 set 0.400
A.C. and D.C. Operated Coils for the Mechanical Latching Units
on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors
Coils
ing
Weight
voltage: I coil voltage code: - I I
KX 800 I SK 829 100 - I I d.c. operated 1 0.09
Index Section
Section
5/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
Contents - TA and T Thermal O/L Relays
Panorama .............................................................................................................................. 5/2
Ordering details:
Standard Types and EEx e Special Version ................................................................. 5/4 - 5/6
Accessories ................................................................................................................... 5/7 - 5/9
Technical Data:
Description and Construction Details .................................................................................. 5/10
Technical Data .................................................................................................................... 5/11
Choice of Protective Device ................................................................................................ 5/14
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase, Short-Circuit Protection..................................... 5/15
Tripping Curves ................................................................................................................... 5/17
Tripping Times for EEx e Protection ................................................................................... 5/18
Certifications and Approvals ........................................................................................ Section 7
Contents - E Electronic O/L Relay
Ordering Details ................................................................................................................... 5/19
Technical Data ..................................................................................................................... 5/20
Tripping Curves .................................................................................................................... 5/21
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase, Short-Circuit Protection..................................... 5/22
Certifications and Approvals ................................................................................................ 5/22
E Electronic O/L Relay
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/2
A

3
1
0
Thermal O/L Relays
Types TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
Main Characteristics
Construction 3-pole with ambient temperature variation compensation.
Protection against single-phase operation. Built-in auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. + 1N.C.
Resetting Convertible: Manual Automatic
Setting ranges Number 18 3 6 4
from 0.1 - 0.16 A 18 - 25 A 18 - 25 A 29 - 42 A
to 24 - 32 A 29 - 42 A 60 - 80 A 60 - 80 A
Mounted with Contactors
Mounting kit No kit is required for mounting thermal O/L relays below contactors
Types of contactors A 9 BC 9
for combined mounting A 12
A 16 BC 16
BC 18
A 26 BC 25
A 30 BC 30 A 30
A 40 A 40
A 50 AE 50
A 63 AE 63
A 75 AE 75
A 95 AE 95
A 110 AE 110
Mounted separately (i.e. separate from contactor)
Separate mounting kit DB 25 DB 80
Accessories
Tripping coil DS 25-A
Resetting coil DR 25-A
Terminal shroud Terminals protected against direct contact (without the addition of terminal shrouds)
Function markers BA 5-50
Variants
Relays for motors with long starting time
Relays for EEx e protection TA 25 DU - V 1000 TA 42 DU - V 1000 TA 75 DU - V 1000 TA 80 DU - V 1000
Panorama
Index Section
Section
5/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
A

3
1
0
A

3
2
4
TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU T 900 DU
3-pole with ambient temperature variation compensation.
Protection against single-phase operation. Built-in auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. + 1N.C.
Convertible: Manual Automatic
2 4 4 4
65 - 90 A 100 - 135 A 130 - 185 A 265 - 375 A
80 - 110 A 150 - 200 A 285 - 400 A 610 - 850 A
No kit is required for mounting thermal O/L relays below contactors AT 450/EH - AT 900/EH -
A 95 AE 95
A 110 AE 110
EH 145
EH 175 EH 175 + AT 450/ EH 160
EH 210 EH 210 + AT 450/EH 160
EH 260 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 300 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 370 + AT 450/EH 370 EH 370 + AT 900/ EH 370/ 550
EH 550 + AT 900/EH 550
EH 700 + AT 900/EH 700
EH 800 + AT 900/EH 800
DB 200 No kit is required for separate mounting of thermal O/L relays.
Terminals protected against direct contact LT 200 . LT 450 . LT 900 .
(without the addition of terminal shrouds)
BA 5-50
T 450 SU T 900 SU
TA 110 DU - V 1000 T 200 DU - V 1000 T 450 DU - V 1000 T 900 DU - V 1000
see accessories
page 5/ 7
Panorama
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/4
TA 25 DU and TA 42 DU
Ordering Details
TA 25 DU
TA 42 DU
Thermal O/L relays Order code Setting Associated Pack
ing
Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A - A A A pieces kg
TA 25 DU for A 9 - A 40 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors
TA 25 DU 0.16 1SAZ 21 1201 R1005 0.1 - 0.16 0.5 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.25 1SAZ 21 1201 R1009 0.16 - 0.25 0.63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1013 0.25 - 0.4 1.25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.63 1SAZ 21 1201 R1017 0.4 - 0.63 2 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1021 0.63 - 1.0 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1023 1.0 - 1.4 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.8 1SAZ 21 1201 R1025 1.3 - 1.8 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 2.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1028 1.7 - 2.4 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 3.1 1SAZ 21 1201 R1031 2.2 - 3.1 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 4.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1033 2.8 - 4.0 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 5.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1035 3.5 - 5.0 10 16 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 6.5 1SAZ 21 1201 R1038 4.5 - 6.5 16 20 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 8.5 1SAZ 21 1201 R1040 6.0 - 8.5 20 25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 11 1SAZ 21 1201 R1043 7.5 - 11 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 14 1SAZ 21 1201 R1045 10 - 14 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 19 1SAZ 21 1201 R1047 13 - 19 35 50 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 25 1SAZ 21 1201 R1051 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 32 1SAZ 21 1201 R1053 24 - 32 (1) 63 80 1 0.170
(1) with DX 25 terminal block: 1 x 16 mm
2
cable
TA 25 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 9 - A 40 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors
TA 25 DU 0.16 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1005 0.1 - 0.16 0.5 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.25 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1009 0.16 - 0.25 0.63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1013 0.25 - 0.4 1.25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.63 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1017 0.4 - 0.63 2 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1021 0.63 - 1.0 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1023 1.0 - 1.4 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.8 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1025 1.3 - 1.8 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 2.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1028 1.7 - 2.4 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 3.1 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1031 2.2 - 3.1 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 4.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1033 2.8 - 4.0 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 5.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1035 3.5 - 5.0 10 16 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 6.5 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1038 4.5 - 6.5 16 20 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 8.5 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1040 6.0 - 8.5 20 25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 11 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1043 7.5 - 11.0 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 14 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1045 10 - 14 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 19 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1047 13 - 19 35 50 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 25 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1051 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 32 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1053 24 - 32 (1) 63 80 1 0.170
(1) with DX 25 terminal block: 1 x 16 mm
2
cable
TA 42 DU for A 30, A 40 and BC 30 contactors
TA 42 DU 25 1SAZ 31 1201 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 32 1SAZ 31 1201 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 42 1SAZ 31 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.33
TA 42 DU - V1000 (EEx e) for A 30, A 40 and BC 30 contactors
TA 42 DU 25 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 32 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 42 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.33
S
B

7
3
8
6
S
B

7
3
6
1
G Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
G General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 G Dimensions .................................................................... section 9
Index Section
Section
5/5
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU and T 200 DU
Ordering Details
ing
Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
TA 75 DU for A 50 - A 75 and AE 50 - AE 75 contactors
TA 75 DU 25 1SAZ 32 1201 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 32 1SAZ 32 1201 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 42 1SAZ 32 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 52 1SAZ 32 1201 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 63 1SAZ 32 1201 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 80 1SAZ 32 1201 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.330
TA 75 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 50 - A 75 and AE 50 - AE 75 contactors
TA 75 DU 25 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 32 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 42 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 52 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 63 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 80 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.330
TA 80 DU for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 80 DU 42 1SAZ 33 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 52 1SAZ 33 1201 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 63 1SAZ 33 1201 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 80 1SAZ 33 1201 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.360
TA 80 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 80 DU 42 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 52 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 63 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 80 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.360
TA 110 DU for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 110 DU 90 1SAZ 41 1201 R1001 65 - 90 160 200 1 0.750
TA 110 DU 110 1SAZ 41 1201 R1002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.750
TA 110 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 110 DU 90 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1001 65 - 90 160 200 1 0.750
TA 110 DU 110 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.750
T 200 DU for EH 145, EH 175 and EH 210 contactors
T 200 DU 110 GJZ 432 1401 R 0002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.910
T 200 DU 135 GJZ 432 1401 R 0003 100 - 135 200 224 1 0.910
T 200 DU 150 GJZ 432 1401 R 0004 110 - 150 224 250 1 0.910
T 200 DU 175 GJZ 432 1401 R 0005 130 - 175 250 315 1 0.910
T 200 DU 200 GJZ 432 1401 R 0006 150 - 200 250 315 1 0.910
T 200 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 145, EH 175 and EH 210 contactors
T 200 DU 135 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0003 100 - 135 200 224 1 0.910
T 200 DU 150 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0004 110 - 150 224 250 1 0.910
T 200 DU 175 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0005 130 - 175 250 315 1 0.910
T 200 DU 200 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0006 150 - 200 250 315 1 0.910
Plate delivered with T 200 DU
for mounting with EH 175 and EH 210
contactors
S
B

7
0
2
9
T 200 DU
TA 75 DU
S
B

7
3
8
7
TA 110 DU
S
B

7
3
9
8
TA 80 DU
S
B

7
3
9
9
G Technical Data ................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/6
T 450 DU, T 450 SU, T 900 DU and T 900 SU
Ordering Details
ing
Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
T 450 DU for EH 175EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450 kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 GJZ 542 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 GJZ 542 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 GJZ 542 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
T 450 DU 400 GJZ 542 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500
T 450 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450 kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
T 450 DU 400 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500
T 450 SU for EH 175EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450 kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 GJZ 552 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 GJZ 552 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 GJZ 552 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 GJZ 552 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 GJZ 552 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 GJZ 552 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 GJZ 552 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
T 450 SU 400 GJZ 552 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700
T 450 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450 kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
T 450 SU 400 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700
T 900 DU for EH 370EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900 kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 GJZ 602 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 GJZ 602 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 GJZ 602 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 GJZ 602 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000
T 900 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900 kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000
T 900 SU for EH 370EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900 kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 GJZ 612 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 GJZ 612 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 GJZ 612 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 GJZ 612 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500
T 900 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900 kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500
S
B

6
5
6
9
S
B

6
5
7
0
G Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
T 900 DU / SU
T 450 DU / SU
Index Section
Section
5/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
S
S
T

2
7
9

9
2

R
Accessories for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays
G Dimensions .................................................. section 9 G Terminal Marking and Positioning ......................................... section 8
Kits for Mounting thermal O/L relays on contactors
Ordering Details
TA25 DU to T200 DU thermal O/L relays can be mounted directly on contactors without a mounting kit.
T450 DU/SU and T900 DU/SU to be combined with contactors require an additional mounting kit.
Type Order code For mounting on contactors Pack
ing
Weight
in
set kg
AT 450/EH 160 GJZ 520 1901 R0002 EH 175/ 210 1 0.500
AT 450/EH 300 GJZ 520 1909 R0002 EH 260/ 300 1 0.750
AT 450/EH 370 GJZ 520 1903 R0002 EH 370 1 1.100
AT 900/EH 550 GJZ 520 1911 R0002 EH 370/ 550 1 0.800
AT 900/EH 700 GJZ 520 1912 R0002 EH 700 1 1.900
AT 900/EH 800 GJZ 520 1913 R0002 EH 800 1 3.000
Separate Mounting Kit
Ordering Details
Type Order code For Fixing Pack
ing
Weight
thermal in
O/L relays pieces kg
DB 25/25 A 1SAZ 20 1108 R0001 TA 25 DU 25 fixing 1 0.050
DB 25/32 A 1SAZ 20 1108 R0002 TA 25 DU 32
screws
1 0.075
TA 42 DU or
DB 80 1SAZ 30 1110 R0001 TA 75 DU 35 mm 1 0.170
TA 80 DU
TA 110 DU fixing
DB 200 1SAZ 40 1110 R0001 screws 1 0.230
T 200 DU
only
LC - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
Description
LC terminal blocks can be used to transform standard connections into Faston connections:
2 x 6.3 mm or 4 x 2.8 mm per pole. The connections are protected against accidental contact.
The LC 30-T has a first terminal block for the 3 power terminals and a second for the 4 auxiliary terminals of
a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The LC 26-B1 has two identical terminal blocks each for 3 power terminals. This block allows the power
terminals to be fitted with two DB 25 kits or a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay and DB 25 kit assembly.
According to DIN 46429 part 1 and NFC 20-120 the max. capacity of a Faston connection is 25 A.
Ordering Details
ing
Weight
in
kg
LC 30-T GJL 280 1912 R0001 TA 25 DU relay 1 piece 0.021
LC 26-B1 GJL 280 1912 R0004 DB 25/ 25 A or DB 25/32 A 1 set 0.015
separate mounting kit
Terminal Block for 10 mm
2
Cross-sectional Widening
ing
Weight
in
pieces kg
DX 25 1SAZ 20 1307 R0002 TA 25 DU < 25 or 1 0.030
DB 25/25 A
DB 25
S
S
T

1
8
2

9
1

R
DB 80
S
S
T

1
9
3

9
1

R
DB 200
LC 26-B1
A

0
6
7
S
S
T

0
1
4

9
4

R
DX 25
!
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/8
Installation diagram
For connection of DS 25-A to TA 25 DU relay For connection of DR 25-A to TA 25 DU relay
Application
The DS 25-A coil is used for remote electrical tripping of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The DS 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally closed 95-96 auxiliary contact.
The DR 25-A coil is used for remote electrical resetting of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay which is
adjusted for "Manual resetting".
The DR 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally open 97-98 auxiliary contact.
The coils are not designed for continuous duty. Impulse duration: 0.2 to 0.35 s.
Set the button to "Man" (Manual resetting).
Mounting: clipped on to TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Uc voltage Pack
ing
Weight
at 50/60 Hz in
pieces kg
DS 25-A Remote Tripping Coil
DS 25-A-24 1SAZ 20 1501 R0001 24 V 1 0.10
DS 25-A-48 1SAZ 20 1501 R0002 48 V 1 0.10
DS 25-A-110 1SAZ 20 1501 R0003 110 V 1 0.10
DS 25 -A-220/380 1SAZ 20 1501 R0005 220/380 V 1 0.10
DS 25-A-500 1SAZ 20 1501 R0006 500 V 1 0.10
DR 25-A Remote Resetting Coil
DR 25-A-24 1SAZ 20 1504 R0001 24 V 1 0.10
DR 25-A-48 1SAZ 20 1504 R0002 48 V 1 0.10
DR 25-A-110 1SAZ 20 1504 R0003 110 V 1 0.10
DR 25-A-220/380 1SAZ 20 1504 R0005 220/380 V 1 0.10
DR 25-A-500 1SAZ 20 1504 R0006 500 V 1 0.10
S
S
T

2
0
5

9
1

R
S
S
T

2
0
4

9
1

R
DS 25 A
DR 25 A
A
B
B

8
6

6
6
7
9
/
1
S
A
B
B

8
6

6
6
7
9
/
2
S
A
B
B

8
6

6
6
8
0
/
1
S
A
B
B

8
6

6
6
8
0
/
2
S
Index Section
Section
5/9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
Terminal Shroud for Thermal O/L Relays
Utilization:
Protection against direct contact with live parts.
The presence of terminal shrouds on the thermal O/L relays is required in electrical panels or cubicles meeting
the specifications for protection against electrical accidents.
Protection is ensured as follows:
TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU and TA 110 DU thermal O/L relays come with their main and
auxiliary terminals protected against direct contact (no need to add a cover or terminal shroud).
T 200 DU, T 450 DU/SU and T 900 DU/SU thermal O/L relays come with their auxiliary terminals protected
against direct contact. However, the main terminals must be protected by the additional terminal shrouds
described below.
The terminal shrouds are made from a transparent insulating material.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted on: Pack
ing
Weight
in
set kg
LT 200/160 GJZ 430 1907 R0001 T 200 DU + EH 145/175/ 210 1 0.150
LT 450/250 GJZ 520 1930 R0001 T 450 DU/ SU + EH 175/ 210/260/ 300 1 0.310
LT 450/370 GJZ 520 1932 R0002 T 450 DU/ SU + EH 370 1 0.410
LT 900/700 GJZ 520 1935 R0002 T 900 DU/ SU + EH 370/550/700 1 0.450
LT 900/800 GJZ 520 1937 R0002 T 900 DU/ SU + EH 800 1 0.600
BA 5-50 Function Markers
Description
The BA 5-50 is a set of 50 function markers which can be clipped on to the front face of devices.
Dimensions of effective surface 7 x 19 mm.
Written details can be added to these markers using a ballpoint pen, indelible felt-tip or pentel white.
Self-adhesive labels can also be added to them.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted on: Pack
ing
Weight
in
box kg
BA 5-50 1SBN 11 0000 R1000 all thermal O/L relays 1 0.017
Connectors for Cu cables
Type Order code Mounted on Pack
ing
Weight
thermal O/L mm
2
in
relays pieces kg
OXFB 150 SK 1750005 T 200 DU 35-150 3 0.07
S
S
T

2
8
9

9
2

R
LT
BA 5-50
A

0
9
2
OXFB 150
S
B

7
5
8
7
S
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/10
Description
Application
TA and T thermal O/L relays are used with A, BC, AE and EH contactors for the protection of motors having
a nominal voltage of up to 690 V a.c. and 800 V d.c.
Product Range
G Standard Relays:
Types: TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU, T 200 DU, T 450 DU/SU and T 900 DU/SU
TA 25 to TA 110 and T 200 are directly connected in the motor circuit.
T 450 DU and T 900 DU relays are fed through a linear type transformer.
T 450 SU and T 900 SU are fed through a saturable transformer and consequently have a longer tripping time.
See page 5/11, "Protection of Motors with Long Starting Time".
G Special Construction
Thermal O/L relays with different certifications and approvals, see page 7/5.
Relays for protection of EEx e motors, see page 5/11.
Construction and Function
G General
Thermal O/L relays and their accessories meet the most important international standards (IEC),
European standards (EN) and the most important national standards (DIN-VDE, NFC-UTE, BS, etc.).
They meet the certification and approval directives required throughout the world.
Thermal O/L relays are 3-pole.
The motor current flows through their bimetals (1 per phase) which are thus indirectly heated. Under the effect
of the heating, the bimetals bend, cause the relay to trip and the position of the auxiliary contacts to change.
The relay setting range is graduated in amps. In compliance with international and national standards, the
setting current is the motor nominal current and not the tripping current (no tripping at 1.05 x setting current,
tripping at 1.2 times setting current).
The tripping curves (cold or warm starting, 3 phases and 2 phases) are shown on page 5/17.
The relays are built to be self-protecting in the event of an overload until the short-circuit protection device, as
specified in the association tables, is activated.
Technical Data
All the relays have:
Free tripping: the resetting button, even if held in, does not prevent tripping of the thermal O/L relay in the
event of a fault.
Temperature compensation: see page 5/11
Phase failure protection according to IEC 947-4-1: Within the limits of the setting range a reduced tripping
time, and thus improved motor protection, is obtained in case of a phase failure.
Tripping class (see page 7/8): 10 A, for TA and T - DU relays
30, for T - SU relays
Test functions and resetting, see table below.
Auxiliary contacts
The relays have two built-in auxiliary contacts: N.C. marked 95 96
N.O. marked 97 98
Both contacts are physically separate and can thus be used for 2 different circuits (control circuit, indication
circuit).
Function of TA 25 DU - T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays
Resetting
Relay tripped
{
95-96 Open
Relay not tripped
{
95-96 Closed
97-98 Closed 97-98 Open
Contacts Manual Automatic Both Manual and Automatic
Effect of blue Resetting Yes No No
button indexed
95-96
Closed when the
on R
button is pressed
No effect No effect
97-98
Open when the
button is pressed
Effect of blue Resetting Yes No No
button indexed
95-96
Closed when the Open when the button is pressed
on R/O
button is released
No effect
Closed when the button is released
97-98
Open when the
No effect
button is pressed
TA 25 DU
S
B

7
6
0
1
S
3
Index Section
Section
5/11
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
G Switching Frequency:
To avoid untimely tripping, TA and T thermal O/L relays have been designed to withstand roughly 15 switching
operations per hour with an approximately equal distribution between working and rest cycles.
In these conditions, the motor starting time must not exceed 1 second and the starting current must be lower
than or equal to 6 times the motor In.
For intermittent operations, the diagram opposite specifies relay operating limits.
Example: Motor starting time: ......................... 1 sec.
Load factor: ..................................... 40 %
Switching frequency: ....................... 60 ops./h according to diagram
For a higher number of operations and for load variations (e.g. frequent starting and braking), it is advisable
to use CUSTORAPID
protection.
For motors subject to particularly severe operating conditions (e.g. locked rotor) it is advisable to use
protection combined with a thermal O/L relay and the CUSTORAPID
system.
Protection of Motors with Long Starting Time
T 450SU/T 900SU relays must be used for especially long starting times. The setting ranges listed on
page 5/6 are for a single cable passage in the current transformer. The relay can also be used for smaller sized
motors. This is possible through multiple cable passages through the current transformer. The setting range
indicated on the rating plate varies in inverse proportion to the number of cable passages.
Example: a T 450DU/ SU relay with a setting range of 130 to 185 A is suitable for currents of 65 - 92.5 A in the
case of 2 passages and 43 - 61.6 A in the case of 3 passages.
G Mounting position
On a support at an angle of 30 in relation to the vertical plane (standard position).
Other mounting positions possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping
mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
G Special version for EEx e motors
TA 25 DUV1000 to T 900 DU/SUV1000 relays are suitable for EEx e motors. They are approved and
certified in compliance with the "Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt" (PTB) at Braunschweig.
Introduction and definition of chapter on "Characteristics of Increased Safety e", see publication DNG 80543
"Protection against explosions according to European Standards" (on request). When choosing a protective
relay, specific attention must be paid to the tripping curves. The determining values are: the ratio of the starting
current I
a

to the nominal current I
n
and the shortest time t
E
. These values must be indicated on the PTB approval
certificate and on the motor rating plate. The relay must trip within a time lapse t
E
, i.e. starting from a cold state
the tripping curve must be located below the point of co-ordinates: I
a
/ I
n
and t
E
.
Example for the capability of a TA protective relay:
The increased safety motor has the following characteristics:
Power = 7.5 kW ; I
a
/ I
n
= 7.4 ; t
E
= 11 s.
According to the tripping curve opposite, the tripping time is indeed located below the motor t
E
value. Compared
with the normal version, special versions for EEx e motors have the following features:
special in-factory tripping time test
special ordering details
The tripping curves for individual setting ranges as well as the PTB approval certificates are available on
request.
PTB numbers:
Type PTB Numbers Type PTB Numbers
TA 25 DUV1000 being prepared T450 DU, T900 DUV1000 3.53/38 1.671
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DUV1000 being prepared T450 SU, T900 SUV1000 3.53/38 1.672
T200 DUV1000 3.53-5315/ 93
Technical Data
Ambient Temperature Compensation
Thermal O/L relays are compensated against ambient temperature variations by a
compensation bimetal which is sensitive to the ambient temperature.
Thermal O/L relays are designed to operate between 5 C and +40 C in compliance
with standard IEC 947-4-1. For a wider range of 25 C to +55 C consult the graph
opposite.
Example: tripping at 25 C. Tripping takes place before 1.5 times the setting current.
Resetting: TA 25 DU T900 DU/SU thermal O/L relays have convertible manual/
automatic resetting.
Delivery: in manual resetting mode.
Ambient temperature
compensation limits
according to IEC 947-4-1
Ambient temperature
No tripping
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e

o
f

t
h
e

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

c
u
r
r
e
n
t
Tripping
S
S
T

0
8
5

9
2

K
Intermittent duty
(ops./h)
S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
Switching frequency
in relation to load factor.
t
a
: motor starting time.
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
Multiple of the setting current A
B
B

8
3

6
2
4
6
TA - and T - thermal O/L
relay cold-state tripping
characteristics
Tripping Limits at Ambient Temperatures varying by + 20C
Closing time
A
B
B

8
2
7

8
3
3
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/12
Types TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
Standards: IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
(international, european)
Certifications and approvals see section 7
i
V 690
imp
kV 6
Permissible ambient temperature
for storage C 40 to +70
for operation C 25 to +55 with temperature compensation (maximum values: see page 5/11)
Climatic withstand DIN 50017 Humidity in alternate climate KFW, 30 cycles
Mounting positions On a support at an angle of 30 in relation to the vertical plane (standard position). Other positions possible
except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
Shock withstand shock duration ms 15
at nominal I
e
Critical direction
of shocks A1, A2 multiples of g 12
Resistance to vibrations
(1 mm, 50 Hz) multiples of g 8
Mounting on contactor Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
separate with DB - kit Using screws: 2 x M4 or 35 mm EN 50022
Terminals and cross-sectional areas TA25DU setting ranges:
for main conductors (motor side) from 0.1-0.16 A 24-32 A
G screw terminal to 18-25 A
with cable clamp M4
via tunnel connector M5 M6 M6 M6
flat type for lug or bar
G conductor cross-sectional area
rigid solid or rigid stranded mm
2
2 x 1.5 - 6 1 x 10 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 x 16
flexible with cable end mm
2
2 x 1.5 - 4 2 x 0.75- 6 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 x 10
recommended bars mm
Terminals and cross-sectional area
for auxiliary conductors
G screw terminal (screw size)
with cable clamp M 3.5
rigid solid or rigid stranded 2 x mm
2
0.75 - 4
flexible with cable end 2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5
Degree of protection All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to see page
VDE 0106/Part. 100. (without additional terminal shrouds) opposite
Pole Technical Characteristics
Types TA 25 TA 42 TA 75 TA 80 TA 110 T200 T450 T900 T 450 T 900
DU DU DU DU DU DU DU DU SU SU
Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see pages 5/4 - 5/6
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-1 10 A 30A
Rated operational frequencies Hz 0 - 400 50/60
Max. switching frequency Up to 15 starts/h or 60 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor when neither
without untimely tripping the starting current of 6 x I
n
nor the starting time 1 s are exceeded.
Resistance per phase in m
and heat dissipation in W see pages 5/15 and 5/16
at the maximum current setting
Protection fuses
required for short-circuit protection see pages 5/4 - 5/6 (co-ordination: pages 7/19 - 7/21)
Technical Data
E
0
5
2
6
D
A1
A2
Index Section
Section
5/13
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
General Technical Data (cont.)
TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU/SU T 900 DU/SU
IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
see section 7
V 690 1000
kV 6 8
C 40 to +70
C 25 to +55 with temperature compensation (maximum values: see page 5/ 11)
Humidity in alternate climate KFW, 30 cycles
On a support at an angle of 30 in relation to the vertical plane (standard position). Other mounting positions
possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
ms 15
x g 12
x g 8
4 x M5 screws 4 x M6 screws
HC, M8
M10 M10 M10
mm
2
16 - 35 25 - 120 2 x 240 2 x 300
mm
2
16 - 35 25 - 95 2 x 240 2 x 300
mm 12 x 3 20 x 4 20 x 45 40 x 58
M 3.5
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 4
2 x mm
2
0.75 - 2.5
All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106/Part. 100.
(with additional terminal shrouds for the main terminals)
Technical Characteristics of Auxiliary Contacts for Thermal O/L Relays: TA 25 to T900
Auxiliary contacts "normally closed N.C." "normally open N.O."
Terminal marking 95-96 97-98
e
Va.c. 500 500
Conventional thermal current (in free air) I
th
A 10 6
e
, AC-15
up to 240 V A 3.0 1.5
up to 440 V A 1.9 0.95
up to 500 V A 1.0 0.75
e
DC-13
up to 250 V A 0.12 0.04
Protection against short circuits
gG (gl) fuses (according to IEC 269) A 10 6
S 271/S 281circuit-breaker A k3 k1
Maximum potential difference a.c. V 500 500
between N.C. and N.O. auxiliary contacts d.c. V 440 440
Technical Data
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/14
Motor Protection
Choice of Protective Device
Motor Protection - General
It is very important to choose an adequate protective device for the safety of the motor during operation and for its durability.
The efficiency of protection methods varies according to the application. The overview below will help you to choose.
There is no general rule and we are available to advise you for special applications and especially in the case of difficult starting.
Protective Devices and Efficiency
Protection in relation to current: Protection in relation to temperature:
Fuses Protective relay with Motor protection Motor protection
phase fault protection via CUSTORAPID
via SPEM electronic

thermistor relay
Causes of dangerous overloads for the motor windings
1 Overload with current I G G G
1.2 times the nominal current
2 S1-S8 nominal duties I I G G
according to IEC 34-I
3 Operation with starting, I I G G
braking, reversal in operating direction
4 Operation with starting I I G G
rate at > 15 cycles/hour
5 Locked rotor I G I for motors with G
special rotor
6 Overloads due to phase failure I G G G
7 Network undervoltage or overvoltage I G G G
8 Fluctuation of network frequency I G G I
9 Ambient temperature too high I G G I
10 Overheating due to external I I G I
cause (i.e. overheating of bearings)
11 Motor cooling disturbed I I G I
12 Undercurrent protection
on drop in load
13 Protection of asymmetry:
wrong phase direction
rotation or asymmetrical load
14 Earth fault protection
15 Automatic disconnection for
auxiliary load fault
Note: Fuses
Fuses do not protect motors against overloads. They are only used to protect installations and lines against short
circuits.
To ensure efficient protection of a motor against short circuits, it is advisable to use aM type fuses in association
with thermal O/L relays.
For the selection of fuses or circuit-breakers, refer to the indications given in this catalogue concerning contactors
on the one hand and thermal O/L relays on the other.
In general, fuse protection for direct-on-line starting must be sized as follows:
aM fuses: choose the fuse rating immediately above the full load value of the motor current.
gG (gI) fuses: determine the fuse rating immediately above the motor current value and choose the next highest
fuse rating.
Protection efficiency:
I unsuitable
I very average efficiency
G perfectly efficient
S
S
T

0
8
1

9
1

M
3
M
3~
S
S
T

0
8
1

9
1

M
2
M
3~
S
S
T

0
8
1

9
1

M
1
M
3~
S
S
T

0
8
1

9
1

M
4
M
3~
SPEM
Index Section
Section
5/15
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
Setting range Resistance Joule losses
per phase per phase at
max. setting
current
from - to
A A m W
TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
0.1 - 0.16 85850 2.2
0.16 - 0.25 85150 2.2
0.25 - 0.4 13750 2.2
0.4 - 0.63 5370 2.2
0.63 - 1.0 2190 2.2
1.0 - 1.4 1120 2.2
1.3 - 1.8 670 2.2
1.7 - 2.4 383 2.2
2.2 - 3.1 229 2.2
2.8 - 4.0 137 2.2
3.5 - 5.0 87.5 2.2
4.5 - 6.5 61 2.2
6.0 - 8.5 30.4 2.2
7.5 - 11 18.2 2.2
10 - 14 11.2 2.2
13 - 19 6.3 2.3
18 - 25 4.7 2.9
24 - 32 3.2 3.3
per phase per phase
A A m W
18 - 25 5.5 3.43
22 - 32 2.89 2.91
29 - 42 1.84 3.24
18 - 25 5.5 3.43
22 - 32 2.89 2.91
29 - 42 1.84 3.24
36 - 52 1.3 3.51
45 - 63 0.936 3.72
60 - 80 0.615 3.94
29 - 42 1.84 3.24
36 - 52 1.3 3.51
45 - 63 0.936 3.72
60 - 80 0.615 3.94
Short-circuit protection: see page 7/19.
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase,
Short-circuit Protection
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/16
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase,
Short-circuit Protection
per phase per phase at
max. setting
current
from - to
A A m W
80 - 110 0.378 3.78
T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay
100 - 135 0.318 5.79
110 - 150 0.255 5.74
130 - 175 0.214 6.55
150 - 200 0.182 7.28
T 450 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relay
130 - 185 2.5
165 - 235 2.5
220 - 310 2.5
285 - 400 2.5
T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relay
265 - 375 2.5
355 - 500 2.5
465 - 650 2.5
610 - 850 2.5
Short-circuit protection: see page 7/19
Index Section
Section
5/17
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
Tripping Curves
T 200 DU T 450 DU and T 900 DU T 450 SU and T 900 SU
(tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A) (tripping class 30)
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
2 Phases
3 Phases
3 Phases
2 Phases
from warm state
from cold state
S
S
T

0
0
0
3

9
0

K
S
S
T

0
0
5

9
0

K
9
1

A

3
8
3
Tripping current
in multiples of the setting current
Tripping current
Tripping current
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
2 Phases
3 Phases
3 Phases
2 Phases
from cold state
9
1

A

3
8
4
Tripping current
S
S
T

0
3
1

9
9

K
S
B

7
3
8
6
S
B

6
5
6
9
S
B

7
0
2
9
S
B

7
3
6
1
TA 25 DU TA 75 DU T 200 DU T900 DU
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
Tripping current
TA-DU and T-DU thermal O/L relays are 3-pole with manual or automatic resetting mode selection.
The resetting button can also be used for stopping.
Built-in auxiliary contacts are physically separate and, consequently, can be used in different circuits (control circuit/indication circuit).
Each relay is temperature compensated and ensures phase failure protection.
Protective relays up to size TA 75 DU are protected against direct contact via the front face. Terminal shrouds are available for T 200 DU to
T 900 DU/SU size relays.
The connecting terminals are delivered in open position with (+,-) pozidriv screws and screwdriver guidance. It is advisable to tighten unused terminal
screws.
Thermal O/L Relay Tripping Curves
TA 25 DU TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DU TA 110 DU
(tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A)
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
from warm state
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
3 Phases
3 Phases
from warm state
Tripping current
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
from warm state
3 Phases
3 Phases
2 Phases
from cold state
2 Phases
from cold state
2 Phases
2 Phases
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
2 Phases
3 Phases
3 Phases
2 Phases
from warm state
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

M
i
n
u
t
e
s
from cold state
6
8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
1
2
4
6
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
from cold state
from warm state
3 Phases
2 Phases
3 Phases
2 Phases
9
1

A

3
8
5
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/18
TA and T - V 1000 Thermal O/L Relays
Choice of Thermal O/L Relays for Protection
of EEx e Motors
Choice of thermal O/L relays for EEx e motor protection.
Thermal O/L relay tripping times are a function of the setting current multiples (tolerance 20% tripping time).
PTB approval: see page 5/11.
Setting range Tripping time in seconds for
of thermal O/L 3-8 multiples of the setting current:
relays
from to 3 4 5 6 7.2 8
A A s s s s s s
TA 25 DUV1000 Thermal O/L Relay
0.1 0.16 17.3 10 7 5.6 4.5 4
0.16 0.25 16.8 10 7.2 6 4.7 4.3
0.25 0.4 16.3 10 7 5.6 4.4 3.9
0.4 0.63 17.3 10.3 7.1 5.7 4.5 4
0.63 1.0 20 12.6 8.4 6.7 5.3 4.5
1.0 1.4 18.3 11.2 8 6.3 5 4.6
1.3 1.8 18.8 11.1 7.5 6 4.7 4.2
1.7 2.4 19.6 11.5 8 6 4.9 4.5
2.2 3.1 18.3 10.5 7.6 6 4.7 4.2
2.8 4.0 18.8 11.2 8 6.1 4.7 4.2
3.5 5.0 17.8 10.9 7.7 6 4.5 4.1
4.5 6.5 17.8 10.5 7.5 5.6 4.6 4
6.0 8.5 17.8 10.9 7.7 6.1 5 4.5
7.5 11 18.8 11.5 8.3 6.5 5.1 4.5
10 14 17.8 10.9 7.7 6 4.7 4.2
13 19 20.5 11.9 8.8 6 4.7 4
18 25 22.4 13.3 8 6.8 5 4.5
24 32 23.7 14 10 7.7 6 5.3
TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DUV1000 Thermal O/L Relays
18 25 41 23.2 16 11.8 9 7.5
22 32 37 21 13.8 10.6 8 6.8
29 42 34 18.5 12.6 9.5 6.8 6
36 52 43 23.9 16.1 11.8 9 7.3
45 63 37.4 21.3 15.2 10.6 7.6 6.6
60 80 46.7 23 15.7 11.5 7.9 6.7
TA 110 DUV1000 Thermal O/L Relay
66 90 32 16.7 11.5 8.5 6.3 5.4
80 110 34.5 18.2 12.2 8.8 6.7 5.1
T 450 DUV1000 Thermal O/L Relay
130 185 14.9 8.9 7.1 5.6 4.5 4.2
165 235 18 10 7.1 5.5 4 3.8
220 310 16.8 10 7.1 5.7 4.7 4
285 400 17 10 7.5 5.5 4.3 4
T 900 DUV1000 Thermal O/L Relay
265 375 16 8.9 7 5.5 4.2 3.8
355 500 17 10.6 7.5 6 4.5 4
465 650 20 11.9 7.9 6 5 4.5
610 850 18.8 11.2 7.9 6 4.7 4.2
T 450 SU and T 900 SUV1000 Thermal O/L Relays
Individual tripping curve for each setting range, on request.
Index Section
Section
5/19
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay
Ordering Details
Electronic O/L relay Order code Setting Associated Pack
ing
Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A A A A pieces kg
E 16 DU - tripping class 10 - for B6(S), B7(S), BC 6, BC 7, A 9, A 12, A 16 contactors
E16 DU 0.32-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150
E16 DU 0.32-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150
E16 DU 0.32-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150
G Technical data and approvals ......................................................................................................................................... pages 5/20 - 5/22
E 16 DU
S
S
T
0
9
8
9
8
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/20
Technical Data
Type E 16 DU
Standards: IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
(international, european)
Certifications and approvals see page 5/22
i
V 690
imp
kV 6
Permissible ambient temperature
for storage C 40 +70
for operation C 25 +70 with temperature compensation
Climatic withstand acc. to IEC 68-2-1, IEC 68-2-2, IEC 86-2-14, IEC 68-2-30
Mounting positions free
multiples of g 15
Resistance to vibrations
(1 mm, 10100 Hz) multiples of g 5
Mounting Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
Terminals and cross-sectional areas
for main conductors (motor side)
and for auxiliary conductors
G screw terminal with cable clamp
screw size M 3.5
tightening torque Nm 1
rigid solid 2 x mm
2
0.75 4
2
0.75 4
Degree of protection All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to
VDE 0106/Part. 100
Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see page 5/19
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 10, 20 or 30
Rated operational frequencies Hz 50/60
Max. switching frequency 80 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor,
without untimely tripping starting current 6 x I
n
max. and starting time 1s max.
Resistance per phase in m
and heat dissipation in W see page 5/22
at the maximum current setting
Protection fuses
required for short-circuit protection see page 5/22
Index Section
Section
5/21
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5
Technical Data
Technical Characteristics of Auxiliary Contacts
Type E 16 DU
N.C. N.O.
95-96 97-98
e
V 500
th
A 6
e
on AC-15 230 V A 3
on AC-15 400 V A 1.1
on AC-15 500 V A 0.9
on AC-15 690 V A 0.7
on DC-13 24 V A 1.5
on DC-13 60 V A 0.5
on DC-13 110 V A 0.4
on DC-13 220 V A 0.2
Short-circuit protection gG(gl) fuses A 6
Tripping Curves, 3-phase applications
Tripping current
0,8 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
4
6
8
10
20
40
Class 30
120
100
80
60
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
2
4
6
8
10
20
40
1
Class 20
Class 10
3 phases
from cold state
S
S
T
2
3
5
9
8
G
B

Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
5/22
Technical Data
Resistance and Joule Losses per phase - Short-circuit Protection
Setting ranges Short-circuit protection Resistance Joule losses
Associated per phase per phase at max.
max. fuse current setting
aM gG(gl)
A A A A m W
0.1 0.32 1 970 0.1
0.3 1.0 4 113 0.11
0.9 2.7 10 14 0.1
2.0 6.3 20 2.4 0.1
5.7 18.9 50 0.8 0.29
Certifications and Approvals
Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies
PTB
UL CSA Ex "e"* GL LRS BV DNV
USA Canada Germany Germany Great Britain France Norway
I I I I I I I
I Standard design approved ; identification plates bear the approval mark if it is mandatory.
I Submitted to approval.
* Protection of explosion protected motors (EN 50019) class Ex "e" according to DIN VDE 0165/02.91.
Index Section
Section
6/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors
VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7
VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A
Compact Reversing Contactors
K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays
T7 DU Thermal O/L Relay
Contents
Ordering Details
B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors ...................................................................................... 6/2
VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7 and VB(C) 6A, VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors ..................... 6/3
BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors ............................................................................ 6/5
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs................................................................. 6/5
K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays .............................................................................................. 6/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays .................................................................................. 6/6
K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Output ........................................................................ 6/6
Accessories for Mini Contactors .......................................................................................... 6/7
TBC 7 Mini Contactors and TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays -
D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range .................................................................... 6/8
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors ................................................................. 6/17
Technical Data
B 6, BC 6 and B6 S Mini Contactors .................................................................................... 6/9
VB 6, VBC 6, VB 6A and VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors ..................................... 6/9
K 6, KC 6 and K6 S Mini Contactor Relays.......................................................................... 6/9
B 7, BC 7 and B7 S Mini Contactors .................................................................................. 6/10
VB 7, VBC 7, VB 7A and VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors ................................... 6/10
D.C. Power Circuit Switching ............................................................................................. 6/11
Lighting Circuit Switching ................................................................................................... 6/12
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay ................................................................................................ 6/18
Approvals ................................................................................................................... 6/13, 6/19
Terminal Marking and Positioning...................................................................................... 6/14
Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 6/15
Coil voltage codes:
B6, B7, BC6, BC7,
VB6(A), VB7(A), VBC6(A), VBC7(A),
K6 KC6
40-450Hz Order d.c. Order
code code
V (1) (2) I .. I V (1) I .. I
24 0 .. 1 12 0 .. 7
42 0 .. 2 24 0 .. 1
48 0 .. 3 42 0 .. 2
110 - 127 8 .. 4 48 1 .. 6
220 - 240 8 .. 0 60 0 .. 3
380 - 415 8 .. 5 110 - 125 0 .. 4
220 - 240 0 .. 5
(1) For other voltages, please consult us.
(2) Coil voltage range: 0.85 - 1.1 x Uc
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/2
B 7-40-00 with CAF6-11
auxiliary contact blocks to be
screwed in.
B 6 and BC 6 Mini Contactors
Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Pack
ing
Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code I . . I 240 V 440 V
see page 6/ 1 kW kW pieces kg
Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
B 6-30-10 GJL 121 1001 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
B 6-30-01 GJL 121 1001 R I 01 I 1 10 0.180
B 6-40-00 GJL 121 1201 R I 00 I 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
B 6-30-10-F GJL 121 1003 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
B 6-30-01-F GJL 121 1003 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
B 6-40-00-F GJL 121 1203 R I 00 I 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, I
th
< 8 A
B 6-30-10-P GJL 121 1009 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
B 6-30-01-P GJL 121 1009 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
BC 6-30-10 GJL 121 3001 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01 GJL 121 3001 R I 01 I 1 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
BC 6-30-10-F GJL 121 3003 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-F GJL 121 3003 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, I
th
< 8 A
BC 6-30-10-P GJL 121 3009 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P GJL 121 3009 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
B 7 and BC 7 Mini Contactors
B 7-30-10 GJL 131 1001 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B 7-30-01 GJL 131 1001 R I 01 I 1 10 0.180
B 7-40-00 GJL 131 1201 R I 00 I 10 0.180
B 7-30-10-F GJL 131 1003 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B 7-30-01-F GJL 131 1003 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
B 7-40-00-F GJL 131 1203 R I 00 I 10 0.170
th
< 8 A
B 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1009 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1009 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
BC 7-30-10 GJL 131 3001 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-01 GJL 131 3001 R I 01 I 1 10 0.180
BC 7-30-10-F GJL 131 3003 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F GJL 131 3003 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
th
< 8 A
BC 7-30-10-P GJL 131 3009 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P GJL 131 3009 R I 01 I 1 10 0.170
Ordering Details
S
S
T
1
5
8
9
S
S
T

1
5
9

9
1

R
B6 30-10
B 6-30-10-F
B 6-30-10-P
S
S
T

1
6
1

9
1

R
S
S
T
1
5
8
9
1
.
A
P
S
B 7-30-10
B 7-40-00
S
S
T

0
1
0

9
3

R
S
S
T

0
0
9

9
3

R
Index Section
Section
6/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
On switching, the coils of the 2
VB 6A and VB 7A contactors
must be de-energized for more
than 50 ms.
B
B
C

8
9

6
1
3
6
Description, VB 6, VB 7 and VB 6 A, VB 7 A Compact Reversing Contactors
Compact reversing contactors are available with two types of mechanical interlocking: VB 6 and VB 7 on the one hand or
VB 6A and VB 7A on the other.
The VB 6 and VB 7 type allows fast reversing to be carried out. However, the first contactor's opening process must be
completed before the second contactor receives the order to close. Electrical interlocking must be used for this.
In the VB 6A and VB 7A type there is safety locking to prevent short circuits which would cause an excessively fast reversing
order. As soon as this premature control signal is withdrawn, locking is automatically cancelled. De-energization of the coils
for a period of 50 ms ensures that safety locking is not activated.
Ordering Details, VB 6, VBC 6 Compact Reversing Contactors
ing
Weight
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg
VB 6-30-10 GJL 121 1901 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01 GJL 121 1901 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VB 6-30-10-F GJL 121 1903 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01-F GJL 121 1903 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VB 6-30-10-P GJL 121 1909 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01-P GJL 121 1909 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-10 GJL 121 3901 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-01 GJL 121 3901 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-10-F GJL 121 3903 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-01-F GJL 121 3903 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VBC 6-30-10-P GJL 121 3909 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-01-P GJL 121 3909 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
Ordering Details, VB 7, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors
VB 7-30-10 GJL 131 1901 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01 GJL 131 1901 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VB 7-30-10-F GJL 131 1903 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01-F GJL 131 1903 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VB 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1909 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1909 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-10 GJL 131 3901 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01 GJL 131 3901 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-10-F GJL 131 3903 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01-F GJL 131 3903 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VBC 7-30-10-P GJL 131 3909 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01-P GJL 131 3909 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
with Mechanical Interlock
VB 6-30-01
S
S
T

1
6
5

9
1

R
VB 7-30-01
S
S
T
1
6
5
9
1
/
1
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/4
S
S
T

2
7
8

9
2

R
Ordering Details, VB 6A, VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors
ing
Weight
voltage code I .. I 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg
VB 6A-30-10 GJL 121 1911 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01 GJL 121 1911 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-10-F GJL 121 1913 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01-F GJL 121 1913 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VB 6A-30-10-P GJL 121 1919 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01-P GJL 121 1919 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-10 GJL 121 3911 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01 GJL 121 3911 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-10-F GJL 121 3913 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01-F GJL 121 3913 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VBC 6A-30-10-P GJL 121 3919 R I 10 I 1 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01-P GJL 121 3919 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
Ordering Details, VB 7A, VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors
VB 7A-30-10 GJL 131 1911 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01 GJL 131 1911 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-10-F GJL 131 1913 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01-F GJL 131 1913 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VB 7A-30-10-P GJL 131 1919 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01-P GJL 131 1919 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-10 GJL 131 3911 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01 GJL 131 3911 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-10-F GJL 131 3913 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01-F GJL 131 3913 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
th
< 8 A
VBC 7A-30-10-P GJL 131 3919 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01-P GJL 131 3919 R I 01 I 1 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-10 reversing contactor
with BMS 6-30 power connections
with Mechanical Interlock
Index Section
Section
6/5
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
S
S
T

0
1
6

9
1

K
BC 6 and BC 7 without surge suppressor.
Oscillograms of control circuit
interruption (24 V d.c.)
A
B
B

8
9

0
8
4
4

R
BC 7-30-10- 1.4
B6 S and B7 S with built-in surge suppressor.
BC 6 Interface Mini Contactors Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
ing
Weight
aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
240 V 440 V
kW kW pieces kg
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 6-30-10-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8101 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8011 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 6-30-10-F-1.4 GJL 121 3003 R 8101 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-F-1.4 GJL 121 3003 R 8011 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W, I
th
< 8 A
BC 6-30-10-P-1.4 GJL 121 3009 R 8101 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P-1.4 GJL 121 3009 R 8011 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 6-30-10-2.4 GJL 121 3001 R 5101 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01-2.4 GJL 121 3001 R 5011 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 6-30-10-F-2.4 GJL 121 3003 R 5101 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-F-2.4 GJL 121 3003 R 5011 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W, I
th
< 8 A
BC 6-30-10-P-2.4 GJL 121 3009 R 5101 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P-2.4 GJL 121 3009 R 5011 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 7-30-10-1.4 GJL 131 3001 R 8101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-01-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 7-30-10-F-1.4 GJL 131 3003 R 8101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F-1.4 GJL 131 3003 R 8011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W, I
th
< 8 A
BC 7-30-10-P-1.4 GJL 131 3009 R 8101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P-1.4 GJL 131 3009 R 8011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-10-2.4 GJL 131 3001 R 5101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-01-2.4 GJL 131 3001 R 5011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-10-F-2.4 GJL 131 3003 R 5101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F-2.4 GJL 131 3003 R 5011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W, I
th
< 8 A
BC 7-30-10-P-2.4 GJL 131 3009 R 5101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P-2.4 GJL 131 3009 R 5011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
connection with polarizing slot; T7DU thermal O/L relay can be added (see page 6/17).
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
B6 S-30-10-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7101 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B6 S-30-01-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7011 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B6 S-30-10-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7102 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B6 S-30-01-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7012 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B7 S-30-10-1.7 GJL 131 3001 R 7101 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B7 S-30-01-1.7 GJL 131 3001 R 7011 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V / 2.8 W
B7 S-30-10-2.8 GJL 131 3001 R 7102 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B7 S-30-01-2.8 GJL 131 3001 R 7012 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs
Ordering Details
-1000 V
0
24 V
0 280 s
0
24 V
0
Interruption
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/6
S
S
T

0
1
6

9
1

K
K6 S with built-in surge suppressor.
K 6-40 E-P
KC 6 without surge suppressor.
Oscillograms of control circuit
interruption (24 V d.c.)
K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
Type Order code Mounted AC-15 Pack
ing
Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
see page 6/1 A A A pieces kg
K 6-40 E GJH 121 1001 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
K 6-31 Z GJH 121 1001 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K 6-22 Z GJH 121 1001 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
K 6-40 E- F GJH 121 1003 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-31 Z- F GJH 121 1003 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-22 Z- F GJH 121 1003 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
K 6-40 E- P GJH 121 1009 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-31 Z- P GJH 121 1009 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-22 Z- P GJH 121 1009 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-40 E GJH 121 3001 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z GJH 121 3001 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-22 Z GJH 121 3001 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-40 E- F GJH 121 3003 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z- F GJH 121 3003 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-22 Z- F GJH 121 3003 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
KC 6-40 E- P GJH 121 3009 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z- P GJH 121 3009 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-22 Z- P GJH 121 3009 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-Interface Mini Contactor Relays Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
ing
Weight
aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
240 V 440 V
A A A pieces kg
KC 6-40 E-1.4 GJH 121 3001 R8401 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z-1.4 GJH 121 3001 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.4 W
KC 6-40 E-F-1.4 GJH 121 3003 R8401 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-F-1.4 GJH 121 3003 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.4 W
KC 6-40 E-P-1.4 GJH 121 3009 R8401 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-P-1.4 GJH 121 3009 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-40 E-2.4 GJH 121 3001 R5401 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z-2.4 GJH 121 3001 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-40 E-F-2.4 GJH 121 3003 R5401 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-F-2.4 GJH 121 3003 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V / 2.4 W
KC 6-40 E-P-2.4 GJH 121 3009 R5401 4 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-P-2.4 GJH 121 3009 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
K6 S Mini Contactor Relays with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
connection with polarizing slot.
K6 S-40 E-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7401 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-22 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7221 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-40 E-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7402 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7312 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-22 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7222 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
S
S
T

1
6
6

9
1

R
KC 6-Interface
K 6, KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays and K6 S for PLC's
Ordering Details
-1000 V
0
24 V
0 280 s
0
24 V
0
Interruption
Index Section
Section
6/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
S
S
T

1
6
3

9
1

R
S
S
T

1
8
6

9
1

R
LT 6-B Protective cover
BSM 6-30
Connecting strip
CA 6-11K
CA 6-11E-F
CA 6-11M-P
Accessories
for Mini Contactors
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted For mounting on Pack
ing
Weight
aux. cont. in
pieces kg
Side-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.
Screw terminals
CA 6-11K GJL 120 1317 R 0001 1 1 K6- and KC6- 10 0.030
CA 6-11E GJL 120 1317 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00; BC6(7)-40-00 10 0.030
CA 6-11M GJL 120 1317 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10; BC6(7)-30-10 10 0.030
CA 6-11N GJL 120 1317 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01; BC6(7)-30-01 10 0.030
Flat pin terminals
CA 6-11K-F GJL 120 1318 R 0001 1 1 K6-F ; KC6-F 10 0.030
CA 6-11E-F GJL 120 1318 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00-F; BC6(7)-40-00-F 10 0.030
CA 6-11M-F GJL 120 1318 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10-F; BC6(7)-30-10-F 10 0.030
CA 6-11N-F GJL 120 1318 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01-F; BC6(7)-30-01-F 10 0.030
Soldering pins
CA 6-11K-P GJL 120 1319 R 0001 1 1 K6-P ; KC6-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11E-P GJL 120 1319 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00-P -; BC6(7)-40-00-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11M-P GJL 120 1319 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10-P -; BC6(7)-30-10-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11N-P GJL 120 1319 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01-P -; BC6(7)-30-01-P 10 0.030
Front-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.
Screw terminals
CAF 6- 11K GJL 120 1330 R 0001 1 1 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20K GJL 120 1330 R 0005 2 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02K GJL 120 1330 R 0009 2 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11E GJL 120 1330 R 0002 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20E GJL 120 1330 R 0006 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02E GJL 120 1330 R 0010 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11M GJL 120 1330 R 0003 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20M GJL 120 1330 R 0007 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02M GJL 120 1330 R 0011 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11N GJL 120 1330 R 0004 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20N GJL 120 1330 R 0008 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02N GJL 120 1330 R 0012 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)(A) 10 0.035
Base with soldering pins, I
th
< 8 A
LB 6 GJL 120 1902 R 0001 - for B, BC, K and KC mini contactors 10 0.014
LB 6-CA GJL 120 1903 R 0001 for 2-pole aux. contacts 10 0.006
Plunger
BN 6 GJL 120 1904 R 0001 - for manual operation 50 0.060
Function marker
BA 5-50 1SBN 11 0000R 1000 - 50 clip-on label holders 1 box 0.017
Effective surface 7 x 19 mm
For writing details in ball-point pen,
indelible felt-tip or pentel white
Surge suppressor units (varistor-type for d.c. operation)
Note: for a.c. operated mini contactors this accessory is built-in.
RV-BC6/60 GHV 250 1902 R 0002 - 2460 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
RV-BC6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R 0003 - 2460 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
Protective cover (transparent, washable, IP 20 protection category)
LT 6-B GJL 120 1906 R 0001 - for B, BC, K and KC 6 contactors 10 0.001
with screw terminals
Connecting strip for reversing contactor
BSM 6-30 GJL 120 1908 R 0001 - for VB- VBC- compact reversing 10 0.010
contactors with screw terminal
and 1.8 mm
2
cross-sectional area
Parallel connecting strip for poles
LP 6 GJL 120 1907 R 0001 - for B and BC contactors 100 0.001
with screw terminals.
1 mm thick.
S
S
T

1
4
7

9
0

R
S
S
T

2
7
7

9
2

R
S
S
T

0
1
1

9
3

R
CAF 6- 11M
RV-BC 6/-
Varistor-type
surge suppressor
S
S
T

1
6
4

9
1

R
S
S
T

1
6
2

9
1

R
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/8
Application
TBC 7 mini contactors and TKC 6 mini contactor relays with large coil voltage range are designed to operate
in control circuits characterised by large voltage variations.
Example: storage batteries.
Ordering Details
TBC 7 Mini Contactors
ing
Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
voltage code: I . . I 240 V 440 V
See table opposite kW kW kW pieces kg
Screw connection
TBC 7- 30-10 GJL 131 3061 R I 10 I 1 3.0 5.5 4 10 0.180
TBC 7- 30-01 GJL 131 3061 R I 01 I 1 3.0 5.5 4 10 0.180
TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
ing
Weight
voltage code: I . . I 240 V 440 V 500 V
See table opposite kW kW kW pieces kg
Screw connection
TKC 6-22 Z GJH 121 3061 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6-31 Z GJH 121 3061 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6- 40 E GJH 121 3061 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
Flat pin connection
TKC 6-22 Z-F GJH 121 3063 R I 22 I 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6-31 Z-F GJH 121 3063 R I 31 I 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6- 40 E-F GJH 121 3063 R I 40 I 4 4 3 2 10 0.180
Coil characteristics
No extra tolerances applicable to the U
c
min. - max. values quoted in the table above (top left).
c
max. = 20 C: 5 W pull-in/holding.
Definite drop-out: < 0.2 U
c
Definite pull-in: U
c
min.
Technical Data
Identical to the data for BC 7 and KC 6 standard mini contactors (see following pages), except:
Permissible surrounding temperatures:
with own heating C 30 to +55
without own heating C 30 to +70
storage temperature C 40 to +85
Addition of Accessories
CA 6 or CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be added.
Voltage Vd.c. Code
min. U
c
max. R I . . I
17 ........ 32 I I
50 ........ 90 I I
77 ...... 143 I I
140 ...... 260 I I
5 1
5 5
TBC 7 Mini Contactors
TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range
6 2
6 8
!
!
Index Section
Section
6/9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
General Technical Data according to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1
i
V 690
fitted with a thermal O/L relay C 25 to + 50
without thermal O/L relay C 25 to + 55
for storage C 40 to + 80
Climatic withstand acc. to DIN 50 017 humidity in alternate climate
acc. to UTE C 63-100 30 cycles, specification 1
Mounting positions all positions
Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
Max. switching frequency
AC-1 cycles/h 300
DC-1, DC-3, DC-5, AC-2, AC-3, AC-15, DC-13 cycles/h 600
e
V a.c. 12 - 500
e
/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/I
e
(A) AC-2, AC-3
Rated operational power at: 55 C 40 C I
e
(A) P (kW)
220-240 V 16 20 9 2.2
380-440 V 16 20 9/8 4.0
500 V 12 12 5.5 3.0
Shock withstand see table page 6/10
Operating time B6 BC6 K6 KC6
Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing/N.C. contact opening ms 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26
- N.O. contact opening/N.C. contact closing ms 16 - 40 4 - 10 16 - 40 4 - 10
Heat dissipation per pole 2 W at 20 A
gG (gl) type fuses, type 1 and type 2 co-ordination 20 A
Technical Data of built-in or add-on auxiliary contacts of K 6, KC 6, K6 S, CA 6, CAF 6
e
V d.c. 12 - 240
V a.c. 12 - 500
th
A 6
Short-circuit protection, type fuses gG (gl) A 10
e
/ AC-15
220-240 V A 4
380-440 V A 3
500 V A 2
e
/ DC-13
24 V A 1.5
60 V A 0.5
110 V A 0.4
220-240 V A 0.04
Min. switching capacity of auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
Technical Data of magnet system
Standard contactors pull-in/holding
B 6/K 6, VB 6 a.c. VA 3.5
BC 6/KC 6, VBC 6 d.c. W 3.5
Interface contactors
BC 6/KC 6-1.4 d.c. 24 V W 1.4
BC 6/KC 6-2.4 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 2.4
Mini contactors for PLC outputs cold state warm state
I (mA) P (W) I (mA) P (W)
B 6 S-1.7, KS 6-1.7 d.c. 24 V W 77 1.75 60 1.35
B 6 S-2.8, K6 S-2.8 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 125 2.80 94 2.10
Coil operating limits 0.85 - 1.1x U
c
AC-1/AC-3 Utilization Categories
Electrical durability curves
B 6, BC 6, B6 S
AC-15 Utilization category
Electrical durability curve
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6
B(C) 6 and B6 S Mini Contactors
VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 6A Compact Reversing Contactors
K(C) 6 and K6 S Mini Contactor Relays
10 1 30 20 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8
Breaking current I
c
(A)
15
S
S
T

0
4
6

9
1

K
/
G
B
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
0.01
0.1
1
2
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
3
4
5
6
8
10
AC-4
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
The breaking current I
c
is equal
to 6 x I
e
motor rated operational current.
10 1 30 20 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8
Rated operational current Ie (A)
15
S
S
T

0
1
0

9
1

K
1

+

2

M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
0.01
0.1
1
2
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
3
4
5
6
8
10
AC-3 AC-1
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 0.02
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
S
S
T

2
5
1

9
3

K
1

+

2
AC-15
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/10
General Technical Data according to IEC 947-4-1
i
V 500
- fitted with thermal O/L relay C - 25 to + 50
- without thermal O/L relay C - 25 to + 55
- for storage C - 40 to + 80
Climatic withstand acc. to DIN 50 017 humidity in alternate climate KFW,
acc. to UTE C 63-100 30 cycles, specification 1
Mounting positions all positions
Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
Max. electrical switching frequency
AC-1 cycles/h 300
DC-1, DC-3, DC-5, AC-2, AC-3, AC-15, DC-13 cycles/h 600
e
V a.c. 12 - 500
e
/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/I
e
(A) AC-2, AC-3
Rated operational power at: 55 C 40 C I
e
(A) P (kW)
220-240 V 16 20 12/11 3
380-440 V 16 20 12/11 5.5
500 V 12 12 7 4
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 10 ms:
standard mounting position: position 1 no change in contact position
shock directions A B1 B2 C1 C2
making position 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
breaking position 10 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
Operating time B7 BC7
Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing/N.C. contact opening ms 14 - 26 14 - 26
- N.O. contact opening/N.C. contact closing ms 16 - 14 4 - 10
Heat dissipation per pole 2 W at 20 A
for contactors without add-on thermal O/L relay
Type fuses gG (gl) - Co-ordination: type 1 25 A
type 2 20 A
Technical Data of built-in auxiliary contacts
Min. switching capacity of
auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
Technical Data of magnet system
Standard contactors pull-in/holding
B 7 / VB 7 a.c. VA 3.5
BC 7 / VBC 7 d.c. W 3.5
Interface contactors
BC 7-1.4 d.c. 24 V W 1.4
BC 7-2.4 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 2.4
Mini contactors for PLC output cold state warm state
I (mA) P (W) I (mA) P (W)
B 7 S-1.7 d.c. 24 V 77 175 60 1.35
B 7 S-2.8 d.c. 17 - 32 V 125 2.80 94 2.10
Coil operating limits 0.85 - 1.1x U
c
B(C) 7 and B7 S Mini Contactors
VB(C) 7 and VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors
A

3
9
4
A1
14NO 6T3 4T2 2T1
1L1 3L2 5L3 13NO
0
A2
B2
A
C1
B1
A
C2
10 1 30 20 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8
Rated operational current Ie (A)
15
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
3
4
5
6
8
10
2
1
0.1
0.01
AC-3 AC-1
S
S
T

2
0
9

9
3

K
/
G
B
10 1 30 20 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8
15
S
S
T

2
0
8

9
3

K
/
G
B
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
0.01
0,1
1
2
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
3
4
5
6
8
10
AC-4
Electrical durability curve
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6
AC-1/AC-3 Utilization Categories
Electrical durability curves
B 7, BC 7, B7 S
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
The breaking current I
c
is equal
to 6 x I
e
motor rated operational current.
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 0.02
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
S
S
T

2
5
1

9
3

K
1

+

2
AC-15
Index Section
Section
6/11
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
8
9

6
1
5
1
/
1

+

2
Breaking power (W)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
D.C. Power Circuit Switching
Utilization category DC-1 DC-3 DC-5
L/R 1 ms L/ R 2 ms L/ R 7.5 ms
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
48 V A 16.0 8.0 2.0
60 V A 16.0 4.0 1.25
110 V A 7.0 1.5 0.4
220 V A 0.8 0.25 0.2
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
48 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
60 V A 16.0 15.0 12.0
110 V A 16.0 7.0 2.0
220 V A 5.0 1.5 0.5
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
48 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
60 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
110 V A 16.0 15.0 8.0
220 V A 14.0 4.0 2.0
Electrical Durability Curves for DC-1, DC-3 and DC-5
The curves below take into account the time constant L/R for each utilization category and show the electrical durability of the contactors during
DC-1, DC-3 and DC-5 use for 3 poles connected in series.
If one single pole is used, the corresponding breaking capacity (W) is reduced to 1/3 and for 2 poles connected in series it is reduced to 2/3.
A = DC-1 3 poles in series
B = DC-3 3 poles in series
C = DC-5 3 poles in series
VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7 Compact Reversing Contactors
+
+
+
A

8
3
1

D
A

8
3
0

D
A

8
2
9

D
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/12
The table below shows the number of lamps per phase in 230 V/50 Hz for the main poles (terminals marked 1 to 8):
Note that overshooting of the announced capacitive loads may generate on energisation unacceptable current peaks.
Other factors may influence peak amplitude on energisation.
G Lengths and cross-sections of installation conductors
G Electronic arcing devices
G Lamp manufacture
For these reasons, the values in the following tables are given for information only.
Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive
per phase load
(230 V, 50 Hz) in F
I
n
for contactors:
Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7
Incandescent 60 0.26 20
lamps 100 0.43 12
200 0.87 6
300 1.30 4
500 2.17 2
1000 4.35 1
Fluorescent without compensation and series compensation
lamps 15 0.35 25
20 0.37 23
40 0.43 20
58 0.67 16
65 0.67 12
115 1.5 5
140 1.5 5
2-lamp circuit
2 x 20 2 x 0.13 2 x 26
2 x 40 2 x 0.22 2 x 20
2 x 58 2 x 0.32 2 x 16
2 x 65 2 x 0.34 2 x 12
2 x 115 2 x 0.65 2 x 5
2 x 140 2 x 0.75 2 x 5
parallel compensation
15 0.11 7 4.5
20 0.13 6 4.5
40 0.22 7 4.5
58 0.32 5 7
65 0.34 4 7
115 0.65 1 18
140 0.75 1 18
High pressure without compensation
mercury 50 0.61 10
vapour 80 0.8 7
lamps 125 1.15 5
e.g. HQL, HPL 250 2.15 3
400 3.25 2
700 5.40 1
50 0.28 4 7
80 0.41 3 8
125 0.65 2 10
250 1.22 1 18
400 1.95 1 25
700 3.45 45
1000 4.8 60
Lamps with 1 x 18 17
electronic 2 x 18 8
ignition 1 x 36 11
device 2 x 36 6
1 x 56 11
2 x 58 6
{
Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive
per phase load
(230 V, 50 Hz) in F
I
n
for contactors:
Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7
Metal without compensation
iodide 35 0.53 10
lamps 70 1 5
e.g. HQI, HPI 150 1.8 3
250 3 2
400 3.5 1
35 0.25 6 6
70 0.45 3 12
150 0.75 1 20
250 1.5 1 33
400 2.5 1 35
Low pressure without compensation
sodium lamps 35 1.5 4
55 1.5 4
90 2.4 2
135 3.5 2
150 3.3 2
180 3.3 2
200 2.3 2
35 0.31 20
55 0.42 20
90 0.63 30
135 0.94 45
150 1.0 40
180 1.16 40
200 1.32 25
High pressure without compensation
sodium lamps 150 1.8 3
250 3.0 2
330 3.7 2
400 4.7 1
150 0.83 20
250 1.5 33
330 2.0 40
400 2.4 48
1000 6.3 106
Transformers Transformer Number of transformers
for low voltage power per phase
halogen (230 V, 50 Hz)
lamps for contactors:
Watt B6, B7, BC6, BC7
20 40
50 20
75 13
100 10
150 7
200 5
300 3
VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7 Compact Reversing Contactors
Dual
Mounting
Index Section
Section
6/13
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
The devices listed below have been certified or are in the process of being accepted in the countries listed or
from organizations who award approvals. For some countries, special versions of devices are available. The
use of certified devices does not exonerate the supplier of control boxes or electrical equipment from building
the entire installation in compliance with the legal specifications applicable in the country.
Marks
EL
Abbreviations SEV DEMKO NEMKO SEMKO Inspect. CSA GL
Approvals Switzerland Denmark Norway Sweden Finland Canada USA Germany
Mini Contactors
B6../ B7.. I I I I I I I I
B6/B7..-F I I I I I I I I I
B6/B7..-P I I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC 7.. I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC 7..-F I I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-P I I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-1.4 I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-F-1.4 I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-P-1.4 I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-2.4 I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-F-2.4 I I I I I I I I
BC6/BC7..-P-2.4 I I I I I I I I
B 6 S/B7 S I I I
VB6/VB7.. I I I I I I I I I
VBC 6/VBC7 I I
K6.. I I I I I I I
K6..-F I I I I I I
K6..-P I I I I I I
KC6.. I I I I I I I
KC6..-F I I I I I I
KC6..-P I I I I I I
KC6..-1.4 I I I I I I I I
KC6..-F-1.4 I I I I I
KC6..-P-1.4 I I I I I I
KC6..-2.4 I I I I I I I
KC6..-F-2.4 I I I I I I
KC6..-P-2.4 I I I I I I
Accessories
CA6-11.. I I I I I I I I
CA F6 I
LB6 I I I
LB6-CA
I Certified standard version; the device label must bear the approval mark, if it is mandatory.
I Being certified, ask on delivery.
For B7 mini contactors, besides NEMKO, all approvals have been acquired.
KC 6- 31 Z
9
1

A

0
4
3
9
1

A

0
5
0
B 6-30-10
Motor power values (Motor-rating) and rated current values (Amp-rating) in
compliance with CSA and UL for B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 contactors and K(C) 6
contactor relays.
CSA and UL approvals for contactors concern both the motor-rating and the amp-
rating that is generally used.
The values approved for contactors and contactor relays are given below.
The reference values are given on the device and listed in the table below.
Amp-rating: 12 A-300 V, a.c. for B(C) 6 contactor main contacts Amp-rating: 12 A-600 V, a.c. for B(C) 7 contactor main contacts
Pilot duty: A600 5 A-600 V a.c. for auxiliary contacts built into B(C)6, K(C)6 and B(C)7 contactors as well as for CA6 auxiliary contact blocks.
Values for 200 - 208V = (220 - 240V) x 1.15
Motor-rating for B( C)7 contactors:
Nominal voltage U
e
~ (V) 110/120 V 220/240 V 440/480 V 540/600 V
3-phase motor P (hp) 1 3 5 5
I
e
(A) 7.2 9.6 7.6 6.1
1-phase motor P (hp) 1/2 1.5 2 2
I
e
(A) 9.8 10 6 4.8
Motor-rating for B( C) 6 contactors:
Nominal voltage U
e
~ (V) 110/ 120 V 220/240 V 440/480 V 540/600 V
3-phase motor P (hp) 1 2 1 1
I
e
(A) 7.2 6.8 1.8 1.4
1-phase motor P (hp) 1/3 3/4
I
e
(A) 7.2 6.9
Mini Contactors, Mini Contactor Relays
Accessories
Approvals
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/14
Mini Contactors B 6(7)-40-00 - B 6(7)-30-10 - B 6(7)-30-01 -
BC 6(7)-40-00 - BC 6(7)-30-10 - BC 6(7)-30-01 -
Compact Reversing Contactors VB 6(7)-30-10 - VB 6(7)-30-01 -
VBC 6(7)-30-10 - VBC 6(7)-30-01 -
Mini Contactor Relays K 6-40 E - K 6-31 Z - K 6-22 Z -
KC 6-40 E - KC 6-31 Z - KC 6-22 Z -
CA 6/CAF 6 Auxiliary Contact Blocks
Their addition enables the number of auxiliary contacts for B 6, B 7, BC 6, BC 7, K 6 and KC 6 mini contactors to be increased.
Only one of the two types of auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted on a given contactor. The auxiliary contact blocks must not be
mounted on interface contactors, interface contactor relays, contactors connected to PLC's and compact reversing contactors assembled
with contactors of this type.
It is possible to mount two CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks on the front face of VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7, VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A standard compact
reversing contactors.
1 3 5 7 A1
2 4 6 8 A2
1 3 5 13 A1
2 4 6 14 A2
1 3 5 21 A1
2 4 6 22 A2
A1 13 1 3 5
A2 14 2 4 6
1 3 5 13 A1
2 4 6 14 A2
1 3 5 21 A1
2 4 6 22 A2
A1 21 1 3 5
A2 22 2 4 6
13 23 33 43 A1
14 24 34 44 A2
13 33 43 21 A1
14 34 44 22 A2
13 43 21 31 A1
14 44 22 32 A2
A

3
6
4

D
A

3
6
5

D
A

3
6
6

D
53
61
54
62
40 E
31 Z
22 Z
1 3 5 21
2 4 6 22
13
31
14
32
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
33
21
34
22
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
13
21
14
22
1 2 3
Auxiliary contact blocks Types of Types of Auxiliary contact blocks
for side mounting contactors contactors to be screwed on to the front face
Cannot be mounted on compact reversing contactors (see photo page 6/2)
CA 6-11E B(C) 6(7)-40-00 B(C) 6-40-00 1 = CAF 6-11E
CA 6-11E-F B(C) 6(7)-40-00-F B(C) 7-40-00 2 = CAF 6-20E
CA 6-11E-P B(C) 6(7)-40-00-P 3 = CAF 6-02E
CA 6-11M B(C) 6(7)-30-10 B(C) 6-30-10 1 = CAF 6-11M
CA 6-11M-F B(C) 6(7)-30-10-F B(C) 7-30-10 2 = CAF 6-20M
CA 6-11M-P B(C) 6(7)-30-10-P 3 = CAF 6-02M
CA 6-11N B(C) 6(7)-30-01 B(C) 6-30-01 1 = CAF 6-11N
CA 6-11N-F B(C) 6(7)-30-01-F B(C) 7-30-01 2 = CAF 6-20N
CA 6-11N-P B(C) 6(7)-30-01-P 3 = CAF 6-02N
CA 6-11K K(C) 6 ..... K(C) 6 ..... 1 = CAF 6-11K
CA 6-11K-F K(C) 6 ..... F 2 = CAF 6-20K
CA 6-11K-P K(C) 6 ..... P 3 = CAF 6-02K
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
13
21
14
22
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
33
21
34
22
1 3 5 21
2 4 6 22
13
31
14
32
53
61
54
62
40 E
31 Z
22 Z
A

3
6
8

D
A

3
6
9

D
A

3
7
0

D
A

3
7
1

D
CAF 6
CAF 6
CAF 6
A

3
7
1

D
A

3
7
0

D
A

3
6
9

D
A

3
6
8

D
S
S
T

2
3
9
.
.
.
2
5
0

9
3

S
Mini Contactors
13 21
14 22
13 23
14 24
11 21
12 22
33 21
34 22
23 33
24 34
21 31
22 32
13 31
14 32
13 33
14 34
11 31
12 32
53 61
54 62
53 63
54 64
51 61
52 62
Index Section
Section
6/15
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
Drilling diagrams
For M4 fixing screws For printed circuit
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
3
B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Standard Standard device Compact reversing
K 6-, KC 6- VB 6A(7A), VBC 6A(7A) 4-pole with auxiliary contactor
device contact block
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
6
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
4
-
2
B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6- B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-
screw connection flat pin connection
VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor
screw connection flat pin connection
B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-, B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-
soldering pin connection with CA6 auxiliary contact blocks
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
4
-
1
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
1
46.5
43.5
33.5
4.5
5
7
.
5
4
2
2
5
.
4
68
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
3
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
2
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
2
-
1
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
8
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
4
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
2
-
2
4
4
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
7
B
B
C

8
7

6
1
0
0
and Accessories
Dimensions (in mm)
Index Sommaire Chapitre Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/16
B 6 (7) - F with LB 6
B 6(7) with T 7 DU
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
5
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
7
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
9
CA 6- P, soldering pin connection
CAF 6, screw connection B(C) 6, B(C) 7, K(C) 6 with CAF 6 front-mounted auxiliary contact block
CA 6- F, flat pin connection CA 6 with LB 6- CA
S
S
T
2
0
3
9
8
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
6
CA 6, screw connection
B
B
C

8
7

6
6
4
8
4
4
S
S
T

2
1
0

9
4

M
S
S
T

2
1
1

9
4

M
and Accessories
Dimensions (in mm)
4,5 4,5
9,1 9,1 9,1 9,1
4 32
45
6,5
56
1
0
5
46,5
47,5
2
5
,
4
5
0
4
7 4
2
35 ... 45
50
5
4.0 min.
ON/OFF indicator
35 mm
EN 50022
Index Section
Section
6/17
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
A
3
1
0
push
pull
NO 97
NO 98
NC 95
NC 96
Ordering details
Type Order Code Setting Range Max. fuse Pack
ing
Weight
aM gG(gl)
A ... A A A piece kg
T 7 DU Thermal Overload Relays
for B 6, BC 6, B 6S, VB 6, VBC 6, B 7, BC 7, B 7S, VB 7, VBC 7 mini contactors.
T 7 DU 0.16 1SAZ 111 301 R 0001 0.1 ... 0.16 0.5 1 0.070
T 7 DU 0.24 1SAZ 111 301 R 0002 0.16 ... 0.24 1 1 0.070
T7 DU 0.4 1SAZ 111 301 R 0003 0.24 ... 0.4 2 1 0.070
T 7 DU 0.6 1SAZ 111 301 R 0004 0.4 ... 0.6 2 1 0.070
T 7 DU 1.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0005 0.6 ... 1.0 4 1 0.070
T 7 DU 1.6 1SAZ 111 301 R 0006 1.0 ... 1.6 6 1 0.070
T 7 DU 2.4 1SAZ 111 301 R 0007 1.6 ... 2.4 6 1 0.070
T 7 DU 4.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0008 2.4 ... 4.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU 6.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0009 4.0 ... 6.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU 9.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0010 6.0 ... 9.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU12.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0011 9.0 ... 12.0 20 1 0.070
Tripping curves
Setting
1 Button for setting on motor nominal current
2 Reset
Position A: automatic reset
Position H: manual reset
3 Test: Neutral position : Running free
Push position : Stop action
i.e. N.C. contact (95-96) operated
Pull position : Tripping
i.e. both N.O. and N.C. contacts operated
S
S
T

2
0
9

9
8
S
S
T

0
0
2

9
8
T 7 DU + B 7-30-01
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors
T 7 DU
S
S
T

0
0
1

9
8
0.8 1
Tripping current
1
1
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
10
10
20
20
40
40
60
80
100
120
1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910

S
e
c
o
n
d
s
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
from cold state
2 phase
3 phase
S
S
T
2
0
1
9
8
G
Neutral
position
1
3
2
S
S
T

2
0
6

9
8
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/18
Technical Data
Type T 7 DU
Standards (international, european) IEC 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1
Approvals and certifications UL, CSA, PTB
i
V 690
imp
kV 6
Air temperature close to thermal O/L relay
for storage C 40 to +70
during operation (temperature compensation) C 25 to +50 (open-air)
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-3, IEC 68-2-30 -
Mounting position 30 from standard vertical mounting position
not horizontally, not upside down
(5 mm side by side mounting distance)
Critical direction
of shocks A1, A2 multiples of g 10
Mounting Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
Terminals and cross-sectional areas
for main conductors (motor side)
G screw terminal with cable clamps M 3.5
rigid solid 2 x mm
2
0.75...2.5
2
0.5...1.5
Terminals and cross-sectional area for auxiliary conductors
G screw terminal with cable clamp M 3.5
rigid solid 2 x mm
2
0.75...2.5
2
0.5...1.5
Degree of protection according to IEC 947-1/EN 60 947-1 All the terminals are protected against
direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part 100
Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see page 6/17
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1/EN 60 947-4-1 10 A
Rated operational frequencies Hz 0 ... 400
Max. switching frequency up to 15 starts/h or 60 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor when neither
without untimely tripping the starting current of 6 x I
n

nor the starting time 1 s are exceeded.
Resistance per phase in
and heat dissipation per phase in W see page 6/19
at maximum setting current
Protection fuses required for short-circuit protection see page 6/19
Auxiliary contacts Technical Characteritics
Auxiliary contacts "normally closed N.C." "normally open N.O."
Terminal marking 95-96 97-98
e
V 500 500
th
A 6 6
e
for AC-15 220 to 240 V A 1.5 1.5
for AC-15 380 to 415 V A 0.7 0.5
for AC-15 to 500 V A 0.5 0.3
for DC-15 220 V A 0.2 0.2
Short-circuit protection: gG(gl) type fuse A 4 4
9
1

A

3
7
3
A2
A1
Index Section
Section
6/19
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6
Approvals and Certifications
Approvals Certifications of
ship classification
societies
UL CSA EZU PTB GL LRS
USA Canada Czech Germany Germany Great
Republic Britain
I I I I I I
I Approved through normal procedure, the company labels
bear the certification mark when it is mandatory.
I Being approved, availability date on request.
Setting range Short-circuit protection Fuses Resistance Joule losses
Co-ordination type 2 Co-ordination type 1 per phase per phase
at upper
gG (gl) gG (gl) current setting
A ... A A A W
0.1 ... 0.16 0.5 20 62.3 1.6
0.16 ... 0.24 1 20 27 1.6
0.24 ... 0.4 2 20 11.7 1.9
0.4 ... 0.6 2 20 4.61 1.7
0.6 ... 1.0 4 20 1.66 1.7
1.0 ... 1.6 6 20 0.63 1.6
1.6 ... 2.4 6 20 0.27 1.6
2.4 ... 4.0 10 20 0.107 1.7
4.0 ... 6.0 10 20 0.049 1.8
6.0 ... 9.0 10 20 0.021 1.7
9.0 ... 12.0 20 20 0.010 1.4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
6/20
Notes
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
7/1
Contents
Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations ......................................................... 7/2
Certifications and Approvals ................................................................................................... 7/4
CSA and UL Approvals ........................................................................................................... 7/6
Terms and Technical Definitions ............................................................................................. 7/8
Standards and Utilization Categories .................................................................................... 7/10
Degrees of Protection ........................................................................................................... 7/12
Climatic Withstand of Devices .............................................................................................. 7/13
Connections .......................................................................................................................... 7/14
Tightening Torques for Contactors, Contactor Relays and Accessories .............................. 7/16
Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protection Devices .............................................................. 7/17
7
Standards, Approvals
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
Low Voltage Products 7/2
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations
Definitions
ABB low voltage devices are developed and manufactured according to the rules set out in IEC international publications, in EN European
specifications and in national standards such as UTE, VDE and BS.
In most countries, low voltage apparatus is built according to such rules with checking being the responsibility of the manufacturer. The devices
are therefore not subject to any further obligation for approval. However, for devices designed for domestic use or for the general public, a test report
from our laboratories can be remitted to our customers, on request, for presentation to different qualified local organizations.
In other countries, certifications are required by law.
For devices installed on board ships, maritime insurance companies require the devices to be approved by independent certification organisations
such as BV, GL and LRS.
Certification and approval requirements are described on pages 7/4 and 7/5.
Specifications
G International Specifications
The International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC, which is part of the International Standards Organization, ISO, publishes IEC publications
which act as a basis for the world market.
G European Specifications and National Specifications
The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC), which groups together 18 European countries, publishes EN
standards. These European standards differ very little from IEC international standards and have similar numbering.
The same applies for national standards which use, without exception, the same numbering and reproduce the texts of these unified standards in
their entirety. Contradicting national standards are withdrawn.
G European Directives
The guarantee of the free movement of goods within the European Community means that any regulatory differences between member states have
been eliminated. The European directives set up common rules that are included in the legislation of each state while contradictory regulations are
cancelled.
Three directives are essential:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC concerns electrical equipment from 50 to 1000 V a.c. and from 75 to 1500 V d.c.
This specifies that compliance with the requirements that it sets out is acquired once the equipment conforms with the standards harmonized on
a European level: EN 60 947-1 and EN 60 947-4-1 for contactors.
Machines Directive 89/392/EEC for safety specifications of machines and equipment on complete machines. Machines bearing the CE mark
comply with these specifications.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC which concerns all devices able to create electromagnetic disturbance. Amendment A11
to standard EN 60 947-4-1 does not set out any requirement concerning the level of emission or immunity of contactors which do not have any
active electronic components. Owing to this fact, compliance with standard EN 60 947-4-1 meets the requirements for CE marking, with respect
to this directive.
CE Marking:
CE marking must not be confused with a quality label.
CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product.
CE marking is part of a procedure for exclusively administrative use and is intended to guarantee the free movement of the product within the
European Community.
G Specifications in Canada and the USA
Canadian and American specifications are more or less equivalent but differ greatly from IEC, UTE, VDE and BS specifications.
UL Underwriters Laboratories USA File ref. E39231, E48139 (on request)
CSA Canadian Standards Canada File ref. LR56745-14/15 (on request)
UL (USA) specifications make the following distinction between devices:
"Recognized" Authorized to be included in equipment, if the equipment in question has been entirely mounted and wired by qualified
personnel.
These devices bear the mark
"Listed" Authorized to be included in equipment and for separate sale as components in the USA.
These devices bear the mark
G Other Specifications and Certifications
The following specifications must be respected when these devices are used on ships:
BV Bureau Veritas France LRS LIoyd's Register of Shipping Great Britain
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway PRS Polski Rejestr Statkow Poland
GL Germanischer LIoyd Germany R.I.Na Registro Italiano Navale Italy
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
7/3
Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations
Specifications (cont.)
G International Standards
IEC 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4: Contactors and motor starters Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947- 5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
IEC 947- 6-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 6: Multiple function equipment Section 1: Automatic transfer switching
equipment (NFC 63-160).
IEC 204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines Part 1: General requirements ( NFC 79-130).
IEC 204-2 Electrical equipment of industrial machines Part 2: Item designation and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables
and instructions (Appendices D and E of Publication 204-1).
G European Standards
EN 50 001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: General requirements (NFC 63-090).
EN 50 002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: Fixing holes of contactor relays (NFC 63-091).
EN 50 003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions - Motor contactor fixing holes (NFC 63-092).
EN 50 005 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number: General rules
(NFC 63-030).
EN 50 011 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking, distinctive number and distinctive letter for
particular contactor relays (NFC 63-031).
EN 50 012 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number for auxiliary contacts of
particular contactors (NFC 63-032).
EN 50 022 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 35 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-015).
EN 50 023 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 75 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-016).
EN 60 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001) + amendment A11.
EN 60 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-110).
EN 60 947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements - Section 1: Electrome-
chanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
G National Standards
Germany: DIN VDE 0660
Part 100 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear General rules (EN 60 947-1).
Part 100/A11 Amendment A11.
Part 102 Electromechanical contactors and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
Part 200 Control circuit devices and switching elements; Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
France
UTE NFC 63-001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: General rules + Amendment 11 (EN 60 947-1 + A11).
UTE NFC 63-110 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
UTE NFC 63-140 Control switches (Low voltage switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits, including contactor relays)
Part 1 - Section 1: General requirements.
UTE NFC 63-146 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements -
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
Switzerland: SEV Publication
N 1025 Safety regulations for contactors.
TP 17 B/ 2A-d Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
TP 17 B/ 4A-d Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
Great Britain
BS 5424 (Part 1) Specifications for controlgear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c.
BS 4794 Control switches (switching devices including contactor relays for control and auxiliary circuits) up to and including 1000 V
a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 337 Publication).
BS 4941 Motor starter for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 292 Publication).
Sweden
SS 428 0600 Switching devices for max. 1KV. Survey of standards - International standards - Validity of Swedish standard.
Test Certifying Organizations
G LOVAG
ABB Control is a member of the ASEFA (Association of French Test Stations for Electrical Apparatus) whose platforms are accredited by the
RNE (national test network).
This independent organization is authorized to deliver certificates of testing and conformity with standards, especially IEC.
ASEFA is one of the signatories of the LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group) agreement which ensures reciprocal recognition between the
main European certifying organizations for low voltage electrical tests by delivering certificates of LOVAG conformity.
Members of LOVAG: ACAE SEMKO ALPHA ASEFA ASTA KEMA CEBEC
Countries: Italy Sweden Germany France Great Britain Holland Belgium
Production centres
LOVAG affiliated ABB: ABB Sace ABB Control ABB Control
(Italy) (Sweden) (France)
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
I Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. G No approval required, except in specific cases.
L Draft approval in progress. LApproved with restrictions.
Type Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies
of device
Mark
Abbreviation CSA UL BV GL LRS DNV PRS RINa MRS
Approved in Canada USA France Germany Gr. Britain Norway Poland Italy Russia
Contactors: (3P) 3-pole and (4P) 4-pole
BC 9 (3P), BC 16 (3P), BC 18 (3P) I I I I I I L I L
BC 25 (3P), BC 30 (3P) I I I I I I L I L
A 9 (3P), A 12 (3P), A 16 (3P) I I I I I I L I L
A 9 (4P), A 16 (4P) I I I I G I G I G
A 26 (3P) I I I I I I L I L
A 26 (4P) I I I I G I G I G
A 30 (3P), A 40 (3P) I I I I I I L I L
A 45 (4P), AE 45 (4P) I I G G G G G G G
AE 50 (3P) I I I G I I L I L
AE 50 (4P) I I I I G I G I G
AE 75 (4P) I I I I G I G I G
A 95 (3P) I I I I L I I I
AE 95 (3P) I I
A 110 (3P) I I I I L I I I
AE 110 (3P) I I
EK 110, 150 (4P) I I
EH 145 (3P) I I I I I L I I I I
EH 175 (3P) I I I I I I I I
EK 175, 210 (4P) I I
EH 370 (3P) I I I I L L I I
EK 370 (4P) I I
EH 550 (3P) I I I L L I I I
EK 550 (4P) I I
EH 700 (3P) I I I L L I L I
EH 800 (3P) I I I L L I I I
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
7/5
Type Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies
of device
Mark
Abbreviation CSA UL UL PTB BV GL LRS DNV PRS RINa MRS
Approved in Canada USA USA Germany France Germany Gr. Britain Norway Poland Italy Russia
Contactor Relays
4-pole KC - I I I I I I I G L
8-pole KC - I I I I I I I G L
4-pole N - I I I I I I L L L
8-pole N - I I I I I I L L L
Thermal O/L Relays
TA25 DU I I L I I I I L I L
TA80 DU I I L L L L L L L L
TA110 DU I I L L L L L L L
T 200 DU I G I I (1) I I I I I I I
T 450 DU/SU I G I I (1) I I I I (2) I I I
T 900 DU/SU I G I I (1) I I I I (2) I I I
(1) Specific tests. (2) Except for SU types.
Electronic O/L Relay: see page 5/22
Accessories for Contactors, Contactor Relays
CA 5, 1-pole I I I I I I L I L
CA 5, 4-pole I I L I I I L I L
CAL 5-11 I I I I I I L I L
CAL 16-11 I I L
TE5S-24, 120, 240 I
TP 40 DA/IA, TP 180 DA/IA I I I I I I L I L
WB 75 I I
Mechanical latching
for EH 145 - 800 I
Mechanical interlocking
for EH 145 - 300 (3) I I
for EH 145 - 800 (4) I I
RV 5 L I I I I I L I L
RC 5 L I L I I I L I L
RT 5 L I L I I I G I G
VM 5 G G G G G G G G G
VE 5 I I I G G G G G G
(3) SK 829 071-A, B, C, D and E types (4) SK 829 070-A, B, C, D, E and F types
Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
I Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. G No approval required, except in specific cases.
L Draft approval in progress. L Approved with restrictions.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
CSA and UL Approvals
CSA and UL Approvals stipulate the following for contactors:
the "3-phase motor-rating": motor power (hp) and corresponding current (A).
the "amp-rating": usual operational current (A) and nominal voltage (V).
Contactor relays are approved in amp-rating.
The technical characteristics figuring on devices must be respected and have been reproduced in the tables
below.
3-phase motor-rating
Contactors Size Motor power P Nominal voltage U
e
NEMA Nominal current I
e
Type 200V/208V 220V/240V 440V/ 480V 500V/ 600V
A 9 00 P hp 2 2 5 7.5
I
e
A 7.8 6.8 7.6 9
A 12 0 P hp 3 3 7.5 10
I
e
A 11 9.6 11 11
A 16 0 P hp 5 5 10 15
I
e
A 17.5 15.2 14 17
A 26 1 P hp 7.5 10 20 25
I
e
A 25.3 28 27 27
A 30 1P P hp 10 10 25 30
I
e
A 32.2 28 34 32
A 40 P hp 10 15 30 40
I
e
A 32.2 42 40 41
A 45, A 50 2 P hp 15 20 40 50
I
e
A 48.3 54 52 52
A 63 P hp 20 25 60 75
I
e
A 62.1 68 77 77
A 75 3 P hp 25 30 60 75
I
e
A 78.2 80 77 77
A 95 P hp 30 30 60 75
I
e
A 92 80 77 77
A 110 P hp 30 40 75 100
I
e
A 92 104 96 99
EH 145 4 P hp 40 50 100 125
I
e
A 119.6 130 124 125
EH 175 4 P hp 50 60 125 150
I
e
A 149.5 145 156 144
EH 210 P hp 60 75 150 200
I
e
A 166.7 192 180 192
EH 260 5 P hp 75 100 200 250
I
e
A 220.8 248 240 242
EH 300 5 P hp 100 100 250 250
I
e
A 285 248 302 242
EH 370 P hp 125 150 350 400
I
e
A 358 360 414 382
EH 550 6 P hp 150 200 400 500
I
e
A 414 480 477 472
EH 700 P hp 200 250 500 600
I
e
A 552 602 590
EH 800 7 P hp 250 300 600 700
I
e
A 692
Note: Other specific versions for the North-American market can be delivered on request.
A

9
9
8
A

9
8
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
7/7
CSA and UL Approvals
Amp-rating for A, BC, AE, EH and EK Contactors
The "amp-rating" value corresponds to the "General Use Rating" defined in specification UL 508:
the operational current, both during pull-in and steady-state conditions, must not exceed the "amp-rating" value
of the device. In alternating current, the inductive cos of the load is between 0.75 and 0.8.
Contactors Main contacts (General Use Rating) Auxiliary contacts:
Nominal current Nominal voltage "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c. A V a.c.
BC 9 21 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
BC 16 21 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
BC 25 33 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
BC 30 45 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A 9 21 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 12 25 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 16 28 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 26 40 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 30 50 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 40 60 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A(E) 45, A(E) 50 80 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 63 90 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 75 105 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 95 125 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 110 140 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
EK 110 170 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 145, EK 150 200 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 175 200 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 210, EK 175 230/250 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 260, EK 210 300 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 300 350 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 370, EK 370 420 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 550, EK 550 540 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 700 650 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 800 810 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
Amp-rating for N and KC Contactor Relays
Contactor Relays "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c.
N, KC - (4 poles per stack) A 600, Q 300 10 600
Amp-rating for Main Accessories
Accessories "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c.
CA 5 auxiliary contacts A 600, Q 300 10 600
CAL 5-11 auxiliary contacts A 600, Q 300 10 600
CAL 16-11 auxiliary contacts A 600 10 600
TP - pneumatic timer A 600 10 600
A

9
9
8
A

9
8
4
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Altitude
Characterizes the place of use. It is expressed in metres above sea level.
Circuits
auxiliary circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in a different circuit from the main circuit and the contactor control circuits.
control circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor (other than the main circuit and the auxiliary circuit) used to control the contactor's closing operation or opening
operation or both.
main circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in the circuit that it controls.
Thermal O/L Relay Tripping Classes
IEC 947-4-1 defines tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, and 30. Types 10 A, 10, etc. correspond to the maximum tripping time for a making current at 7.2
times the setting current.
Furthermore, for each class the standard specifies the tripping time for 1.5 times the setting current and sets the non tripping condition at 1.05 times
the setting current.
All these data are summarized in the table below.
Extract from IEC 947-4-1:
Tripping class 10 A 10 20 30
Max. tripping time for 1.5 times
the setting current (s) 120 240 480 720
(warm state)
Tripping time for 7.2 times
the setting current (s) 2 - 10 4 - 10 6 - 20 9 - 30
(cold state)
For 1.05 times the setting current No tripping
Insulation Class according to NFC 20 040 and VDE 0110
Characterizes adaptation of the devices to ambient temperature and operating conditions.
For given clearances and creepage distances a device will have different insulating voltages depending on insulation classes A, B, C and D.
Class C corresponds to most industrial applications.
The devices in this catalogue belong to class C.
Co-ordination of Equipment Protections during a Short Circuit
This is the addition upstream of the contactor and thermal O/L relay of a short-circuit (SCPD) protection device such as a circuit-breaker, a fuse with
a high breaking capacity or other fuses.
IEC publication 947-4-1 defines co-ordination types "1" and "2":
- Type "1" co-ordination requires that, in the event of a short-circuit, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will not
then be able to operate without being repaired or parts being replaced.
- Type "2" co-ordination requires that, in short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will be able
to operate afterwards. The risk of contacts being welded is acceptable. In this case, the manufacturer must stipulate the measures to be taken with
respect to maintenance of the equipment.
Rated Operational Current I
e
Current rated by the manufacturer. It is mainly based on the rated operational voltage U
e
, the rated frequency, the utilization category, the rated duty
and the type of protective enclosure, if necessary.
Conventional Free Air Thermal Current I
th
Current that the contactor can withstand in free air for a duty time of 8 hours without the temperature rise of its various parts exceeding the maximum
values given by the standard.
Cycle Time
This is the sum of the current flow time and the no-current time for given cycle.
Electrical Durability
Number of on-load operations that the contactor is able to carry out. It depends on the utilization category.
Mechanical Durability
Number of no-current operations that a contactor is able to carry out.
Load Factor
Ratio of the on-load operating time to the total cycle time x 100.
Switching Frequency
Number of switching cycles per hour.
Terms and Technical Definitions
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
7/9
Technical Terms and Definitions
Plugging
Stopping or fast reversal in rotation direction of a motor by two supply leads being interchanged while the motor is running.
Inching
Energization of a motor's circuit repeatedly or for short periods with the aim of obtaining small movements of the driven mechanism.
Coil Operating Limits
Expressed in multiples of the nominal control circuit voltage U
c
for the upper and lower limits.
Mounting Position
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions. Restrictions are to be taken into account for certain mounting positions.
Rated Breaking or Making Capacity
Root mean square value of the current that the contactor is able to break or make at a given voltage according to the conditions specified by standards
and for a given utilization category.
Intermittent Duty
Duty during which the contactor is successively closed or open for periods which are too short to enable the contactor to achieve thermal balance.
Ambient Temperature
Air temperature close to the contactor.
Time
Time constant:
Ratio of the inductance to the resistance (L/R = mH/ = ms).
Short-time withstand current:
Current that the contactor is able to withstand in closed position for a short time interval and in specified conditions.
Minimum switching time:
This is the minimum closing or opening order time necessary for the contactor to reach complete closing or opening.
Closing time:
Time interval between the beginning of the closing operation and the instant the contacts touch on all the poles.
Opening time:
Time interval between the specified starting instant of the opening operation and the instant the arcing contacts separate on all the poles.
Rated Control Voltage U
c
Control voltage value for which the control circuit is sized.
Rated Operational Voltage U
e
Voltage to which the contactor's utilization characteristics refer. In three-phase it is the phase-to-phase voltage.
Rated Insulation Voltage U
i
Reference voltage for dielectric tests and creepage distances.
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage U
imp
Peak value of an impulse voltage, having a specified form and polarity, which does not cause breakdown in specific test conditions.
Shock Withstand
Requirement for vehicles, crane drives, installations on board ships and plug-in equipment. For the acceptable "g" values, the contactors must not
change position and the thermal O/L relays must not trip.
Resistance to Vibrations
Requirements for vehicles, boats and other means of transport. For the specified vibration amplitude and frequency values the device must remain
able to operate.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Standards and Utilization Categories
Standards:
IEC publications 941-1, 947-4-1 and 947-5-1 should be referred to on an international level with respect to contactors, contactor relays and thermal
O/L relays.
Utilization Categories:
A contactor's duty is characterised by the utilization category together with the rated operational voltage and current indicated.
Utilization Categories for Contactors According to IEC 947-4-1:
Alternating current: AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces.
AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off.
AC-3 Cage motors: starting, switching off running motors.
AC-4 Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching.
AC-5a Discharge lamp switching.
AC-5b Incandescent lamp switching.
AC-6a Transformer switching.
AC-6b Capacitor bank switching.
AC-7a Slightly inductive loads for domestic devices and similar applications.
AC-7b Motors for domestic applications.
AC-8a Hermetic refrigeration compressor motor control with manual resetting of overload releases.
AC-8b Hermetic refrigeration compressor motor control with automatic resetting of overload releases.
Direct current: DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces.
DC-3 Shunt motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-5 Series motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-6 Incandescent lamp switching.
Utilization Categories for Contactor Relays According to IEC 947-5-1:
Alternating current: AC-12 Control of resistive loads and static loads with opto-coupler isolation.
AC-13 Control of static loads with transformer isolation.
AC-14 Control of weak electromagnetic loads ( 72 VA).
AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (> 72 VA).
Direct current: DC-12 Control of resistive loads and static loads with opto-coupler isolation.
DC-13 Control of d.c. electromagnets.
DC-14 Control of d.c. electromagnets having economy resistors.
In fact some applications, and the specific criteria characterizing the various loads controlled by contactors, may modify the utilization characteristics
of the contactors. The main applications concerned are:
Capacitor Bank Switching
Account must be taken of high peaks when the current is made and of harmonic currents during continuous duty. For this application, IEC publication
947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6b. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors are determined by our electrical tests;
IEC publication 947-4-1 gives the calculating formula for determining the operational current (Table VII b).
Transformer Switching
Account must be taken of the peaks due to magnetization phenomena when the current is made.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6a. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors
are determined using the values obtained for AC-3 or AC-4 category tests and the calculating formula given in IEC 947-4-1 (Table VII b).
The current peaks occurring on energization of the circuit and the power factor depend on the type of lamps, the connection mode and whether or
not there is compensation.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates two standard utilization categories:
AC-5a for discharge lamp switching.
AC-5b for incandescent lamp switching.
Slip-ring Motor Switching
The contactors used for short-circuiting rotor resistors can be used for rotor voltages above their natural nominal operational voltage.
The conditions of use of rotor contactors depend on the connection mode of the main poles.
The current values on circuit closing and the current and voltage values on circuit opening (as well as a generally low load factor) are easily withstood
by the contactors.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
Standards and Utilization Categories
Utilization Categories (cont.)
D.C. Power Circuit Switching
Arc suppression is more difficult in direct current than in alternating current and this is all the more true the higher the circuit time constant which is
why it is necessary to connect several poles in series in order to improve breaking conditions.
A.C. High Current Circuit Switching
Possibility of increasing performances by connecting poles in parallel.
Circuit Switching during Temporary and Intermittent Duty
In these cases higher operational currents are acceptable, the appropriate uprating factors are given in this catalogue.
Influence of the Length of the Conductors used in the Contactor Control Circuit
According to the operational voltages, the cross-sectional areas, the coil consumption and the control layout, difficulties due to line resistances and
capacitances may appear during contactor closing and opening orders. The corresponding information is given in this catalogue (section 2).
Making and Breaking Conditions for Utilization Categories
Utilization category Durability test conditions Occasional operation
Making conditions Breaking conditions Making conditions Breaking conditions
I/I
e
U/U
e
Cos. I/I
e
U/U
e
Cos. I
c
/I
e
U
r
/U
e
Cos. I
c
/I
e
U
r
/U
e
Cos.
or or or or
L/R (ms) L/R (ms) L/R (ms) L/R (ms)
Contactors for A.C. Circuit Switching
AC-1 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
AC-2 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 4 1.05 0.65 4 1.05 0.65
AC-3 I
e
< 17 A 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
17 < I
e
< 100 A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
I
e
> 100 A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35
AC-4 I
e
< 17 A 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45
17 < I
e
< 100 A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45
I
e
> 100 A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.35 10 1.05 0.35
Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching
DC-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
DC-3 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5
DC-5 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15
Contactor Relays for A.C. Circuit Switching
AC-14 (< 72 VA) 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7
AC-15 (> 72 VA) 10 1 0.7 1 1 0.4 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3
Contactor Relays for D.C. Circuit Switching
Standard operation Occasional operation
Making conditions Breaking conditions Making conditions Breaking conditions
I/I
e
U/U
e
T
0.95
I/I
e
U/U
e
T
0.95
I/I
e
U/U
e
T
0.95
I/I
e
U/U
e
T
0.95
DC-13 1 1 6 P
(1)
1 1 6 P
(1)
1.1 1.1 6 P
(1)
1.1 1.1 6 P
(1)
DC-14 10 1.1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms
(1) The value "6 x P" is the result of an empirical relation which is estimated to represent most d.c. magnetic loads up to the highest limit of P = 50 W (6 x P = 300 ms). It is accepted that loads
having drawn energy above 50 W are made up of weaker loads in parallel. As a consequence, the 300 ms value must form the highest limit whatever the value of the power drawn.
Key:
U (I) = applied voltage (current) I
c
= making and breaking current expressed in d.c. or in a.c. like the
U
r
= recovery voltage r.m.s. value of the symmetrical components
L/R = test circuit time constant T
0.95
= time required to reach 95% of the current in steady-state conditions,
U
e
(I
e
) = rated operational voltage (current) expressed in milliseconds
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Degrees of Protection
General
In an installation, the degree of protection required for electrical equipment depends on the environmental characteristics. The degree of protection,
ensured by the enclosure of equipment or by the cubicle containing the equipment is expressed by the IP code which gives the level of protection
against access to hazardous parts, the ingress of foreign bodies and/or the ingress of water, in compliance with IEC 529, EN 60529, IEC 947-1 and
EN 60947-1. Besides the IP symbol, the complete code has two figures followed (optionally) by two additional letters. A short description of the
elements used in IP coding is given below.
Element Figures Specifications for installation Protection of persons
or letters protection
Codes IP
First figure Against ingress of Against access to hazardous parts
foreign bodies with:
0 No protection No protection
1 Diameter > 50 mm Back of hand
2 Diameter > 12.5 mm Finger
3 Diameter > 2.5 mm Tool
4 Diameter > 1 mm Wire
5 Limited protection against dust Wire
6 Total protection against dust Wire
Second figure Against entrance of water
having a harmful effect
0 No protection
1 Vertical dripping
2 Dripping at a vertical angle of < 15
3 Rain at a vertical angle of < 60
4 Splashing
5 Low pressure water jet
6 Powerful water jets
7 Temporary immersion
8 Permanent immersion
Additional letter (optional) Against ingress Against access to hazardous
for use with: of foreign bodies parts with:
First figure 0 A Stopped by a barrier with a 50 mm sphere Back of hand
First figure 0 or 1 B Entrance of test finger limited to 80 mm Finger
First figure 1 or 2 C Wire with 2.5 mm and length of 100 mm Tool
First figure 2 or 3 D Wire with 1 mm and length of 100 mm Wire
Additional letter (optional) Specific additional information:
H High voltage apparatus
M Moving parts which are moving during
water test
S Moving parts which are stationary during
water test
W Specified atmospheric conditions
Note: The type of enclosure or cubicle in which the equipment must be installed prevails with respect to the degree of protection.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
Climatic Withstand of Devices
The life time and dependability of devices are mainly influenced by a series of climatic factors which cause their
corrosion.
In practice, besides climatic conditions, there are other factors which may damage equipment such as fungi,
insects (termites), dust, work site dirt and aggressive environment (salty or sulphurous atmosphere, etc.) which
can often only be identified at the place of installation.
Climatic stress, definitions and test conditions are dealt with in national publications such as the DIN 50 series
and NFC 20 series which are attached to international publications such as IEC 68.
ABB devices meet the requirements of UTE publication 63-100 (specification II): humid heat tests in successive
cycles at different temperatures and at a relative humidity of 95%.
The test conditions are:
Description Symbolization Time of Cycle phase Temperature Relative
one cycle time in test humidity
chamber
Humidity UTE 63-100 24 hours 12 hours including 40 C 95 %
and Specification II rise in temperature
variable
12 hours including 25 C 95 %
temperature
cooling
(open device)
ABB contactors have been used for many years in the most varied countries, with hot and humid climates for
example: Brazil, Indonesia, India or on ships. Experience has shown that ABB devices can be used in most
countries throughout the world.
The climate of the country in which the apparatus is installed is not the determining choice factor.
Account must be taken of:
the immediate environment of the devices (sheltered, ventilated, temperature),
the aggressivity of the immediate atmosphere at the place of installation,
the length and frequency of non operating periods.
In the case of frequent condensation (i.e. the formation of steam caused by rapid changes in temperature),
heating resistors must be installed in cubicles (100 to 250 W per m3 of enclosure).
The table below gives the cases where heating is necessary.
Environment Operating Climate Internal heating
conditions of enclosure
Inside No running water Continuous or not All climates Without
premises No condensation
With running water Continuous All climates Without
Frequent or long Temperate Without
stops
Tropical With
Outside, sheltered No running water Continuous or not Temperate Without
no condensation
Tropical With
Outside or With running water Continuous All climates Without
by the seaside
Frequent or long Temperate Without
stops
Tropical With
The entrance of dust, insects, dirt, etc. in devices may be prevented if the appropriate degree of protection
according to IEC 529 is chosen (See "Degree of protection" table).
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
E
0
5
2
3
D
E
0
5
2
5
D
E
0
5
2
4
D
E
0
5
2
2
D
L
l
E
0
5
2
0
D
E
0
5
2
1
D
Connections
l
e
l
h
M
Connection mode and capacity
Type of device Connection mode: Cross-sectional areas:
screws and tunnel accessible rigid solid 4 mm
2
flexible Width x Max. width of
clamps terminals flat terminals rigid stranded 6 mm
2
without cable end max. of lugs L x I
(1) bars or
lugs
h x l e x l - mm
2
mm
2
mm x mm mm x mm
Contactor relays
- KC M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- N M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 -2.5 8 x 3.7
Contactors
G Main poles:
- BC9, 16 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1- 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- BC18, 25 M 4 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 4 10 x 4.2
- BC30 M 5 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 10 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 6 13 x 5
- A9, 12, 16 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- A26 M 4 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 or 2 x 1 - 4
(2)
10 x 4.2
- A30, 40 2x(5.6x6.5) 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 16 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 10
- A/AE45, 50, 63, 75 13 x 10 1 x 6 - 50 or 1 x 6 - 35 or
2 x 6 - 25 2 x 6 - 16
- A/AE95, 110 14 x 14 1 x 10 - 95 or 1 x 10 - 70 or
2 x 6 - 35 2 x 6 - 35
- EK110 4 x 15 - 6.6 1 x 10 - 70 30 x 6
- EH145, EK 150 4 x 20 - 11 1 x 35 - 120 30 x 10
- EH175, EH210, EK 175, EK 210 5 x 20 - 11 1 x 35 - 120 33 x 10
- EH260, EH300 5 x 25 - 11 1 x 70 - 300 50 x 10
- EH370, EK 370 6 x 25 - 11 1 x 70 - 300 or 55 x 10
2 x 35 - 185
- EH550, EK 550 6 x 25 - 11 1 x 70 - 300 or 55 x 10
2 x 35 - 185
- EH700 6 x 40 - 11 1 or 2 x 95 - 300 65 x 10
- EH800 6 x 50 - 211 75 x (10x2)
G Built-in auxiliary contacts:
- BC9 - BC25 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- A9 - A16 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- A26 M 4 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 4
(2)
10 x 4.2
- A30 - A40 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
Additional auxiliary contacts
- 1-pole CA 5 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- 4-pole CAL 5 and CA 5 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- CAL 16 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
Coil terminals
- KC, BC9 - 30, A and AE45 - 75 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- A and AE95/110 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- A9 - A40 M 3.5 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
- EH and EK M 3.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 8 x 3.7
(1) EH and EK contactors: with Al/Cu cable connectors - (other possibilities, see section 4)
(2) With cable end for 0.75 and 1mm
2
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
7
Connections
Connection Mode and Capacity
Type of device Connection mode: Connectable cross-sectional areas:
screws and tunnel accessible rigid solid 4 mm
2
flexible Max. bars
clamps terminals flat terminals rigid stranded 6 mm
2
with cable end or lugs
Width -
h x l e x l - mm
2
mm
2
mm
Thermal O/L relays
G Poles:
- TA 25 DU 25 M 4 2 x 1.5 - 6 2 x 1.5 - 4
- TA 25 DU 32 4.5 x 5.5 1 x 10 2 x 0.75 - 6
- TA 42, TA 75, TA 80 9 x 10 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 - 16 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 - 10
- TA 110 14 x 14 16 - 35 16 - 35
- T 200 4 x 20 - 11 25 - 120 25 - 95 30 - 11
- T 450 + AT 450 5 x 30 - 11 2 x 240 2 x 240 30 - 11
- T 900 + AT 900 5 - 8 x 50 - 11 2 x 300 2 x 300 50 - 11
G Auxiliary contact terminals:
- TA 25 - 110, T 200 - 900 M 3.5 2 x 0.75 - 4 2 x 0.75 - 2.5
Electronic O/L Relay
G Poles and auxiliary
contact terminals:
- E 16 DU M 3.5 2 x 0.75 - 4 2 x 0.75 - 4
E
0
5
2
3
D
E
0
5
2
5
D
E
0
5
2
4
D
E
0
5
2
2
D
l
e
l
h
M
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Tightening Torques for Contactors,
Contactor Relays and Accessories
Contactors:
BC 9 - BC 30
A 9 - A 40
Contactor relays:
N and KC
A(E) 45 - A(E) 110 Contactors
D B C A' A
A A' B C D C A B
E
0
5
1
0
D
E
0
5
0
9
D
Type of Main poles Built-in aux. poles Coil terminals Housing assembly Cover fixing Contact screws
contactors
M3.5 poz. 2 M3.5 poz.2 M3.5 poz.2 3.5
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Screws Ncm/lb.in Ncm
KC, BC 9, BC 16
100/9 120 100/9 120 100/9 120
Poz.2 160/14.4 175
N, A 9, A 12, A 16 Poz.2 120/10.5 135
M4 poz. 2 M4 poz.2 M3.5 poz.2 3.5
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Screws Ncm/lb.in Ncm
BC 18, BC 25
170/15 220 170/15 220 100/9 120
Poz.2 160/14.4 175
A 26 Poz.1 120/10.5 135
M5 poz. 2 M3.5 poz.2 3.5 poz.2 M2.5 slotted screws
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
BC 30 280/25 320 100/9 120 160/14.4 175 80/7.2 90
M5 poz. 2 M3.5 poz. 2 M3.5 poz.2 3.5 poz.1
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
A 30, A 40 230/20 260 100/9 120 100/9 120 120/10.5 135
M8 slotted screws M3.5 poz.2 3.5 poz.2 3.5 poz.2 3 poz.1
for 6.5
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
A(E) 45 - A(E) 75 400/35 450 100/9 120 120/10.5 135 100/9 110 60/5.4 70
HC, M8 M3.5 poz.2 M 3.5 poz.2 3.5 poz.2 CBLX - M5 / T25
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in
A(E) 95/110 600/53 650 100/9 120 135/12 150 100/9 120 500/45
M 10 M 3.5 poz.2
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
EH 145 EH 800 1800/160 2200 100/9 120
Accessories Pole terminals
CA 5, CAL 5, CC 5 M3.5 poz. 2
CAL 16, CCL 16
TP Tightening torque:
LK 75-A, LK 75-A1 recommended max.
VE 5-1, VE 5-2 Ncm Ncm
WB 75 ( poz.1 screw)
100 120
Index Section
Section
7
7/17
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Co-ordination with Short-circuit
Protection Devices
In compliance with standards IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1, we define for the contactors and starters the type, rating and characteristics of the
short-circuit protection devices SCPD which allow selective protection against overloads and ensure protection against short circuits.
Basic Functions
In order to protect the connecting cable and the motor, the switchgear must ensure the four following essential functions:
Protection against overloads - This protection concerns the motor and the cable and is ensured by the starter overload relay.
Motor control - This function is commonly carried out by the contactor.
Protection against short-circuits.
Isolation.
The latter two functions can be carried out by a circuit-breaker or by a switch-disconnector-fuse protecting the motor and the cable against short
circuits and ensuring isolation with positive contact indication.
Applicable Standards
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) precisely defines the different points to be considered in order to carry out correct co-ordination.
Complete co-ordination for a combination includes the following points:
Selectivity test between the overload relay and the short-circuit protection device SCPD.
Short-circuit condition tests:
G at prospective "r" currents - These currents depend on the rated operational current of the starter (I
e
AC-3) and are given by the standard
(Table XI). For example: r = 1kA for I
e
AC-3 < 16 A; r = 3 kA for 16 A < I
e
AC-3 < 63 A ; r = 5 kA for 63 A < I
e
AC-3 < 125 A etc.
G at the rated short-circuit current "Iq" - This is the maximum current that the combination can withstand, for example 50 kA.
Types of Co-ordination
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) defines two types of co-ordination according to the expected level of service continuity. Acceptable extreme damage
for the switchgear is divided into two types.
Type 1: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will not be able to then operate without
being repaired or having parts replaced.
Type 2: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will be able to operate afterwards. The
risk of contacts welding is acceptable.
The Complete ABB Offer
ABB has acquired years of experience with respect to problems of co-ordination and is able to make a complete offer based on tests performed in
its qualified laboratories.
A complete collection of co-ordination tables, according to IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1), is available on request ; see extracts on following pages.
In the co-ordination tables the following short-circuit protection devices are recommended:
G Moulded case circuit-breakers (MCCBs)
G Modular circuit-breakers (MCBs)
G Switch-disconnector-fuses (aM and gG)
G Manual Motor Starters (M.M.S.)
General Remarks Applicable to all Tables
G Each table is defined for a maximum ambient temperature of 40 C. For higher temperatures, apply a derating factor according to the following
rules:
Fuses: factor of 0.8 applied to I
n
for an ambient temperature of 70 C.
MCCBs and MCBs: factor of 0.8 applied to I
n
for an ambient temperature of 60 C.
The starter derating factor depends on the operating conditions of thermal O/L relays:
Factor of 0.9 applied to I
n
for an ambient temperature of 70 C - No derating up to 55 C.
G Each table is defined for motor currents: 3-phase motors, 4-pole.
G Normal starting means a starting time < 2 s. - Difficult starting means an accelerating time 10 s < ts < 30 s.
Tripping classes of thermal O/L relays according to IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1): 10 A and 10 for DU types and 30 for SU types.
G In the tables with MCCBs, these are fitted with the magnetic relay alone. Setting is always carried out at > 12.3 Ie AC-3 so that the transient
current peak occurring during starting can be withstood.
G The minimum cable cross-sectional areas given in each table are determined to withstand the energy flow resulting from the rated short-circuit
current but do not have to correspond to the cable installation rules: voltage drop, ambient temperature, etc.
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Type 1 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters
Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with MS 325 M.M.S.
Motor Manual Motor Starter Contactor Group
Rated Rated Type Magnetic Overload Type Safety Max.
Power Current tripping Release clearance (1) Current
current Setting range
P
e
kW I
e
A A A mm I max. A
0.37 1.2 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.55 1.5 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.75 2 MS 325 - 2.5 29 1.6 - 2.5 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 2.5
1.1 2.6 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
1.5 3.5 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
2.2 5 MS 325 - 6.3 79 4 - 6.3 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 6.3
3 6.6 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
4 8.5 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
5.5 11.5 MS 325 - 12.5 156 9 - 12.5 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 12
7.5 15.5 MS 325 - 16 200 12.5 - 16 A 16 70/5 x 15 x 5 16
11 22 MS 325 - 25 300 20 - 25 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 25
Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with MS 325 M.M.S.
Motor Manual Motor Starter Contactor Group
Rated Rated Type Magnetic Overload Type Safety Max.
Power Current tripping Release clearance (1) Current
current Setting range
P
e
kW I
e
A A A mm I max. A
0.37 1.2 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.55 1.5 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.75 2 MS 325 - 2.5 29 1.6 - 2.5 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 2.5
1.1 2.6 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A 9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
1.5 3.5 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
2.2 5 MS 325 - 6.3 79 4 - 6.3 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 6.3
3 6.6 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
4 8.5 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
5.5 11.5 MS 325 - 12.5 156 9 - 12.5 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 12.5
7.5 15.5 MS 325 - 16 200 12.5 - 16 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 16
11 22 MS 325 - 25 300 20 - 25 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 25
(1) Safety clearance - Example : 70 / 5 x 15 x 5
70 mm above the MS 325 M.M.S. 5 mm on each side of both the M.M.S. and contactor
5 mm below the A 9 A 26 Contactors 15 mm in front of both the M.M.S. and contactor
Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1
Index Section
Section
7
7/19
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with M.C.C.B.
Motor Moulded Case Circuit-Breaker Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group
Rated Rated Type Magnetic Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current tripping clearance setting Current
current range
P
e
kW I
e
A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.1 LNA32RM2.5 22 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.35
0.55 1.5 LNA32RM2.5 22 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.75
0.75 1.9 LNA32RM2.5 22 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.3
1.1 2.8 LNA32RM3.2 32 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 2.95
1.5 3.5 LNA32RM4.5 45 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 3.75
LNA32RM4.5 45 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 5.0 3.5 - 5 4.75
2.2 5 LNA32RM6.3 63 A 26 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.25
3 6.6 LNA32RM9 84 A 26 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8
4 8.5 LNA32RM16 155 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 10.5
5.5 11.5 LNA32RM16 155 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 13.5
7.5 15.5 LNA32RM20 210 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 18.5
11 22 LNA32RM27 280 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 25 18 - 25 24
15 30 LNA32RM32 365 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 32 22 - 32 30.5
18.5 37 LNA63RM52 550 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 37
22 42 LNA63RM52 550 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 48.5
30 60 S3H160MCPR125 900 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 61.5
37 72 S3H160MCPR125 1050 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 72
45 85 S3H160MCPR125 1250 A 95 25 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 85
55 105 S3H160MCPR125 1500 A 110 25 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 105
75 140 S3H250MCPR250 2150 EH 145 40 T 200 DU 150 110 - 150 140
90 170 S4H250PR211R2501 2500 EH 175 40 T 200 DU 175 130 - 175 170
110 205 S5H400PR211R3201 3200 EH 210 40 T 450 DU 235 165 - 235 210
S5H400PR211R3201 3200 EH 260 40 T 450 DU 235 165 - 235 227.5
132 245 S5H400PR211R3201 3840 EH 260 40 T 450 DU 310 220 - 310 260
160 295 S5H400PR211R4001 4800 EH 370 40 T 450 DU 310 220 - 310 298
200 370 S6S630PR211R6301 6300 EH 370 40 T 450 DU 400 285 - 400 380
250 460 S6S630PR211R6301 7560 EH 550 40 T 900 DU 500 355 - 500 483
290 530 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 550 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 550
315 580 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 700 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 650
355 630 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 700 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 650
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Normal start-up, 400 V - 80 kA with Switch-fuse and gG type fuses
Motor Switch-fuse Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group
Rated Rated Type Fuse Size Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current type clearance setting Current
gG range
P
e
kW I
e
A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.2 OESA32 4 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.4
0.55 1.5 OESA32 6 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.8
0.75 2 OESA32 6 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.4
1.1 2.6 OESA32 10 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 3.1
1.5 3.5 OESA32 10 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 4
2.2 5 OESA32 16 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.5
3 6.6 OESA32 16 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8.5
4 8.5 OESA32 25 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 9
5.5 11.5 OESA32 32 00 A 12 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 12
7.5 15.5 OESA32 32 00 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 16
11 22 OESA32 50 00 A 26 20 TA 25 DU 25 18 - 25 25
15 30 OESA63 63 00 A 30 20 TA 25 DU 32 24 - 32 30
18.5 37 OESA63 80 00 A 40 20 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 40
22 44 OESA125 100 00 A 50 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 50
30 60 OESA125 125 00 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 63
37 72 OESA125 160 00 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 75
45 85 OESA125 160 00 A 95 20 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 90
55 105 OESA250 200 1 A 110 20 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 110
Index Section
Section
7
7/21
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Normal start-up, 400 V - 80 kA with Switch-fuse and aM type fuses
Motor Switch-fuse Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group
Rated Rated Type Fuse Size Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current type clearance setting Current
aM range
P
e
kW I
e
A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.2 OESA32 2 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.4
0.55 1.5 OESA32 2 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.8
0.75 2 OESA32 4 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.4
1.1 2.6 OESA32 4 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 3.1
1.5 3.5 OESA32 6 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 4
2.2 5 OESA32 6 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.5
3 6.6 OESA32 8 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8.5
4 8.5 OESA32 10 00 A 9 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 9
5.5 11.5 OESA32 16 00 A 12 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 12
7.5 15.5 OESA32 20 00 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 16
11 22 OESA32 25 00 A 26 20 TA 25 DU 25 18 - 25 25
15 30 OESA32 32 00 A 30 20 TA 25 DU 32 24 - 32 30
18.5 37 OESA63 40 00 A 40 20 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 40
22 44 OESA63 50 00 A 50 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 50
30 60 OESA63 63 00 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 63
37 72 OESA125 100 00 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 75
45 85 OESA125 100 00 A 95 20 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 90
55 105 OESA125 125 00 A 110 20 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 110
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Notes
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
8
Contents
General ................................................................................................................................ 8/2
Terminal Marking and Positioning:
CA, CC, CAL and CCL Auxiliary Contacts ......................................................................... 8/3
N Contactor Relays ............................................................................................................ 8/4
KC and TKC Contactor Relays .......................................................................................... 8/5
A Contactors ..................................................................................................................... 8/6
AE, TAE, BC and TBC Contactors .................................................................................... 8/7
EH and EK Contactors ............................................................................................... 8/8, 8/9
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays .......................................................................................... 8/9
Star-Delta Starter Diagrams ............................................................................................ 8/10
Terminal Marking
and Positioning
Star-Delta Starter Diagrams
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
1-Standards
Terminal marking of contactors, contactor relays, auxiliary contacts and thermal O/L relays generally complies with international and European
standards IEC 445, IEC 947-1 and EN50005. In addition, the marking of these devices also meets the following specific standards:
IEC 947-4-1, EN60947-4-1 and EN50012 for contactors and contactor auxiliary contacts,
IEC 947-5-1 and EN50011 for contactor relays,
IEC 947-4-1 and EN60047-4-1 for thermal O/L relays.
2-Contactor Marking
2.1-Marking of contactor main pole terminals
Main pole terminals are marked by codes made up of a figure followed by an alphanumerical combination: e.g. 1L-2T1, 3L2-4T2, etc.
2.2-Marking of contactor auxiliary contact terminals
Contactor auxiliary contacts are marked by two-figure numbers:
G The unit figure marks the function:
1-2 for N.C. contacts, 5-6 for N.C. contacts with a special function,
3-4 for N.O. contacts, 7-8 for N.O. contacts with a special function.
G The tens figure is a serial number allocated in continuous order starting from 1, regardless of the function of the contacts and running from left
to right on the device starting with the 1st stack for 2-stack devices.
Furthermore, to meet the requirements of the American market these numbers are followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts and
NC for normally closed contacts.
2.3-Identification of contacts in contactor codes
Example : A9 3 0 - 1 0
Contactor
Number of main N.O. poles Number of N.C. auxiliary contacts
Number of main N.C. poles Number of N.O. auxiliary contacts
Depending on device ratings, we deliver the following auxiliary contact arrangements (defined in standard EN50012): 00, 10, 01, 11, 22.
Other arrangements are possible by adding additional auxiliary contacts: 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 41.
3-Contactor Relay Marking
The marking of contactor relays complies with EN50011 which outlines:
G The specific positioning of the contacts
G The adequate marking of the terminals of these contacts by 2 figure numbers as described in 2.2 above.
Furthermore, to meet the requirements of the American market these numbers are followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts and NC
for normally closed contacts.
According to EN50011, contactor relays are designated by characteristic numbers and letters:
Example: N 2 2 E
Contactor relay
Number of N.O. contacts Characteristic letter
Number of N.C. contacts
N, KC, TKC contactor relays include these characteristic numbers and letters in their code and include the following variants from the preferential
E series:
40E-31E-22E for devices with 4 flow channels,
44E-53E-62E-71E-80E for devices with 8 flow channels.
In addition, the following contact combinations are possible by adding auxiliary contact blocks:
23E-32E-33E-41E-42E-50E-51E-53E-60E-62E-71E-80E.
4-Add-on Auxiliary Contact Terminal Marking
CA5 4-pole auxiliary contacts and CAL16 and CCL16 2-pole auxiliary contacts have the complete 2-figure marking as defined in 2.2 followed by
the letters NO for normally open contacts and NC for normally closed contacts. E.g. 13 NO-14 NO, 21 NC-22 NC.
"A" contactor CAL 5 two-pole auxiliary contacts also bear the marking defined above, the letter X, to avoid confusion with the CA5 front-mounted
contact markers: e.g. 13X NO-14X NO, 21X NC-22X NC.
CA5 and CC5 1-pole auxiliary contacts bear only the unit figure (function according to 2.2) followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts
and NC for normally closed contacts. This marking is then combined with the order number figuring on the contactor, defining the positioning of the
auxiliary contact:
Example: G Mounting of a CA5-01 N.C. auxiliary contact on position N2
G The auxiliary contact terminals are marked 21-22.
5-Thermal O/L Relay Terminal Marking
The main terminals of thermal O/L relays are marked on the motor side by numbers of a figure followed by an alphanumerical combination: 2T1, 4T2, 6T3.
G The auxiliary terminals are marked: 95-96 for N.C. contact
97-98 for N.O. contact
General
E
0
6
4
8
D
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
=

1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
+
21
22
2-
2-
NC
-1
-2
NC
CA5-01
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
8
1.1-One-pole auxiliary contacts
1.2-Two-pole auxiliary contacts
1.3-Four-pole auxiliary contacts
CA, CC, CAL and CCL Auxiliary Contacts
-1
-2
CA5-01
NC
E
0
0
4
1
D
1
-5
-6
CC5-01
NC
E
0
4
0
4
D
1
-3
-4
CA5-10
E
0
0
4
6
D
1 NO
-7
-8
CC5-10
NO
E
0
4
0
3
D
1
21X /
22X /
13X /
14X /
NO NC
4 3 X
4 4 X
3 1 X
3 2 X
CAL5-11 (L. h. s. mounted)
E
0
4
6
7
D
G

NC NO
43X /
44X /
31X /
32X /
2 1 X
2 2 X
1 3 X
1 4 X
CAL5-11 (R. h. s. mounted)
E
0
4
6
8
D
G
CAL16-11 B
43
44
31
32 E
0
4
6
9
D
NO NC
21
22
13
14
CAL16-11 A
E
0
4
7
2
D
NO NC
CCL16-11 E
47
48
35
36
NO NC
E
0
4
7
3
D
31
32
21
22
51
52
41
42
CA5-04 M
NC NC NC NC
E
0
3
9
9
D
1
61
62
53
54
CAL16-11 C
E
0
4
7
0
D
NO NC
21
22
11
12
41
42
31
32
CA5-04 E
NC NC NC NC
E
0
3
9
6
D
1
61
62
51
52
81
82
71
72
CA5-04 N
NC NC NC NC
E
0
4
0
2
D
1
21
22
13
14
43
44
31
32
CA5-22 E
NO NC NC NO
E
0
0
4
3
D
1
21
22
13
14
43
44
33
34
CA5-31 E
NO NC NO NO
E
0
3
9
5
D
1
21
22
33
34
43
44
53
54
CA5-31 M
NO NO NO NC
E
0
3
9
7
D
1
CAL16-11 D
83
84
71
72 E
0
4
7
1
D
NO NC
21
22
31
32
43
44
53
54
CA5-22 M
NO NO NC NC
E
0
3
9
8
D
1
13
14
23
24
33
34
43
44
CA5-40 E
NO NO NO NO
E
0
0
4
2
D
1
61
62
53
54
83
84
71
72
CA5-22 N
NO NC NC NO
E
0
4
0
1
D
1
53
54
63
64
73
74
83
84
CA5-40 N
NO NO NO NO
E
0
4
0
0
D
1
33
34
21
22
57
58
45
46
CA5-11/11 M
NC NO
E
0
9
9
2
D
1 NO NC
21
22
13
14
47
48
35
36
CA5-11/11 E
NO NC NC NO
E
0
9
9
3
D
1
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
2.1-N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated
2.1.1 - Standard devices without addition of auxiliary contacts
2.1.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
N Contactor Relays
43
NO
NO
44
31
NC
NC
32
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2
N 22 E
E
0
3
0
8
D
1
33
NO
NO
34
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
N 31 E
E
0
0
3
7
D
1
N 22 E
E
0
3
3
2
D
1
13 21 31 43
NO NC NC NO
NO NC NC NO
14 22 32 44
A1 A2
A2
E
0
3
3
3
D
1

N 31 E
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A1 A2
A2
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
81
NC
NC
82
71
NC
NC
72
61
NC
NC
62
53
NO
NO
54
N 53 E
E
0
3
2
8
D
1
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
83
NO
NO
84
73
NO
NO
74
61
NC
NC
62
53
NO
NO
54
N 71 E
E
0
3
2
6
D
1
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
83
NO
NO
84
71
NC
NC
72
61
NC
NC
62
53
NO
NO
54
N 62 E
E
0
3
2
7
D
1
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
83
NO
NO
84
73
NO
NO
74
63
NO
NO
64
53
NO
NO
54
N 80 E
E
0
3
3
0
D
1
E
0
3
3
6
D
1
N 53 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NO NC
53 61 71 81
54 62 72 82
E
0
3
3
7
D
1
N 62 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NO NO
53 61 71 83
54 62 72 84
E
0
3
3
8
D
1
N 71 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NO NC NO NO
53 61 73 83
54 62 74 84
E
0
3
3
9
D
1
N 80 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NO NO NO NO
53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
81
NC
NC
82
71
NC
NC
72
61
NC
NC
62
51
NC
NC
52
N 44 E
E
0
3
2
9
D
1
E
0
3
3
4
D
1
N 40 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
E
0
3
3
5
D
1
N 44 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NC NC
51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
N 40 E
E
0
3
0
9
D
1
E
0
9
8
9
D
N 51/11
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NO NO
53 61 75 87
54 62 76 88
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
87
NO
NO
88
75
NC
NC
76
61
NC
NC
62
53
NO
NO
54
N 51/11
E
0
9
9
1
D
33
NO
NO
34
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NO
54 E
0
4
7
5
D
G
Combination 41 E
E
0
4
7
4
D
G

Combination
41 E
N 31 E =
=
+
+
CA5-10
A1
A2
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
53
54
NO
53
NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A2
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO
5-
5-
NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A1 A2
A2
-3
-4
NO NO
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NO
54
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
8
0
D
G
Combination 50 E
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NO
54
63
NO
NO
64
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
7
9
D
G
Combination 60 E
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
7
6
D
G
61
NC
NC
62
51
NC
NC
52
Combination 42 E
E
0
4
7
7
D
G

Combination
42 E
N 40 E =
=
+ +
+ +
CA5-01 CA5-01
-1
-2
NC
A1
A2
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
51
52
NC
61
62
NC
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A2
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
5-
5-
6-
6 -
A1 A2
A2
-1
-2
NC
E
0
4
8
1
D
G

Combination
60 E
N 40 E =
=
+
+ +
+ CA5-10 CA5-10
A1
A2
13 23 33 43
53
54
NO
63
64
NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A2
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
5-
5-
6-
6 -
A1 A2
A2
-3
-4
NO
-3
-4
NO
E
0
4
7
8
D
G

Combination
50 E
N 40 E CA5-10 =
=
+
+
-3
-4
NO
A1
A2
13 23 33 43
53
54
NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A2
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
5-
5-
A1 A2
A2
E
0
9
8
8
D
N 33/11
13 23 33 41
NO NO NO NC
NO NO NO NC
14 24 34 42
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NC NO
51 61 75 87
52 62 76 88
A1
A2
41
NC
NC
42
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
87
NO
NO
88
75
NC
NC
76
61
NC
NC
62
51
NC
NC
52
N 33/11
E
0
9
9
0
D
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
8
2.2-KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
KC and TKC Contactor Relays
KC 22 E
TKC 22 E
E
0
4
8
2
D
13 21 31 43
NO NC NC NO
NO NC NC NO
14 22 32 44
A1
A2
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
E
0
4
8
4
D
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
8
8
D
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
43
NO
NO
44
31
NC
NC
32
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2 E
0
4
8
7
D
KC 22 E
TKC 22 E
33
NO
NO
34
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44 E
0
4
8
9
D
KC 31 E
TKC 31 E
E
0
4
8
5
D
KC 44 E
TKC 44 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
NC NC NC NC
51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82
E
0
4
8
6
D
KC 62 E
TKC 62 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
NC NC NO NO
53 61 71 83
54 62 72 84
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
81
NC
NC
82
71
NC
NC
72
61
NC
NC
62
51
NC
NC
52 E
0
4
9
0
D
KC 44 E
TKC 44 E
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
83
NO
NO
84
71
NC
NC
72
61
NC
NC
62
53
NO
NO
54 E
0
4
9
1
D
KC 62 E
TKC 62 E
33
NO
NO
34
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
43
NO
NO
44
43
NO
NO
44
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NC
54 E
0
4
9
4
D
G
Combination 41 E
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
9
5
D
G
61
NC
NC
62
51
NC
NC
52
Combination 42 E
E
0
4
9
2
D
G
Combination
41 E
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A1
A2
=
=
+
+
+
53
54
NO
KC 31 E
TKC 31 E
CA5-10
CA5-10
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A1
A2
5-
5-
-3
-4
NO
E
0
4
9
6
D
G
Combination
50 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
=
=
+
+
+
53
54
NO
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
CA5-10
CA5-10
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
5-
5-
-3
-4
NO
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NO
54
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
9
8
D
G
Combination 50 E
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
53
NO
NO
54
63
NO
NO
64
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
4
9
9
D
G
Combination 60 E
E
0
5
0
0
D
G
Combination
80 E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
NO NO NO NO
53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84
NO NO NO NO
53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
CA5-40E
CA5-40E
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
5- 6- 7- 8-
5- 6- 7- 8-
=
=
+
+
+
A1
A2
43
NO
NO
44
33
NO
NO
34
23
NO
NO
24
13
NO
NO
14
83
NO
NO
84
73
NO
NO
74
63
NO
NO
64
53
NO
NO
54 E
0
6
0
1
D
G
Combination 80 E
E
0
4
8
3
D
KC 31 E
TKC 31 E
13 21 33 43
NO NC NO NO
NO NC NO NO
14 22 34 44
A1
A2
A1
A2
E
0
4
9
3
D
G

Combination
42 E
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
=
=
+
+
+ +
+
+
CA5-01
CA5-01
CA5-01
CA5-01
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
13 23 33 43
51
52
NC
61
62
NC
-1
-2
5-
5-
6-
6 -
NC
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
-1
-2
NC
A1
A2
E
0
4
9
7
D
G

Combination
60 E
KC 40 E
TKC 40 E
=
=
+
+
+
+
+ +
CA5-10
CA5-10
CA5-10
CA5-10
13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
13 23 33 43
53
54
NO
63
64
NO
-3
-4
5-
5-
6-
6 -
NO
NO NO NO NO
14 24 34 44
A1
A2
-3
-4
NO
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
13 21 31 43
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
14 22 32 44
6-
6-
5-
5-
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NO NO
E
0
0
1
0
D
1
A50 ... A110-30-22

3.1-A Contactors - A.C. Operated
3.1.2 - Standard 3-pole devices with factory mounted auxiliary contacts
A Contactors
1 R3 R5
2 R4 R6
A9 ... A26-22-00
A45 ... A75-22-00
A1 A2
A2
7
8
E
0
0
3
8
D
1
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A9 ... A26-40-00
A45 ... A75-40-00
A1 A2
A2
7L4
8T4
E
0
3
9
4
D
1
A1
A2
1
2
R5
R6
R3
R4
7
8 A
0
4
3
0
D
1
A9 ... A26-22-00
A45 ... A75-22-00
E
0
6
2
5
D
G
A9 ... A40-30-10 CA5-01 CA5-10
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
Combination
21
=
=

1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
+ +
+ +
21
22
2-
2-
NC
33
34
3-
3-
NO
-1
-2
NC
-3
-4
NO
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
3
0
6
D
1
A9 ... A40-30-10
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
21
NC
NC
22 E
0
3
0
5
D
1
A9 ... A40-30-01
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
43
NO
NO
44
31
NC
NC
32
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A9 ... A16-30-22
A50 ... A110-30-22
E
0
3
2
5
D
1
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
13
NO
NO
14
13
NO
NO
14
33
NO
NO
34
Combination 21
E
0
6
2
7
D
G
A9 ... A40-30-10 CA5-01
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
Combination
11
=
=

1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
+
+
21
22
2-
2-
NC
-1
-2
NC
E
0
6
2
0
D
G
5L3 3L2 A1
A2 6T3 4T2
1L1
2T1
53
NO
NO
54
43
NO
NO
44
31
NC
NC
32
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
A9 ... A40-30-32
E
0
3
2
4
D
1
E
0
3
4
2
D
1
A9 ... A40-30-32
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
NO NC NC NO
21 31 43 53
22 32 44 54
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
13X
21X
14X
22X
A2
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
E
0
6
2
1
D
G
43X
31X
44X
32X
43X
31X
44X
32X
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
13X
21X
14X
22X
A2
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
A50 ... A75-30-11 CAL5-11 Combination
22
=
=
+
+
A1
A2
Combination 10
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
7L4
8T4 E
0
6
2
6
D
G
13
NO
NO
14
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
Combination
10
A1 A2
A2
7L4
8T4
E
0
6
2
4
D
G
13
14
6-
6-
2-
2-
3-
3-
4- 5-
4- 5-
NO
-3
-4
NO
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
7L4
8T4
1-
1-
6-
6-
2-
2-
3-
3-
4- 5-
4- 5-
A45 ... A75-40-00 CA5-10 =
= +
+
5L3 3L2 A1
A2 6T3 4T2
1L1
2T1
43X
NO
31X
NC
21X
NC
13X
NO
NO
14X
NC
22X
NC
32X
NO
44X
Combination 22
E
0
6
2
3
D
G
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
Combination 11
E
0
6
2
2
D
G
A1
A2
A9 ... A26-40-00
A45 ... A75-40-00
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
7L4
8T4 E
0
0
3
6
D
1
E
0
3
4
1
D
1
A9 ... A40-30-01
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
21
NC
NC
22
E
0
3
4
0
D
1
A9 ... A40-30-10
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
13
NO
NO
14
E
0
6
1
9
D
1
A9 ... A16-30-22
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A2
NC NC NO NO
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
A1
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A2
A2
E
0
0
0
9
D
2
A50 ... A110-30-00
A1
A2
A50 ... A110-30-00
1L1
2T1
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2 E
0
0
1
1
D
1
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
13X
21X
14X
22X
A2
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
NC
NO
NO
NC
2
E
0
0
0
8
D
2
A50 ... A110-30-11
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
21X
NC
NC
22X
5L3
6T3
13X
NO
NO
14X E
0
0
1
2
D
1
A50 ... A110-30-11
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
8
3.2-AE and TAE Contactors - D.C. Operated
3.3-BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated
AE, TAE, BC and TBC Contactors
A1
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A2
A3
C
D
L
5
E
0
3
7
6
D
1
AE50 ... AE75-30-00
TAE50/75-30-00
A1
A2
AE50 ... AE110-30-00
TAE50/75-30-00
1L1
2T1
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2 E
0
6
3
0
D
A1
A2
1
2
R5
R6
R3
R4
7
8 E
0
6
3
3
D
AE45/75-22-00
-
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
13X
21X
14X
22X
A3
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
NC
NO
C
C
L
5
NO
NC
E
0
6
2
9
D
AE95/110-30-11
-
A
0
4
5
2
D
1
BC9 ... BC25-30-01
TBC9 ... TBC25-30-01
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1
A2
21
NC
NC
22
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
43
NO
NO
44
31
NC
NC
32
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
BC18-30-22
BC30-30-22
TBC30-30-22
E
0
6
3
7
D
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
21
NC
NC
22 E
0
6
3
5
D
BC9 ... BC25-30-01
TBC9 ...TBC25-30-01
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
13
NO
NO
14 E
0
6
3
4
D

BC9 ... BC25-30-10
TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10
1 R3 R5
2 R4 R6
A1 A2
A3
7
8
C
D
L
5
E
0
3
8
6
D
1
AE45/75-22-00
-
A1
A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A
0
4
5
5
D
1
BC30-30-00
TBC30-30-00
A1
A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A
0
4
5
3
D
1
BC9 ... BC25-40-00
TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00
A1
A2
BC30-30-00
TBC30-30-00
1L1
2T1
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2 E
0
6
3
6
D
A1
A2
1 R3 R5 7
2 R4 R6 8
A
0
4
5
4
D
1
BC9 ... BC25-22-00
TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00
A
0
4
3
9
D
1
G

BC9 ... BC25-30-10 CA5-01 CA5-10 Combination
21
=
=
+ +
+ +
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1
A2
13
NO
NO
14
2-
2-
3-
3-
4-
4-
5-
5-

1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1
A2
13
NO
NO
14
21
22
NC
33
34
NO
-1
-2
NC
-3
-4
NO
A1
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A2
A3
C
C
L
5
E
0
6
2
8
D
AE95/110-30-00
-
A1
A2
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
21X
NC
NC
22X
5L3
6T3
13X
NO
NO
14X
AE50 ... AE110-30-11
TAE50/75-30-11
E
0
6
3
1
D
A
0
4
5
1
D
1
BC9 ... BC25-30-10
TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1
A2
13
NO
NO
14
A1
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
NO NC NC NO
A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A
0
4
4
2
D
1
BC18-30-22
BC30-30-22
TBC30-30-22
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
13X
21X
14X
22X
A3
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
NC
NO
C
D
L
5
NO
NC
E
0
3
7
5
D
1
AE50 ... AE75-30-11
TAE50/75-30-11
A1
A2
BC9 ... BC25-40-00
TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
7L4
8T4 E
0
6
3
8
D
A1
A2
1
2
R5
R6
R3
R4
7
8 E
0
3
5
4
D
1
BC9 ... BC25-22-00
TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
13
NO
NO
14
13
NO
NO
14
33
NO
NO
34
Combination 21
E
0
6
4
0
D
G
A
0
4
3
7
D
1
G
CA5-10 CA5-01 Combination
11
= BC30-30-00
== +
+ +
+
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
1-
1-
2-
2-
3-
3-
4-
4-
-3
-4
NO
-1
-2
NC
A1
1L1
2T1
A2
3L2 5L3
4T2 6T3
13
14
NO
21
22
NC
A1
A2
5L3
6T3
3L2
4T2
1L1
2T1
21
NC
NC
22
13
NO
NO
14
Combination 11
E
0
6
3
9
D
G
A3 A2
1 L1 2 T1
A1
U
35 X 36 X
{
V d.c.
A
0
4
9
8
D
1
G
Coil wiring
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A1 A2
A3
7L4
8T4
C
D
L
5
E
0
3
8
5
D
1
AE45/75-40-00
TAE45/75-40-00
A1
A2
AE45/75-40-00
TAE45/75-40-00
1L1
2T1
3L2
4T2
5L3
6T3
7L4
8T4 E
0
6
3
2
D
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
EH Contactors
EH Contactors - A.C. Operated and D.C. Operated - Standard devices
EH 145 ........................................................... EH 800 - A.C. Operated EH 145 ............................. EH 800 - D.C. Operated
Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
EH 145 ........................................................... EH 800 - A.C. Operated EH 145 ................................. EH 800 - D.C. Operated
Wiring details for 40400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier
CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A
0
4
5
6
D
1
EH ... -30-11
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
A
0
4
5
8
D
1
EH ... -30-11
A1
A2
1
2
5
6
3
4
21
22
13
14
EH ... -30-11
A
0
4
3
2
D
1
A1
A2
1
2
5
6
3
4
21
22
13
14
EH ... -30-11
A
0
4
3
2
D
1
A1
A2
1
2
5
6
3
4
21
22
13
14
31
32
43
44 A
0
4
3
3
D
1
EH ... -30-22
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
32
44
43
31
A
0
4
5
7
D
1
EH ... -30-22
=
= +
+ EH ... -30-22 CAL16-11 C Combination 33
53
54
61
62
3
4
5
6
1
2
21
22
13
14
31
32
43
44
A1
A2
3
4
5
6
1
2
21
22
13
14
31
32
43
44
A1
A2
53
54
61
62 E
0
6
4
3
D
G
A1 A2
-E
-A
Right
hand side
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13 14
21 22
35 36
47 48
Left
hand side
A
1
1
5
4
D
1
G
3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300
-E
-A
Right
hand side
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13 14
21 22
35
A1
A2
36
47 48
Left
hand side
A
1
1
5
6
D
1
G
3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300
R1
A2 A1
13 14
21 22
47 48
3 L2
1 L1
4 T2
2 T1
5 L3 6 T3
35 36
{
V d.c.
A
0
4
7
2
D
3
G
3-pole EH 145, EH 370 ... EH 800
E
0
6
4
1
D
G
=
=
+
+
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
32
44
43
31
62
54
53
61
62
54
53
61
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
32
44
43
31
EH ... -30-22 CAL16-11 C Combination
33
E
0
6
4
2
D
G
=
=
+
+
62
54
53
61
EH ... -30-21 CAL16-11 C Combination
22
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
62
54
53
61
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
E
0
6
4
4
D
G
=
= +
+ EH ... -30-21 CAL16-11 C Combination 22
21
22
3
4
5
6
61
62
47
48
47
48
53
54
1
2
13
14
A1
A2
21
22
3
4
5
6
1
2
13
14
A1
A2
61
62
53
54
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
8
1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3
2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3
R
T
95
96
97
98
TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU,
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU
A
0
4
7
0
D
1
EK Contactors
EK Contactors - A.C. Operated and D.C. Operated - Standard devices
EK 110 ........................................................... EK 550 - A.C. Operated EK 110 .......................................................... EK 550 - D.C. Operated
EK contactors equipped with additionnal auxiliary contacts: see examples for EH contactors page 8/8.
Wiring details for 40400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier
CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3
TA and T
Thermal O/L Relays
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A
0
6
9
1
D
4
EK ... -40-11
A1
A2
1
2
3
4
21
22
5
6
13
14
7
8 A
0
4
3
2
D
3
EK ... -40-11
A1
A2
-E
-A
Right
hand side
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13 14
21 22
35 36
47 48
7/L4 8/T4
Left
hand side
A
1
1
6
0
D
1
G
4-pole EK 110 ... EK 210
1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3
2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3
R
T
95
96
97
98
TA 110 DU, T 200 DU
E
0
6
4
9
D
A1
A2
1
2
3
4
21
22
5
6
13
14
7
8 A
0
4
3
2
D
3
EK ... -40-11
22
14
13
21
1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A
0
6
9
1
D
5
EK ... -40-11
TEST
95 96 97 98
2 4 6
Man/Aut
R
O R
A
0
4
7
1
D
1
TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU,
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU
95 96 97 98
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
R
O R
A
0
4
6
7
D
1
TA 110 DU, T 200 DU
Man/Aut
95 96 97 98
2 4 6
R
O R
A
0
4
6
8
D
1
T 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU
Man/Aut
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
R
T
95
96
97
98
1 3 5
2 4 6
T 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU
A
0
4
6
9
D
1
A1 A2
-E
-A
Right
hand side
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
13 14
21 22
35 36
47 48
7/L4 8/T4
Left
hand side
4-pole EK 110 ... EK 210
A
1
1
5
9
D
1
G
Index Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Star-Delta Starters
Diagrams
Power circuit diagram
A9 to EH300 Contactors EH370 to EH800 Contactors
Control circuit diagrams
A9 to EH550 Contactors EH700 and EH800 Contactors
remote control remote control
Controlgear Selection Guide: see page 2/ 31
Ordering Details
G Contactors ................................................................ Section 2 G Accessories ............................................................ Section 4
G Contactor Relays ..................................................... Section 3 G Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM2 / (Y)
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM3 / ( )
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM1 / (L)
L1 L2 L3
W2
V2
U2
W1
V1
U1
W2
V2
U2
W1
V1
U1
1 3 5
2 4 6
E
0
5
1
4
D
1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KT
t1 t1+t2
9
6
O
R
R
FR1
U
s
U
s
9
5
I
O
A
1
A
2
KA9
A
1
A
2
1
3
KM2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
6
1
5
1
8
O
I
96
13
21
E
0
5
1
3
D
A
1
A
2
KM1 KM3
1
3
1
4
1
1
4
KM1
KM3 KM2
A
1
A
2
1
3
1
4
KA9
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM2 / (Y)
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM3 / ( )
1 3 5
2 4 6
KM1 / (L)
L1 L2 L3
W1
V1
U1
W2
V2
U2
W1
V1
U1
W2
V2
U2
1 3 5
2 4 6
E
0
8
9
8
D
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
Y
KM2
L
KM2 KM1 KM3 KM2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
O
I
O
R R
FR1
O
I
96
24
2
3
KM1
2
4
KM3 : 5/L3
Us
Us
N
KM3 : 3/L2
1
5
1
6
A
1
A
2
KT
t1+t2 t1
1
8
9
5
9
6
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
KM3 KM1
E
1
1
2
8
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
Dimensions
G Contactors
G Contactor Relays
G Thermal O/L Relays
G Accessories
Only major dimensions are quoted on the drawings contained in this section.
Contents
Dimensions for Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays and with Accessories
A 9, A 12, A 16 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................... 9/ 2
A 26, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................................... 9/ 4
A 30, A 40, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ................................................................ 9/ 6
A 50 (3P), A 63, A 75 (3P), + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................................... 9/ 8
A 45, A 50 (4P), A 75 (4P), + Accessories ........................................................................ 9/ 10
A 95, A 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................................................. 9/ 12
AE 50 (3P), AE 63, AE 75 (3P), TAE 50 (3P), TAE 75 (3P) + Accessories + O/L Relay .. 9/ 16
AE 45, AE 50 (4P), AE 75 (4P), TAE 45, TAE 50 (4P), TAE 75 (4P) + Accessories ........ 9/ 18
AE 95, AE 110, TAE 95, TAE 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ......................... 9/ 20
AF ..................................................................................................................................... 9/ 22
GA 75, GAE 75 ................................................................................................................. 9/ 23
UA, UA..-R ............................................................................................................... 9/ 24, 9/ 25
EH 145, EH 175, EH (L) 210, EH 260, EH (L) 300,
EH 370, EH 550, EH 700, EH 800 ........................................................................ 9/ 28 ... 9/ 34
EK 110, EK (L) 150, EK 175, EK (L) 210, EK 370, EK 550 .................................. 9/ 28 ... 9/ 34
EH 145, EH 175, EH 210, EH 260, EH 300
EH 370, EH 550, EH 700, EH 800 + Thermal O/L Relay ...................................... 9/ 38 ... 9/ 40
Dimensions for Contactor Relays and Mini Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays
and with Accessories.
N ......................................................................................................................................... 9/ 2
BC , TBC , KC , TKC + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................... 9/ 14
B 6, BC 6, B 7, BC 7, K 6, KC 6 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................... Section 6
Dimensions for Thermal O/L Relays
T 7 DU ...................................................................................................................... Section 6
TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU ........................................................................................................ 9/ 41
TA 42 DU + DB 80, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU + DB 80, TA 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU ....... 9/ 42
Dimensions for Accessories
RA 30 Interface Relay ........................................................................................................ 9/26
CB 5 Impulse Contact Block .............................................................................................. 9/26
RC, RT and RV Surge Suppressors .................................................................................. 9/26
BL 5-L Lamp Holder ........................................................................................................... 9/26
BL 5-F Fuse Holder ........................................................................................................... 9/26
LC Flat Pin Terminal Blocks ............................................................................................... 9/27
TE5S Electronic Timer ....................................................................................................... 9/27
LK 75 Terminals for Control Lead Connections ................................................................. 9/27
LW 110 Enlargement Pieces ............................................................................................. 9/27
BSH and BSD Connections for EH Contactors (Reversing ; Star-delta) ................. 9/ 35, 9/ 36
LT Shrouds for EH and EK Contactors ............................................................................. 9/ 37
Index Main Summary
Main Summary
9/2
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 9, A 12 and A 16 Contactors
A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N
+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N
+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N
+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer
Drilling Plan A 9, A 12, A 16, N
+ WB 75-A On-Position Latch
(1) Note : no recommended distance to earth applicable to "N" contactor relays.
68
74
5.5
4 10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
0
9
D
44
7
4
E
0
1
0
4
D
4.5
4.5
4.5
35
6
0
5
0
E
0
1
0
1
D
(M4)
44
7
4
E
0
7
5
7
D
44
7
4
E
0
1
0
2
D
44
7
4
E
0
7
5
5
D
2
1
41.5
68
74
5.5
4 10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
5
6
D
44
7
4
E
0
1
0
6
D
44
7
4
E
0
1
1
3
D
68
127
5.5
4
10
(1)
4
7
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
1
4
D
34
4
68
145
5.5
4
10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
5
8
D
68
74
5.5
4 10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
0
3
D
68
4
7
100.5
5.5
4
10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
0
7
D
68
4
7
107
5.5
4
10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
0
5
D
44 12
7
4
E
0
1
0
8
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 9, A 12 and A 16 Contactors
A 9, A 12, A 16, N Drilling Plan
+ VE 5-1 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit
A 9, A 12, A 16, N Drilling Plan
+ VM 5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit
A 9, A 12, A 16 Drilling Plan
+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
*
For TA 25 DU 32 only
(1) Note : no recommended distance to earth applicable to "N" contactor relays.
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
6
0
D
95
1
4
*
1
6
10
74
4
103
7
4
E
0
1
1
5
D
103
7
4
E
0
1
1
1
D
6
0
4.5 4.5
4.5
35 59
5
0
(M4)
E
0
1
1
0
D
1
6
0
4.5 4.5
4.5
35 59
5
0
(M4)
E
0
1
1
0
D
1
4.5
4.5
4.5
35
6
0
5
0
E
0
1
0
1
D
(M4)
68
74.5
5.5
4 10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
1
6
D
68
74
5.5
4 10
(1)
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
1
2
D
44
7
4

1
3
3

E
0
7
5
9
D
Index Section
Section
9/4
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 26 Contactor - A.C. Operated
A 26 A 26
A 26 A 26
A 26 A 26
Drilling Plan A 26
+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
54
9
0
E
0
1
2
0
D
93.6
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
2
5
D
4
7
126.3
9 10
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
2
1
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
2
2
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
1
8
D
93.6
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
1
9
D
4
7
10
119.8
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
2
3
D
54
9
0
E
0
7
6
3
D
9
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
6
4
D
164.3
34
4
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
54
9
0
12
7
4
E
0
1
2
4
D
93.6
9
6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
6
2
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
3
1
D
4
7
146.3
9 10
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
3
2
D
54
9
0
E
0
7
6
1
D
2
1
41.5
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 26 Contactor - A.C. Operated
A 26 Drilling Plan
A 26 Drilling Plan
A 26 Drilling Plan
*
For TA 25 DU 32 only
123
9
0
E
0
1
2
7
D
123
9
0
E
0
1
2
9
D
4.5 45
7
0
4.2
4.5
8
0
69
E
0
1
2
6
D
(M4)
4.5 45
7
0
4.2
4.5
8
0
69
E
0
1
2
6
D
(M4)
93.6
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
2
8
D
93.6
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
3
0
D
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
54
9
0

1
4
7

E
0
7
6
5
D
109.4
1
4
*
15.4
93.6
9
6
10
4
E
0
7
6
6
D

3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
Index Section
Section
9/6
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 30 and A 40 Contactors - A.C. Operated
54
9
0
E
0
1
3
3
D
108.3
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
3
4
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
3
7
D
134.5
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
4
7
10
E
0
1
3
8
D
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
54
9
0
E
0
7
6
9
D
34
4
9
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
7
0
D
179
54
9
0
12
7
4
E
0
1
3
9
D
2
1
41.5
54
9
0
E
0
7
6
7
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
3
5
D
4
7
10
141
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
3
6
D
161
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
10
4
7
E
0
1
4
5
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
4
4
D
108.3
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
4
0
D
108.3
9
6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
6
8
D
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
Drilling Plan A 30, A 40
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 30 and A 40 Contactors - A.C. Operated
A 30, A 40 Drilling Plan
A 30, A 40 Drilling Plan
A 30 Drilling Plan
* For TA 25 DU 32 only
A 40 Drilling Plan
108.3
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
4
3
D
108.3
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
4
7
D
4.5 45
7
0
4.2
4.5
8
0
69
E
0
1
2
6
D
(M4)
4.5 45
7
0
4.2
4.5
8
0
69
E
0
1
2
6
D
(M4)
123
9
0
E
0
1
4
6
D
123
9
0
E
0
1
4
2
D
54
1
4
9
.
5
9
0
E
0
7
7
1
D
54
1
5
5
.
5
9
0
E
0
7
7
3
D
108.3
9
10
9.7
103.7
6

3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
24
1
4
*
E
0
7
7
2
D
112.8
1.8 6
E
0
7
7
4
D
108.3
9
10

3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
24
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
Index Section
Section
9/8
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 50, A 63 and A 75 3-Pole Contactors - A.C. Operated
A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75
A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75
A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75
Drilling Plan A 50, A 63, A 75
70
1
1
0
E
0
1
5
1
D
34
4
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
178.5
E
0
7
7
8
D
70
1
1
0
E
0
7
7
7
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
6
5
D
70
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
3
D
70
1
1
0
E
0
1
5
3
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
5
0
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
7
7
6
D
70
1
1
0
E
0
1
5
8
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
160.4
108
4
7
E
0
1
5
9
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
140.3
4
7
108
E
0
1
5
4
D
133.9
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
4
7
E
0
1
5
2
D
70 12
1
1
0
7
4
E
0
1
4
1
D
2
1
41.5
70
1
1
0
E
0
7
7
5
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
155
1
1
0
E
0
1
5
6
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
5
7
D
70
1
1
0
1
7
5
.
5
E
0
1
7
0
D
6.5 6
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
3
114
6
E
0
1
8
6
D
60
9
0
1
0
0
5
5
5
85 5
(M6)
E
0
1
5
5
D
6.2
Index Section
Section
9/ 10
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75
A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75
A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75
Drilling Plan A 45, A 50, A 75
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
E
0
1
7
3
D
34
4
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
190
E
0
7
8
2
D
92
1
1
0
E
0
7
8
1
D
152
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
4
7
E
0
1
7
7
D
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
145.5
4
7
E
0
1
7
5
D
82
9
0
5 5
1
0
0
E
0
1
7
1
D
(M6)
6.2
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2 119.5
E
0
1
7
9
D
92
1
1
0
E
0
1
7
2
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
E
0
7
8
0
D
2
1
41.5
92
1
1
0
E
0
7
7
9
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
172
4
7
E
0
1
8
4
D
92
1
1
0
E
0
1
8
3
D
92
1
1
0
E
0
1
7
6
D
92
1
1
0
E
0
1
7
4
D
92 12
1
1
0
7
4
E
0
1
7
8
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
199
1
1
0
E
0
1
8
1
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2 119.5
E
0
1
8
2
D
5 82
9
0
5 107
1
0
0
E
0
1
8
0
D
(M6)
6.2
Index Section
Section
9/ 12
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A95 and A110 Contactors - A.C. Operated
A95, A110 A95, A110
A95, A110 A95, A110
A95, A110
+ RA 5 Interface Relay
Drilling Plan
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
4
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
8
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
5
D
90
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
6
D
150
6.5
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
4
7
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
9
D
90
123.5
6
E
0
7
9
2
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
12 90
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
7
D
7
4
90
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
3
D
123.5
6
E
0
7
9
0
D
156,5
6.5
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
4
7
2
1
41.5
1
4
8
E
0
7
9
1
D
90
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
A95 and A110 Contactors - A.C. Operated
A95, A110 Drilling Plan
+ TA110 DU Thermal O/L Relay
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
90
2
1
4
1
4
8
E
0
8
2
6
D
123.5
4
114
6
6
E
0
8
2
7
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
6.5
2
5
8
1
4
8
90
E
0
8
2
8
D
131
123.5
6
6
E
0
8
2
9
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
6.5
5
195
1
4
8
E
0
7
9
3
D
123.5
6
E
0
7
9
4
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
1
3
6
78
E
0
7
9
5
D
1
2
6
78
183
6.2
(M6)
6.2
(M6)
Index Section
Section
9/ 14
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated
1-Stack (T)KC, (T)BC 9 (T)BC 30
Types B H P P1 P2 P3
KC, TKC 4-pole
BC 9, TBC 9 44 81 114 94.5 108 15
BC 16, TBC 16
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 120 96.5 114 20
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 126 98 120 20
* 3-Pole Contactors
2-Stack (T)KC, BC 18 (T)BC 30
Types B H P P1 P2 P3
KC, TKC 8-pole 44 81 147 94.5 129.7 15
BC 18* 44 81 153 96 135.7 20
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7 20
* 3-Pole Contactors
(T)KC, BC 9 (T)BC 30
Types B H P P1 P2
KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 147 94.5 129.7
BC 25 54 81 153 96.5 136
BC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7
* 3-Pole Contactors
KC, BC 9 BC 30
Types B H P P1 P2
KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 185 94.5 157
BC 25 54 81 191 96.5 163
BC 30* 54 90 197 98 169
* 3-Pole Contactors
4
7
P2
5
9,5
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
0
7
D
H
B
E
0
8
0
6
D
H
B
26
E
0
8
0
8
D
34
4
P2
5
9,5
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
0
9
D
H
B
E
0
8
0
4
D
4
7
P2
5
9,5
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
0
5
D
H
B
E
0
8
0
2
D
H
B
E
0
7
9
8
D
5
9,5
P1
P
P2
P3
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
7
9
9
D
E
0
8
0
0
D
H
B
(T) KC,(T) BC 9 (T) BC 30
Types B H P P1 P2
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9
BC 16, TBC 16 44 81 140.5 94.5 128.5
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 146.5 96.5 134.5
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 152.5 98 140.5
* 3-Pole Contactors
KC, BC 9 BC 30
+ TP Pneumatic Timer
Types B H P P1 P2
KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 167 94.5 133.5
BC 25 54 81 173 96.5 139.5
BC 30* 54 90 179 98 145.5
* 3-Pole Contactors
5
9,5
P1
P
P2
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
4
7
E
0
8
0
3
D
4
7
P2
5
9,5
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
0
1
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)KC, (T)BC 9 (T)BC 30
+ VBC 30 Mechanical Interlock Unit
Types B H P P1
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9,
BC 16, TBC 16 99 81 128 94.5
BC 25, TBC 25 109 81 134 96.5
BC 30*, TBC 30* 109 90 140 98
* 3-Pole Contactors
Drilling Plan
For contactors with VBC 30 mechanical interlock unit
KC, TKC, BC 9, BC 16, TBC 9, TBC 16 BC 25, TBC 25, BC 30, TBC 30
Types H1 H2
BC 25, TBC 25 60 70
BC 30*, TBC 30* 70 80
* 3-Pole Contactors
1-Stack Contactor 2-Stack Contactor
+ Thermal O/L Relay + Thermal O/L Relay
* For TA 25 DU 32 only
Contactors + O/L Relays B B1 B2 F F1 H1 H2 H3 P P1 1-St P2 2-St P3 P4
BC 9/BC 16 + TA 25 DU 44 8 44 9.5 5 138 81 59.7 108 114 147 130 42
BC 18* + TA 25 DU 44 8 44 9.5 5 138 81 59.7 114 120 153 131.4 43.4
BC 25 + TA 25 DU 54 18 44 9.5 5 139.2 81 60.8 114 120 153 132 44
BC 30* + TA 25 DU 54 8 44 9.5 5 148.1 90 65.6 120 126 159 133.5 45.5
* 3-Pole Contactors
H
B
E
0
8
1
0
D
5
9,5
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
1
1
D
35
4.5
7
0
6
0
5 35 20
E
0
8
1
2
D
H
1
H
2
4.5
45
5
10 45
E
0
8
1
3
D
BB
H
1
H
2
B2
B1
E
0
8
1
4
D
P3
1
4
*
P4
6
E
0
8
1
5
D
F1
F
P1
P
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
H
3
P3
1
4
*
P4
6
E
0
8
1
6
D
F1
F
P2
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
4
7
Drilling Plans (for side by side mounting - see recommendations for BC.. types pages 2/14, 2/17 ; TBC.. page 2/24 ; KC.. page 3/5 ; TKC.. page 3/8).
BC 9, BC 16, BC 18, KC 4 or 8-pole BC 25, TBC 25 BC 30, TBC 30
TBC 9, TBC 16, TKC 4 or 8-pole
6
0
7
0
4.5
45 4.5 4.5
E
0
8
1
8
D
7
0
8
0
4.5
45 4.5 4.5
E
0
8
1
9
D
E
0
8
1
7
D
6
0
7
0
4.5
35 4.5 4.5
Index
Sommaire Chapitre
Section
Section
9/ 16
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 50, AE 63, AE 75,
TAE 50 and TAE 75 3-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 (T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75
+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
Drilling Plan
82
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
6
D
133.9
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
4
7
E
0
1
5
2
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
82
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
9
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
160.4
108
4
7
E
0
1
5
9
D
82
1
1
0
E
0
7
9
6
D
34
4
6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
178.5
E
0
7
9
7
D
82 12
1
1
0
7
4
E
0
1
6
1
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
5
0
D
82
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
4
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
140.3
4
7
108
E
0
1
5
4
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
6
5
D
82
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
2
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 50, AE 63, AE 75,
TAE 50 and TAE 75 3-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 Drilling PLan
(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 Drilling Plan
60
9
0
1
0
0
5
5
5
85 5
(M6)
E
0
1
5
5
D
6.2
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2108
E
0
1
6
8
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
82
1
1
0
E
0
8
2
0
D
1
7
5
.
5
6.5 6
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
3
114
6
E
0
1
8
6
D
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
7
D
179
Index Section
Section
9/18
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
TAE 45, TAE 50 and TAE 75 4-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
Drilling Plan
82
9
0
5 5
1
0
0
E
0
1
7
1
D
(M6)
6.2
104
1
1
0
E
0
1
8
5
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
E
0
1
7
3
D
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
145.5
4
7
E
0
1
7
5
D
104
1
1
0
E
0
1
8
7
D
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2 119.5
E
0
1
7
9
D
152
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
4
7
E
0
1
7
7
D
104
1
1
0
E
0
1
8
9
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
172
4
7
E
0
1
8
4
D
104
1
1
0
E
0
1
9
6
D
104
1
1
0
E
0
8
2
1
D
34
4
6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
190
E
0
8
2
2
D
104
1
1
0
7
4
12
E
0
1
9
1
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
TAE 45, TAE 50, and TAE 75 4-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 Drilling Plan
223
1
1
0
E
0
1
9
4
D
6.5 6
10
4
10 7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2 119.5
E
0
1
9
5
D
5 82
9
0
5 107
1
0
0
E
0
1
8
0
D
(M6)
6.2
Index Section
Section
9/20
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 95, AE 110, TAE 95, TAE 110 Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 (T)AE 95, (T)AE 110
(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 (T)AE 95, (T)AE 110
Drilling Plan
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
4
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
102
E
0
8
2
4
D
1
4
8
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
6
D
150
6.5
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
4
7
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
8
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
102
1
4
8
E
0
8
2
5
D
102 12
1
4
8
E
0
8
3
3
D
7
4
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
E
0
8
2
3
D
102
1
4
8
123.5
6
E
0
7
9
0
D
156,5
6.5
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
4
7
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AE 95, AE 110, TAE 95, TAE 110 Contactors - D.C. Operated
(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 Drilling Plan
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
8
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
90 12
2
1
4
1
4
8
E
0
8
3
0
D
123.5
4
114
6
6
E
0
8
2
7
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
6.5
2
5
8
1
4
8
90 12
E
0
8
3
1
D
131
123.5
6
6
E
0
8
2
9
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
6.5
5
E
0
8
3
2
D
90
195 12 12
1
4
8
1
3
6
78
E
0
7
9
5
D
1
2
6
78
183
6.2
(M6)
6.2
(M6)
Index Section
Section
9/22
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. Operated
AF 50 AF 75, 3-pole Drilling plan
(1) AF 50-30-00 AF 75-30-00
(2) AF 50-30-11 AF 75-30-11
AF 45 and AF 75, 4-pole Drilling plan
AF 95 and AF 110, 3-pole Drilling Plan
(1) AF 95-30-00 - AF 110-30-00
(2) AF 95-30-11 - AF 110-30-11
70 (1)
82 (2)
1
1
0
7
4
E
0
1
4
9
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
5
0
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
92
1
1
0
E
0
1
7
2
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
119.5
E
0
1
7
3
D
82
9
0
5 5
1
0
0
E
0
1
7
1
D
(M6)
6.2
90 (1)
102 (2)
1
4
8
E
0
2
8
0
D
123.5
117 20
6
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
E
0
2
8
1
D
5
1
2
6
5
78
E
0
2
1
5
D
(M6)
6.2
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors
GA 75 - A.C. Operated Drilling Plan
GAE 75 - D.C. Operated Drilling Plan
70
1
1
0
E
0
8
3
4
D
1
1
1
1
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
82
E
0
8
3
6
D
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
72
72
E
0
8
3
5
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
72
72
E
0
8
3
5
D
Index Section
Section
9/24
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
UA Contactors
UA 26 Drilling Plan
UA 30 Drilling Plan
UA 50, UA 63, UA 75 Drilling Plan
UA 50, UA 63, UA 75-30-00 UA 50, UA 63, UA 75-30-11
UA 95, UA 110 Drilling Plan
UA 95, UA 110-30-00 UA 95, UA 110-30-11
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
93.6
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
1
9
D
54
9
0
E
0
1
1
8
D
108.3
9 6.3
4 10
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
1
3
4
D
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
54
9
0
E
0
1
3
3
D
70
1
1
0
E
0
1
6
3
D
6.5 6
10
4
10
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x
1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
108
E
0
1
5
0
D
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
70 12
1
1
0
7
4
E
0
1
4
1
D
90
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
3
D
12 90
1
4
8
E
0
7
8
7
D
7
4
123.5
6
E
0
7
8
8
D
20
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
10
6.5
1
2
6
1
3
6
78
6.2
E
0
2
1
5
D
9
(M6)
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
+
1
0
68
4
7
105.5
5.5
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
9
0
D
1
4
0

4
7
87,3
125
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
9
3
D
+
1
0
1
4
0

102
9
4
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
E
0
8
9
5
D
4
7
1
4
0

5
139.5
6
10
4
7
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
3
3
5

m
m

x

1
5

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
139
4
7
5
1
6
0

101.4
E
0
8
9
7
D
UA 16 .. -R Drilling plan
UA 50 .. -R ... UA 75 .. -R Drilling plan
44
7
4
E
0
8
9
1
D
54
9
0
E
0
8
9
2
D
54
9
0
E
0
8
9
4
D
70
1
1
0
1
1
4
E
0
8
9
6
D
Dimensions (in mm)
UA .. -R Contactors
4.5
4.5
4.5
35
6
0
5
0
E
0
1
0
1
D
(M4)
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
4.2
4.5 4.5
45
7
0
8
0
E
0
1
1
7
D
(M4)
60
9
0
5
5
5
5
E
0
1
4
8
D
6.2
(M6)
Index Section
Section
9/26
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
RA 30 Interface Relay, Lamp Holder, Fuse Holder,
Impulse Contact Blocks and Surge Suppressor Blocks
BC Contactors, KC Contactor Relays 1-Stack - D.C. Operated
+ RA 30 Interface Relay
Types B B1 H H1 P P1 P2 P3 P4
KC
BC 9 44 3 81 110 114 94.5 108 15 64
BC 16
BC 25 54 3 81 110 120 96.5 114 20 62
BC 30* 54 3 90 120 126 98 120 20 60
* 3-Pole Contactors.
BL 5-F, BL 5-L CB 5
Fuse Holder, Lamp Holder Blocks Impulse Contact Block
Surge Suppressor Blocks
1
5
L1
1
0
20.5
L
E
0
8
4
3
D
E
0
8
4
4
D
5
9,5
P1
P4
P2
P3
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
P
E
0
8
4
0
D
9.8
E
0
8
5
5
D
27.8
3
6
E
0
8
5
6
D
E
0
8
4
1
D
9.8 23.2
3
6
E
0
8
4
2
D
The add-on block does not increase the
contactor overall dimensions
1
5
57.5
175
3
0
E
0
8
4
5
D
block
Types L L1
RT 7 85 200
RV-BC6 135 235
RT 7, RV-BC 6 RT 5, RV 5, RC 5 RC-EH
H
B
H

1
B1 B1
E
0
8
3
9
D
30
2
0
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Other Contactor Accessories
98
41
15 6.5
1
8
9
E
0
8
3
8
D
1
7
4
2
7
.
2
1
3
.
2
43.1
10.1 10.1 10.1
14.8
1.6
1
8
.
2
A

2
7
7
D
2
9
.
6
1
3
.
2
40
13.5 13.5
14.8
1.6
1
8
.
6
1 1
A

2
7
8
D
23
E
0
8
4
8
D
E
0
8
4
9
D
65
75
3
5

m
m

E
N

5
0
0
2
2
4
5
8
5
13
1
3
E
0
8
5
7
D
A 95 and A 110 Contactors LK 75 A
+ LW 110 Enlargement Pieces Terminals for Control Lead Connections
LK 75 A1
Terminals for Control Lead Connections
Fig. 1 Fig. 4
Fig. 2 Fig. 5
Fig. 3 Fig. 6
Being Prepared
Faston 6.4/2.8
E
0
8
5
1
D
4
.8
2
7
.
2
1
3
.
2
50.3 14.8
1.6
1
8
.
2
12.5 12.5 12.5
A

2
7
9
D
Faston 6.4/2.8
4
.8 E
0
8
5
0
D
E
0
8
3
7
D
19
13
1
1
E
1
1
0
1
D
E
0
9
0
0
D
19
Designation Kit
LC 16-B
2 pieces fig. 1
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
2 pieces fig. 1
LC 26-B2 + 2 pieces fig. 2
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
LC 25-B1
2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
LC 16-A
2 pieces fig. 4
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
LC 26-A1 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
LC 26-A2 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 4
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
Index Section
Section
9/ 28
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
P
P1
T1
A A
C
D
B
B1
G
F
K1
C1
H1
For M6
H
E
T
K2
E
H
P
P1
T1
T
K2
H1 C1
F
pour M6
C
K1
G
A A
D
B
EH 800 - Main pole terminals
Dimensions (in mm)
EH (L), EK (L) Contactors
EH 145 Contactors Drilling Plan
P1
EH 175 to EH 300, EHL 210 and EHL 300 Contactors Drilling Plan
9
1

A

1
2
3
9
1

A

1
1
9
9
1

A

1
2
1
* * for d.c. coil only
A
_
1
2
2
PE = M10 earthing screw
EH 370 to EH 800 Contactors Drilling Plan
*
E
9
1

A

1
1
5
A
_
1
2
0
A
_
1
1
5
G K1
34.5
A
_
6
6
2
D
9
1

A

1
1
5
EK 110 to EK 210, EKL 150 and EKL 210 Contactors Drilling Plan
E 5.2
(M5)
4.2
(M4)
5.2
(M5)
6.2
(M6)
6.2
M6
4.2
(M4)
6.2
(M6)
6.2
(M6)
6.2
(M6)
* for d.c. coil only
6.2
(M6)
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
EK 370 and EK 550 Contactors Drilling Plan
Dimensions (in mm)
EH (L) and EK (L) Contactors
Dimensions
Type A B B1 B2 C C1 C2 D E F G H H1 K1 K2 P P1 T T1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) min. 8)
F1 F1=F
EH 145 11 124 151 110 120 125 42 127 136 147 11 40 42 20 140 171 10 143 91 19 4
EH 175 12 136 120 140 137 47 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 210 12 136 120 140 137 47 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 260 10 176 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 300 10 176 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 370 11 198 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 550 11 198 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 700 9 244 270 220 200 246 82 246 254 263 11 40 82 40 223 294 20 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 800 9 244 270 220 200 246 82 276 254 263 11 40 92 50 223 344 20 226 140 23 7) 6
EK 110 10.5 165 136 120 140 166 43 177 187 6.6 40 41 15 156 156 7.5 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 150 10.5 165 136 120 140 168 42 168 177 187 11 40 42 20 156 172 10 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 175 12 201 176 160 140 202 67 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 210 12 201 176 160 140 202 67 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 370 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
EK 550 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
1) Dimension for extra auxiliary contact block.
2) Minimum distance for contactors mounted side by side. Makes space for two auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
3) C2 distance makes F1 = F.
4) Includes space for three auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
5) Includes space for four auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
6) Screw, nut and washer included.
7) Damping elements are included.
8) Minimum distance to remove coil.
Notes :
Values quoted for C2 and F1 are not applicable for D.C. operated contactors EH 145 - EH 370 - EH 550 - EH 700 - EH 800 - EK 370 - EK 550.
For a same rating EH and EHL contactors dimensions are the same.
For a same rating EK and EKL contactors dimensions are the same.
M 4
B
B1
C
1
H
1
B2 *
C
G
K
1 F
D
A
_
6
9
1
D
1
G
* for d.c. coil only
6.2
(M6)
E
T
P
P1 T1
H
PE
A
_
6
9
1
D
2
F
C
C2
C
1
F1
A
_
6
9
1
D
3
F
6.2
(M6)
PE = M10 earthing screw
Index Section
Section
9/ 30
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Plate Interlocked Contactors Dimensions
B C C1 D F H P P1
PN 145-21 EH 145 EH 145 280 260 160 6.8 145.0 180 148 96
PN 210-22 EH 175/210 EH 175/210 340 320 180 6.8 156.0 200 173 108
EH 175/210 EH 145 340 320 180 6.8 150.5 200 173/150 108/98
PN 300-22 EH 260/300 EH 260/300 430 400 200 8.0 194.5 230 185 114
EH 260 EH 175/210 430 400 200 8.0 175.5 230 185/178 114/113
Dimensions (in mm)
3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock
EH 145 to EH 300 Contactors, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting
Contactor Types Dimensions
C2 C3 C4 C5 -
EH 175/210 EH 175/210 120 140 36 120
EH 260/300 EH 260/300 160 140 34.5 160
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
EH 175/210 EH 145 120 140 35.5 110 120
EH 260/300 EH 175/210 160 140 35.5 120 140
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
EH 145 EH 145 110 120 35 110 120
Drilling Plans for mounting without plate
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions
Type B B1 C C1 C3 D1 F G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 145 160 167 140 120 6.6 41 15 140 156 10 202 97 4
EH 175, EH 210 180 178 162 142 11 45 20 160 198 10 225 109 5
EH 260, EH 300 244 232 218 135 11 62 25 165 207 12.5 241 119 5
EH 370, EH 550 240 240 210 255 11 67 25 285 272 12.5 296 146.5 6
EH 700 290 290 260 255 11 82 40 285 294 20 296 146.5 6
EH 800 290 290 260 255 34.5 11 92 50 285 344 20 296 146.5 6
Dimensions (in mm)
3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Latch
Dimensions
Type B C C1 C3 D1 E F F1 G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 370...550 480 450 265 11 40 67 240 25 295 272 12.5 275.5 189.5 6
EH 700 580 550 265 11 40 82 290 40 295 294 20 275.3 189.5 6
EH 800 580 550 265 34.5 11 40 92 290 50 295 344 20 275.5 189.5 6
EH 370 to EH 800 Contactors, with Mechanical Interlock, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting
EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors with Mechanical Latch
EH 800 Main pole
Terminals
A
6
6
2
D
(M6)
EH 800 Main pole
Terminals
A
6
6
2
D
H
1
E
3
P
P1 T1
F F1 G
B
C
C
1
H
D1 D= 7
K1
(M6)
A
6
6
0
D
A
6
6
1
D
G K1
34.5
G K1
34.5
Index Section
Section
9/ 32
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
EH 145 to EH 210 Contactors - Vertical Mounting
Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C1 C2 H P P1
Interlock up down min max min max
VHV 145 EH 145 M EH 145 135.5 66 395 120 120 357 686 143 91
VHV 210 EH 175/210 M EH 175/210 147 73 375 140 140 411 713 168 103
VHV 300 EH 260/300 M EH 260/300 190 82 375 140 140 429 722 178 107
1)
VHV 210A EH 175/210 M EH 145 147/135.5 69.5 385 140 120 384 699.5 168/145
2)
103/93
2)
2) Spacers are included for EH 145 contactors.
Drilling Plan fig. A
Dimensions
Contactors C
min
C
max
C1 C2 C3
EH 145 EH 145 66 395 120 120 110
EH 175/210 EH 175/210 73 375 140 140 120
C
1
C
C3
M5
EH 145
M6
EH 175,
EH 210
C
2
E
0
8
5
2
D
C
1
C
C3
M6
M6
C
2
E
0
8
5
3
D
C
1
C
C3
C2
M6
M5
C
2
E
0
8
5
4
D
Drilling Plan fig. B
Dimensions
Contactors C
min
C
max
C1 C2 C3
EH 260/300 EH 260/300 82 375 140 140 160
Drilling Plan fig. C
Dimensions
Contactors C
min
C
max
C1 C2 C3
EH 175/210 EH 145 69.5 385 140 120 120/110
Fig. B
Fig. C
Fig. A
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Dimensions
Mechanical Interlock For Contactors B C C1 D F H P P1
PN 210-22 EK 110 EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 EK 150 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 186.5 200 159 107
PN 300-22 EK 175/210 EK 175/210 430 400 200 6.8 223.5 230 182 117
VK 210 A EK 175/210 EK 110 390 360 200 6.8 210.5 230 182.5 117.5
EK 175/210 EK 150 390 360 200 6.8 209 230 182.5 117.5
VH 800 EK 370/500 EK 370/500 580 550 265 7.0 240 295 275.5 189.5
EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting
Index Section
Section
9/ 34
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C C1 C2 H H P P1
Interlock min. max. min. max.
VKV 150 EK 110 EK 110 178 31 375 140 140 327 671 154 102
EK 150 EK 150 178 47 375 140 140 359 687 154 102
EK 150 EK 110 178 39 375 140 140 343 679 154 102
VHV 300 EK 175 EK 175 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175
1)
110
1)
EK 210 EK 210 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175
1)
110
1)
EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors - Vertical Mounting
Dimensions
C C C1 C2 C3
min. max.
EK 110 EK 110 31 375 140 140 120
EK 150 EK 150 47 375 140 140 120
EK 150 EK 110 39 375 140 140 120
EK 175 EK 175 73 375 140 140 160
EK 210 EK 210 73 375 140 140 160
Drilling Plan
C
1
C
C3
M6
M6
C
2
E
0
8
5
3
D
A
_
8
7
2
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Connections for Reversing Contactors
EH 145 to EH 800, 3 Pole Contactors on Plate - Horizontal Mounting
Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3
2)
C4
EH 145 EH 145 120 110 35 110
2) Includes space for mechanical interlock.
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3
2)
C4
EH 175/210 EH 175/210 140 120 36 120
EH 260/300 EH 260/300 140 160 34.5 160
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 200 170 70 170
EH 700 EH 700 200 220 70 220
EH 800 EH 800 200 220 70 220
KM1 KM2 C1 C2
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 265 450
EH 700 EH 700 265 550
EH 800 EH 800 265 550
Connections Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 B H P B1 H1 P1
BSH 145 EH 145 EH 145 269 171 143
BSH 210 EH 175/210 EH 175/210 292 198 168
BSH 300 EH 260/300 EH 260/300 376.5 207 178
1)

BSH 550 EH 370/550 EH 370/550 438 287 226
1)

BSH 700 EH 700 EH 700 534 294 226
1)

BSH 800 EH 800 EH 800 534 344 226
1)

BSH 550 EH 370/550 EH 370/550 480 295 275.5
BSH 700 EH 700 EH 700 580 295 275.5
BSH 800 EH 800 EH 800 580 295 275.5
Drilling Plan for mounting without plate
KM1
KM1 KM2
KM1 KM2
KM2 KM1
KM2
Index Section
Section
9/ 36
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Connections for Star-Delta Starters
Dimensions
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 B H P
BED 145 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 343 171 143
BSD 210 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 417.5441.5 198 168
BSD 210 EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 429453 198 168
BSD 300 EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 517.5531.5 207 178
1)
BSD 550 EH 370 EH 370 EH 260 665 287 226
1)
BSD 550 EH 550 EH 550 EH 260 665 287 226
1)
BSD 700 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 776 294 226
1)
BSD 800 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 776 344 226
1)
Drilling Plans
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 3) C4 C5 4) C6 C7
EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 140 120 1741 120 36 120 140
EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 140 160 2337 160 35.5 120 140
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 EH 260 200 170 70 170 70 160 140
EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
3) Includes space for 1 to 4 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 140 120 1741 120 35.5 110 120
EH 145 EH 145 A 110 120 110 1737 110 15-37 78 128
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 KM3 KM2
6
6
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Shrouds for Main Terminals
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors and EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
Shrouds For contactors Dimensions
Type H2 H3 P2 K2 K3 B4
LT 210-EL EH 145 293 193 143 48 13 124
LT 210-EL EH 175, EH 210 320 220 156 48 13 124
LT 210-EC EH 145 193 170 75 127
LT 210-EC EH 175, EH 210 220 183 75 127
A* B* C* A* B* C*
LT 300-E EH 260, EH 300 399 159 184 209 47 72 97 178
LT 550-E EH 370, EH 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 201
LT 700-E EH 700 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 246
LT 800-E EH 800 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 266
LT 150-EK EK 110, EK 150 280 153 178 203 47 72 97 168
LT 210-EK EK 175, EK 210 340 158 183 208 47 72 97 202
LT 550-EK EK 370, EK 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
* Positions of shroud
LT 210-EL, LT 210-EC LT 300-E ...LT 800-E, LT 150-EK ...LT 550-EK
Index Section
Section
9/ 38
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
EH 145 Drilling Plan
+ T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay
EH 175, EH 210 Drilling Plan
EH 175, EH 210 Drilling Plan
Dimensions (in mm)
EH 145 to EH 210 Contactors
with T - DU Thermal O/L Relays
14
1) 1)
11 11 124
20
4/T2 6/T3 2/T1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1 A2
42 42
D = 11
42 42
D = 11
20
1
1
1
2
8
8
1
0
1
1
E
0
2
2
1
D
5
6
126
40
143
4 91
19
62 4
E
0
2
2
2
D
5
6
7
.
3
3
5
.
5
1
2
0
50
37
110
(M5)
(M5)
E
0
2
2
0
D
5
136 12 12
1) 1)
45 45
20
D = 11
D = 11
20
42 42
1
1
1
2
43
1
5
1
0
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
14
E
0
2
2
4
D
5
168.5
103.5 5
10
15
6
74 4
138
1
3
4
2
)
E
0
2
2
5
D
5
1
1
D = 11
20
58 58
136 12 12
1) 1)
45 45
20
D = 11
1
6
6
.
5 3
3
6
1
0
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
2 4 6
E
0
2
2
7
D
5
168.5
103.5 5
10
15
46
173
5
6
1
3
4
2
)
E
0
2
2
8
D
5
1) Dimensions for additional CAL 16-11 auxiliary contact blocks.
(M6)
120
1
4
0
E
0
2
2
3
D
5
5
5
6
6
120
1
4
0
(M5) 76 22
(M6)
E
0
2
2
6
D
5
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
EH 260, EH 300 + T450 DU Drilling Plan
EH 370 + T 450 DU Drilling Plan
EH 370, EH 550 + T 900 DU Drilling Plan
Dimensions (in mm)
EH 260 to EH 550 Contactors
with T - DU Thermal O/L Relays
174.7
103.7 5
10
30
46
173
5
6
1
3
4
2
)
E
0
2
3
1
D
5
5
5
6
6
(M6)
160
1
4
0
(M5) 76 42
E
0
2
2
9
D
5
1
2
D = 11
25
58 58
176 10 10
1) 1)
62 62
25 D = 11
1
6
6
.
53
4
5
1
2
.
5
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
E
0
2
3
0
D
5
1
2
1
2
.
5
D = 11
25
198 11
1)
11
1)
58 58
25
67 67
D = 11
4/T2 6/T3 2/T1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1 A2
2
0
6
.
5
4
1
7
E
0
2
3
2
D
5
M10 23
140 6
226
40
46
173
5
6
E
0
2
3
3
D
5
5
5
7
6
2
0
0
(M5) 76 47
170
(M6)
E
0
2
3
4
D
5
1
2
1
2
.
5
Pour M6
D=11
25
198 11 11
1) 1)
83 83
30
67 67
D = 11
6 4 2
4/T2 6/T3 2/T1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1 A2
2
1
4
4
2
7
E
0
2
3
5
D
5
M10
23
140 6
226
40
61
209
5
6
E
0
2
3
6
D
5
8
0
2
0
0
(M6) 82 44
170
(M6)
E
0
2
3
8
D
5
Index Section
Section
9/ 40
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors
with T 900 DU Thermal O/L Relay
1
7
.
5
2
0
0
2
0
D = 11
40
244 9 9
1) 1)
83 83
40
82 82
D = 11
4/T2 6/T3 2/T1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1 A2
2
1
8
4
4
7
.
5
E
0
2
3
9
D
5
8
0
7
8
2
0
0
(M6) 82 69
220
(M6)
E
0
2
4
1
D
5
M10 23
140 6
226
40
60
209
6
6
E
0
2
4
0
D
5
2
0
3
4
.
5
2
0
D = 11
50
244 9 9
1) 1)
83 83
40
92 92
D = 11
6 4 2
4/T2 6/T3 2/T1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A1 A2
2
4
8
5
3
1
.
5
E
0
2
4
3
D
5
3
4
.
5
M10 23
140 6
226
40
58
209
8
6
E
0
2
4
4
D
5
8
0
1
0
8
2
0
0
(M6) 82 69
220
(M6)
E
0
8
6
5
D
Index Section
Section
9
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Dimensions (in mm)
Thermal O/L Relays and Accessories
TA 25 DU
*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type
TA 25 DU + DB 25 Drilling Plan
(TA 25 DU + DB 25/25 A or DB 25/32 A
for independent mounting)
**Refers to DB 25/32 A mounting kit
TA 25 DU + DS 25-A TA 25 DU + DR 25-A
*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type *Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type
TA 42 DU
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
2
A
B
B

8
4

7
5
6
3
/
1
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
3
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
4
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
5
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
6
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
1
Index Section
Section
9/ 42
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU + DB 80 Drilling Plan
(TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DU + DB 80
for independent mounting)
TA 110 DU - see page 9/21 T 200 DU - see page 9/38
T 450 DU/SU T 900 DU/SU
Dimensions (in mm)
Thermal O/L Relays and Accessories
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
7
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
8
A
B
B
9
7
0
0
9
A
B
B
9
7
0
1
0
S
S
T

0
7
9

9
1

M
/
1
S
S
T

0
3
7

9
0

M
S
S
T

0
7
1

9
1

M
/
2
S
S
T

0
3
6

9
0

M
S
S
T

0
3
7

9
0

M
Index Section
Section
Low Voltage Products 10/ 1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10
Reference Index
List of Addresses
Contents
Alphabetic Order acc. to Type .......................................................................................... 10/2
Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation ............................................................................... 10/4
ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World .............................................. 10/8
Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10/ 2
Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Type
Types Product Section/ page Types Product Section/ page
E
E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19
EH 145 to EH 800 3-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/13, 2/15
EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/16, 2/17
EHL 3-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
EKL 4-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
G
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching 2/28
K
K 6 Mini Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 6/6
K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 3/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
Mini Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 6/6
KBC 30G D.C. Coil for KC Contactor Relays
and BC 9 to BC 30 Contactors 4/29
KH A.C. or D.C. Coil for EH and EK Contactors 4/30
KL and KZ Main Contact Sets
for BC, TBC and EH 3-pole Contactors 4/28
KP Set including : 4/30
- 1 D.C. Coil + 1 Economy Resistor
+ 1 Insertion Contact for EH and EK Contactors
or
- 1 Multi-frequency coil + 1 Insertion Contact
for EH and EK Contactors with built-in rectifier
KW Arc Chutes for EH and EK Contactors 4/28
KX 800 A.C. or D.C. Coil
for Mechanical Latching Units
on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors 4/30
KZK Main Contact sets
for EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors 4/28
L
LB 6, LB 6-CA Base with Soldering Pins
for Mini Contactors and Auxiliary Contacts 6/7
LC 16, LC 25 and LC 26
for N and KC Contactor Relays
and A9 to A 26, BC 9 to BC 25 Contactors 4/21
LC 30-T, LC 26-B1 Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays and DB 25 Kit 5/7
LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22
LF, LG, LH, LP and LY
Terminal Connection Strips for Contactors 4/20
LK Control Lead Terminals 4/18
LP 6 Connecting Strip for Mini Contactors 6/7
LT Main Terminal Shrouds for
EH 145 to EH 800, EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors 4/23
Main Terminal Shrouds
for T 200 DU to T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
LT 6-B Protective Cover for Mini Contactors 6/7
LW Enlargement Terminal Parts 4/22
LX Extension Terminal Parts 4/22
A
A 9 to A 110 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12
4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
A 9-22 to A 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Operated 2/18
AE 45 22 to AE 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
D.C. Operated 2/19
AE 50 to AE 110 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
AF 45 to AF 110 Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26
AT 450 and AT 900 Kits for Mounting
T 450 DU/SU, TA 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays
on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7
B
B 6 and B 7 Mini Contactors - A.C. Operated 6/2
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
BA 5-50 Function Markers 4/19, 5/9
BC 6 and BC 7 Mini Contactors - D.C. Operated 6/2
Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
BC 9-22 to BC 25-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
D.C. Operated 2/19
BC 9-30 to BC 30-30 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14
BC 9-40 to BC 25-40 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
BED and BSD Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
BEM, BSH and BSM Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
BES Connections (downstream) for 3-pole contactors 4/24
BES and BSS Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/24
BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
BN 6 Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
BSM 6-30 Connecting Strip for VB and VBC
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7
BX-TP Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timer 4/8
C
CA 5-01, CA 5-10 1-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
CA 5...E, CA 5...M and CA 5...N
4-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
CA 6 and CAF 6 Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
CA 16 Additionnal Contact Blocks
for VH and VHV Interlock Units 4/11
CAL 5-11 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Block 4/4
CAL 16 and CCL 16 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
CB 5 Impulse Contact Blocks 4/18
CC 5 1-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
CCL 5-01 Insertion Contact + Varistor
for AE 95 and AE 110 Contactors 4/29
CDL 5-01 Insertion Contact + Varistor
for AE 45 to AE 75 Contactors 4/29
D
DB Separate Mounting Kit for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
DR 25 Remote Resetting Coil
for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
DS 25 Remote Tripping Coil
for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
DX 25 Terminal Block for 10 mm2
Cross-sectional Widening
for TA 25 DU 25 or DB 25/25 A 5/7
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10
Types Product Section/ page Types Product Section/ page
Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Type
N
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 3/6
O
OXFB Single Connectors for Cu Cables
- for EH 145 to EH 550 and EK 110 to EK 550
Contactors 4/21
- for T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
P
PN and PR Mounting Plates 4/26
R
RA 5, RA 30 Interface Relays for PLC Outputs 4/16
RC, RT and RV Surge Suppressor Blocks :
- for Contactor Coils 4/15
- for Mini Contactor Coils 4/15, 6/7
S
SK 824 to SK 828 EH 145 to EH 800 Mechanically
Interlocked Contactors - Side by Side Mounting 2/30
EH 145 to EH 800
Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
T
T-V_1000 and TA-V_1000
Thermal O/L Relays for EEx e Motor Protection 5/18
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relays for Mini Contactors 6/17
T 200 DU to T 900 DU/SU
Thermal O/L Relays 5/5, 5/6
TA 25 DU to TA 110 DU
Thermal O/L Relays 5/4, 5/5
TAE 45-40 to TAE 75-40
4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24
TAE 50-30 to TAE 110-30
TBC 7 Mini Contactors - D.C. Operated
TBC 9-22 to TBC 25-22
TBC 9-30 to TBC 30-30
TBC 9-40 to TBC 25-40
TC Single Connectors for Al or Cu Cables 4/21
TCD Double Connectors for Al or Cu Cables 4/21
TE 5S Electronic Timer for Star-Delta Starters 4/6
TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
TKC6 Mini Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
TP ... DA Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
(Timing on Energization)
TP ... IA Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
(Timing on De-energization)
U
UA 26 to UA 110 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/21
UA 16.. -R to UA 75.. -R
3-pole Contactors c/w resistors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/22
V
VB 6 and VB 7 Compact Reversing Mini Contactors
A.C. Operated 6/3, 6/4
VBC 6 and VBC 7 Compact Reversing Mini Contactors
D.C. Operated 6/3, 6/4
VBC 30 Mechanical Interlock Unit 4/11
VE 5-1, VE 5-2 Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
VH 145 to VH 300 Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
VH 145 W to VH 300 WMechanical Interlock Units 4/11
VH 550, VH 800 Mechanical Interlock Units 4/11
VHV and VKW Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
VM5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit 4/11
W
WB 75-A and WH Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Z
ZA A.C. Coils for N Contactor Relays
and A, UA, UA..-R Contactors 4/29
ZAE D.C. Coils for AE Contactors 4/29
ZAF A.C./D.C. Coils for AF Contactors
with Controlled Supply 4/29
ZL and ZLU Main Contact Sets
for A, AE, AF, TAE and UA, UA..-R
3-pole Contactors 4/28
ZLT Main Contact Sets
for A, AE and AF 4-pole Contactors 4/28
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10/ 4
Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation
Designation Section/page Designation Section/ page
A
Accessoriability:
- A, AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2
- BC Contactors 2/11
- EH, EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2
- KC, TKC Contactor Relays 3/5
- N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2
- TAE, TBC Contactors 2/24
Accessories for A, AE, EH and EK Contactors
and N Contactor Relays - Compatibility 4/3
Accessories for Contactors and N Contactor Relays 4/1
Accessories for Contactor Connection Terminals 4/22
Accessories for Mini Contactors 6/7
Accessories for Mounting of the TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/7...5/9
Accessories for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Amp-rating acc. to CSA and UL 7/7
Approvals and Certifications 7/4...7/7
Approvals: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays - O/L Relays 6/13, 6/19
Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28
B
Base with Soldering Pins for Mini Contactors 6/7
Blocks (Accessory Blocks):
- Additional Contact Blocks for Mechanical
and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4, 4/5
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks with Varistor for AE Contactors 4/29
- BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
- BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Impulse Contact Block - CB 5 Type 4/18
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/14, 4/15
- Surge Suppressors Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
BV Bureau Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
C
Capacitor Switching 2/202/23
Categories: Utilization Categories - General Technical Data 7/10, 7/11
Categories: Utilization Categories
and Electrical Durability of the Contactors 2/552/60
CENELEC: see European and National Specifications 7/2
Certifications and Approvals 7/4, 7/5
Climate (Climatic Withstand of Devices) 7/13
Co-ordination with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Code for Coil Voltage: AF Contactors 2/26
Code for Coil Voltage: Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
Code for Coil Voltage: Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Code for Coil Voltage: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1
Code for Coil Voltage: TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Coil for AE Contactor: Principle Diagrams 2/15, 2/17
Coils for Contactors 4/29, 4/30
Coil for D.C. Operated Contactors, Large Voltage Range:
- see TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24, 2/25
- see TBC 7 Mini Contactors and TKC 6 Contactor Relays 6/8
- see TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Coil for Mechanical Latching Units 4/30
Coil for Remote Resetting of the TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
Coil for Remote Tripping of the TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
Coil: Voltage Code for Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
Coil: Voltage Code for Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Coil: Voltage Code for Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1
Coil: Voltage Code for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Coil with Controlled Supply, A.C./D.C.: AF Contactors 2/26
Conformity (Standards - Approvals - Certification) 7/3...7/7
Connecting Auxiliaries for Control Leads 4/18
C (cont.)
Connection (Mode and Capacity) 7/14, 7/15
Connection of Main Poles (Parallel Connection) 2/54
Connection for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25
Connections for Control Leads 4/18
Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
- Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/1...8/9
Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
- Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
Connectors for EH and EK Contactors 4/21
Connectors for T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
Contacts:
- Additional Contacts for Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
- Auxiliary Contacts 4/4, 4/5
- Auxiliary Contacts for Mini Contactors 6/7
- CB 5 Impulse Contacts 4/18
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28
Contactors:
G A and AE Contactors: Description 2/6
G AF Contactors 2/26
G BC Contactors: Description 2/10
G EH and EK Contactors: Description 2/8
G EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
G EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
G EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
G GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
G UA Contactors 2/21
G UA..-R Contactors 2/22
G A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- Ordering Details 2/12
- Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
- Technical Data 2/32-34-36
G AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G AF Contactors 3 and 4-pole
with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C.Operated:
- Description 2/26
- Technical Data 2/26
G BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- Selection Table 2/3
G EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G A 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- Selection Table 2/4
G A 4-pole Contactors
with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - A.C. Operated:
G AE 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G AE 4-pole Contactors
with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated:
G BC 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G BC 4-pole Contactors
with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated:
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10
C (cont.)
G EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- Selection Table 2/4, 2/5
G EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
G TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
G UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21
G UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23
Contactor Relays - N Type:
- Description 3/2
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9
Contactor Relays - KC Type:
- Description 3/4
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9
Contactor Relays - TKC Type:
- Description 3/4
- Technical Data 3/7
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors 2/50
Control Circuit: Influence of the Length
of the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53
Controlled Supply - A.C./D.C. Operated 2/26
Cover for Mini Contactors (Protective Cover) 6/7
Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers (Sealing Cover) 4/8
CSA: see Specifications in Canada and the USA 7/2
Current: Motor Nominal Currents - Table of Values 0/0
Current (Direct current): see D.C. Circuit Switching 2/46, 6/12
D
D.C. Circuit Switching:
- Contactors 2/462/48
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11
Description of A and AE Contactors 2/6
Description of BC Contactors 2/10
Description of EH and EK Contactors 2/8
Description of EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
Description of EHL and EKL Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
Description of GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
Description of KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/4
Description of N Contactor Relays 3/2
Description of TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
Diagrams for Star-Delta Starters 8/10
Diagrams: see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
Dimensions:
- Contactors - Contactor Relays - Thermal O/L Relays - Accessories 9/1
- Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/15, 6/16
- Plates for EH and EK Contactors 4/27
Directives:
- 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive: see European Directives 7/2
- 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive:
see European Directives 7/2
- 89/392/CEE Machine Directive: see European Directives 7/2
DNV Det Norske Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
Drilling plans: see Dimensions 9/1
Durability:
- Electrical Durability and Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/55...2/60
Duty (Intermittent Duty and Temporary Duty): Suitable Coefficient 2/54
E
Electrical Durability, Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/552/60
Electronic O/L Relay - E 16 DU 5/19
Enlargement Terminal Parts - LW Type 4/22
European Directives 7/2
Extension Terminal Parts - LX Type 4/22
F
Faston:
- see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
- see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
Fitting of Accessories - A and AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2
Fitting of Accessories - BC Contactors 2/11
Fitting of Accessories - EH and EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2
Fitting of Accessories - KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/5
Fitting of Accessories - N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2
Fixing - Drilling plans - Screw Diameter: see Dimensions 9/1
Fuses 5/14
G
General Technical Data 7/2...7/16
H
Holder for Fuse - BL 5-F Type 4/19
Holder for Lamp - BL 5-L Type 4/19
I
Identification Marker - BA 5-50 Type 4/19, 5/9
Identification Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
IEC: see International Specifications 7/2
IEC 947-4-1 - Co-ordination Table,
with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Influence of the Conductor Length for the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53
Interface Relays for PLC Outputs - RA 5 and RA 30 Types 4/16, 4/17
Interlock Units (Mechanical and Electrical) 4/10, 4/11
IP Degrees of Protection 7/12
ISO: see International Specifications 7/2
ISO 9000 see Quality - (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
J
Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
(E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relays) 5/22
(TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16
(T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relays) 6/19
K
Kits for mounting T 450 DU/SU
and T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7
Kits for Separate mounting TA 25 DU to T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
L
Latching Units 4/12, 4/13
Liability (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
Lighting Circuit Switching:
- Contactors Selection 2/44, 2/45
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors Selection 6/11
LRS Lloyds Register of Shipping:
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10/ 6
M
Marking:
- CE Marking: see European Directives 7/2
- Marking of Contactors and Contactor Relays 8/2
- Terminal Marking and Positioning:
Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/3...8/9
- Terminal Marking and Positioning:
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
- Terminal Marking: General - Standards 8/2
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactors Relays - Mini Thermal O/L Relays:
- B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- T 7 DU Mini Thermal O/L Relays 6/17
- TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7, VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3
Motor Nominal Powers - Table of values 0/0
Motor Protection - Choice of Protection Device 5/14
Motor-rating acc. to CSA, UL 7/6
Motors: EEx e Protection Motor (Choice of Thermal O/L Relays) 5/18
Motors: Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0
Mounting Distance between BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17
Mounting Distance between BC 4-pole Contactors
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
Mounting Distance between KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/6,3/7
Mounting Positions - AE and BC 4-pole Contactors
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
Mounting Positions - BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17
Mounting Positions - KC Contactor Relays 3/6
O
Ordering Details - General Informations 0/2
Ordering Details:
- A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12
- A 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
- A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/18
- AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
- AE 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
- AF 3 and 4-pole Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26
- Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- B(C) 6, B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- BA 5-50 Identification Marker 4/19, 5/9
- Base for Mini Contactors 6/7
- BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14
- BC 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
- BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
- BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
- BL 5-F Fuse Holder Blocks 4/19
- BL 5-L Lamp Holder Blocks 4/19
- CB 5 Impulse Contact Block 4/18
- Coil for Mechanical Latching Units 4/30
- Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3, 6/4
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7
- Connecting Strips for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Connections for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
- Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25
- Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
- Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
- Connectors for EH and EK Contactors
and T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay 4/21, 5/9
- Contactor Coils 4/29
- DX 25 Widening Terminal Block 5/7
- EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/13
- EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
O (cont.)
- EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
- EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
- EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
- EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
- EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Function Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
- GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22
- LK Control Lead Terminals 4/18
- LW Enlargement Terminal Parts 4/22
- LX Extension Terminal Parts 4/22
- Main Terminal Shrouds for T 200 DU
to T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
- Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
- Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
- Mounting Kits for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- N and KC Contactor Relays 3/6
- O/L Relays 5/1
- Plates for Contactors 4/26
- Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
- Protective Cover for Mini Contactor 6/7
- RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/16
- Remote Resetting Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
- Remote Tripping Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
- Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers 4/8
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- Surge Suppressor Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors 6/17
- TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/4...5/6
- TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
- TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6
- Terminal Connecting Strips 4/20
- TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/8
- UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21
- UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23
P
Packaging - General Informations 0/2
Packaging of the Equipment and Accessories:
see Ordering Details Pages -
Plates for Contactors 4/26, 4/27
Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
Product Range Prsentation 1/2...1/6
Protection - IP Protection Degrees 7/12
Protection Devices - Co-ordination 7/17...7/21
Protection: Choice of Motor Protection Device 5/14
PRS Polski Rejestr Statkow: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
Q
Quality Assurance: see Quality (on the back of General Content) Section 0
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10
R
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase
(E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay) 5/22
(T7 DU Thermal O/L Relay) 6/19
(TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16
R.I.Na Registro Italiano Navale:
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
S
Screw: Screw for Control Lead Connection
to the Main Poles of EH and EK Contactors 4/18
Selection Guide - Star-Delta Starting 2/31
Sets:
- Coil Sets for EH and EK Contactors 4/29
- Power Connection Sets 4/24, 4/25
Short Circuit Protection - Co-ordination with Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Shrouds for Main Terminals (EH and EK Contactors) 4/23
Shrouds for Main Terminal
(T 200 DU and T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays) 5/9
Standards:
- IEC 947-4-1 Standard 7/17...7/21
- National, European and International Standards 7/3
- Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations 7/2
- Terminal Marking Standards 8/2
Slip-ring Motor Switching 2/50
Star-Delta Starters - Diagrams 8/10
Star-Delta Starting - Control Gear Selecting Guide 2/31
Strips :
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7
- Connecting Strip for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Terminal Connecting Strips for Contactors 4/20
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils 4/14, 4/15
Switching:
- Capacitor Switching:
see Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/202/23
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Contactors 2/462/48
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Mini Contactors -
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11
- Selection of Contactors for Lighting Circuits 2/44
- Selection of Mini Contactors
and Compact Reversing Contactors for Lighting Circuits 6/12
- Transformer Switching (LV/LV 3-phase Transformer) 2/49
T
Tables for Co-ordination with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Table for Selection of A and EH 3-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated)
and Thermal O/L Relays 2/2, 2/3
Table for Selection of A and EK 4-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated) 2/4, 2/5
Table for Selection of TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/2, 5/3
Table of Motor Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0
Technical data:
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/5
- A Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/32-34-36
- BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/38-40-42
- EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/33-35-37
- EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/39-41-43
- TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
- N and KC Contactor Relays 3/8, 3/9
- TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- B 6, BC 6 and B 6S Mini Contactors 6/9
- B 7, BC 7 and B 7S Mini Contactors 6/10
- K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/9
T (cont.)
- VB 6, VBC 6, VB 6A and VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/9
- VB 7, VBC 7, VB 7A and VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/10
- RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/17
- TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/11...5/13
- T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
- TE5S Electronic Timer 4/7
- Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
- Mechanical Latching Units 4/13
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/9
Terminal Block for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110:
- LD 110 Additional Block 4/22
Terminal Block for TA 25 DU 25 or DB 22/25 A:
- Widening Terminal Block 5/7
Terminals for Auxiliary Control Lead - LK Type 4/18
Terminals: Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays:
see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
Terminals: Mini Contactors - Contactor Relays:
see Terminal Marking and Positioning 6/14
Terms and Technical Definitions 7/8, 7/9
Test Certifying Organizations 7/3
Thermal O/L Relays:
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Description 5/10
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Ordering Details 5/4...5/6
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Panorama 5/2, 5/3
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Technical Data 5/11...5/13
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Tripping Curves 5/17
Thermal O/L Relays T 7 DU for Mini Contactors 6/18
Thermal O/L Relays for Protection of the EEx e Motors
- Choice of Thermal O/L Relays 5/18
Tightening Torques 7/16
Timer for Star-Delta Starters: TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6, 4/7
TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
Transformer Switching - Selection of Contactors 2/49
Tripping Curves for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/17
Tripping Curves for T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
U
UL: see Specifications in Canada and the USA 7/2
Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability 2/552/60
V
Varistor:
- see CDL5-01 and CCL5-01 Auxiliary Devices. 4/29
- see Surge Suppressor Blocks for Contactors Coils. 4/14, 4/15
- see Surge Suppressor Blocks for Mini Contactors. 6/7
Voltage for Coil Supply:
- Order Code Supplement: Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
- Order Code Supplement: Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
- Order Code Supplement: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1
- Order Code Supplement: TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
W
Weight of the Equipment and Accessories: see pages Ordering Details -
Withstand of Devices (Climatic Conditions) 7/13
Section
Section
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10/ 8
ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World
Europe
AUSTRIA ABB Komponenten Ges.m.b.H. Phone : (43) 1601090
Wiernerbergstrasse 11B Fax : (43) 1601098910
Business Park Vienna
AT - 1810 WIEN
BELGIUM ABB S.A. NV Phone : (32) 27186311
Hoge Wei, 27 Fax : (32) 27186666
BE - 1930 ZAVENTEM
BULGARIA ABB Ltd Phone : (359) 29800450
5, Triaditsa street Fax : (359) 29800846
BG - 1040 SOFIA
CROATIA ABB Phone : (385) 12335355
Trg. J.F. Kennedya 7 Fax : (385) 1228836
HR - 41000 ZAGREB
CZECH REPUBLIC ABB EJF, a.s. Phone : (42) 543216742
Hybesova 30 Fax : (42) 5331489
CZ - 60200 BRNO
DENMARK ABB Komponents A/S Phone : (45) 43999111
Helgeshoj All 8-10 Fax : (45) 43991950
P.O. Box 230
DK - 2630 TAASTRUP
ESTONIA ABB Eesti Phone : (372) 6711800
Prnu mnt 148 Fax : (372) 6711814
EE - 0013 TALLINN
FINLAND ABB Control Oy Phone : (358) 10224000
Strmberg Park Fax : (358) 102245708
Muottitie 2A
P.O. Box 622
FI - 65101 VAASA
FRANCE ABB Diffusion Phone : (33) 472221992
10, rue Ampre - Z.I., B.P. 114 Fax : (33) 478902758
FR - 69685 CHASSIEU Cedex
GERMANY ABB SST GmbH Phone : (49) 62217770
Eppelheimerstrasse 82 Fax : (49) 6221777111
DE - 69123 HEIDELBERG 1
GREECE ABB Trade S.A. Phone : (30) 12891900
13
th
KM National Road Fax : (30) 12891999
Athens-Lamia
GR - 144 52 METAMORPHOSSI ATTICA
HUNGARY ABB Ltd Phone : (36) 12701555
Vaci ut 152-156 Fax : (36) 12698723
P.O. Box 95
HU - 1138 BUDAPEST
ICELAND Johan Rnning HF Phone : (354) 5684000
Sundaborg 15 Fax : (354) 5688221
IS - 104 REYKJAVIK
IRELAND ABB Components Phone : (353) 14057300
Belgard Road Fax : (353) 14057315
IE - TALLAGHT - DUBLIN 24
ITALIA ABB Elettrocondutture S.p.A. Phone : (39) 290341
Viale dell'industria, 18 Fax : (39) 290347609
IT - 20010 VITTUONE (MI)
LATVIA ABB Latvia SIA Phone : (371) 2249087
15 Krustpils street Fax : (371) 9341877
LV - 1073 RIGA
LITHUANIA ABB UAB Phone : (37) 02738300
Saltoniskiu, 14 Fax : (37) 02738394
LT - 2034 VILNIUS
LUXEMBOURG LU ABB Phone : (352) 493116
Zone Industrielle Grasbusch Fax : (352) 492859
LU - 3370 LEUDELANGE
NETHERLANDS ABB Componenten BV Phone : (31) 102582250
Lylantse Baan 9 Fax : (31) 104586559
P.O. Box 532
NL - 2908 LG CAPELLE A/D IJSSEL
Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.
Europe (cont.)
NORWAY ABB Control AS Phone : (47) 31297000
Industriveien Fax : (47) 31286657
NO - 3430 SPIKKESTAD
POLAND ABB Industrial Components Ltd Phone : (48) 22118266
ul. Marywilska 22 Fax : (48) 22117582
PL - 03 228 VARSOVIE
PORTUGAL ABB Componentes Elctricos S.A. Phone : (351) 14169200
Estrada do Casal de Canas Fax : (351) 14169250
P.O. Box 7573 Alfragide
PT - 2700 AMADORA
ROMANIA ABB Ltd Phone : (40) 13300495
Street I. Cimpineanu 16 Fax : (40) 13300630
P.O. Box 1-871 - 5
th
Floor
RO - 70100 BUCHAREST
RUSSIA ABB Industrial & Building Systems Phone : (7) 0951209004
23, Profsoyuznaya street Fax : (7) 0951204490
RU - 117 859 MOSCOW
SLOVAKIA ABB Komponenty s.r.o. Phone : (421) 956253206
Magnezitarska 11 Fax : (421) 956253209
SK - 04305 KOSICE
SPAIN ABB Electrocomponentes S.A. Phone : (34) 34842121
Torrent de l'Olla, 220 Fax : (34) 34842190
ES - 08012 BARCELONA
SWEDEN ABB Control AB Phone : (46) 21320700
Saltngsvgen, 26 Fax : (46) 21126001
SE - 721 61 VASTERAS
SWITZERLAND ABB CMC Components Phone : (41) 14356666
Badenerstrasse 790 Fax : (41) 14356699
CH - 8048 ZURICH
TURKEY ABB Elektrik Sanayi A.S. Phone : (90) 2163652900
Yukari Dudullu Imes Fax : (90) 2163652940
P.O. Box 3
TR - 81260 UMRANIYE-ISTANBUL
UNITED KINGDOM ABB Control Ltd Phone : (44) 1203368500
Grovelands House Fax : (44) 1203364499
Longford Road - Exhall
GB - CV7 9ND COVENTRY
YUGOSLAVIA ABB Phone : (381) 11344341
Emilijana Josimovica 4 Fax : (381) 11341623
YU - 11000 BELGRAD
Section
Section
Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10
Africa
ALGERIA ABB S.A. Phone : (213) 2607662
Cit des PTT - 14, rue A Fax : (213) 2691106
P.O. Box 156
DZ - 16035 HYDRA ALGER
EGYPT ABB ARAB SAE Phone : (20) 22968001
7, Dr. Mohamed Kamel Hussein Fax : (20) 22966776
ABB Bldg - El Nozha - El Gedieda
EG - Heliopolis / CAIRO
GHANA ABB Ltd Phone : (233) 21231952
1 Dr. Insert Road Fax : (233) 21231954
North Ridge
P.O. Box 3758
GH - ACCRA
IVORY COST ABB S.A. Phone : (225) 354265
Rue du Canal - Zone 4 Fax : (225) 350414
P.O. Box 01 BP 1048
CI - ABIDJAN 01
ABB Sub-Sahara Africa Ltd Phone : (225) 329975/76
Immeuble Sidam Fax : (225) 329978
34, avenue Houdaille
01 BP V 215
CI - ABIDJAN 01
KENYA ABB Ltd Phone : (254) 2861570/1
Baba Dogo road, Ruaraka Fax : (254) 2861574
P.O. Box 39120
KE - NAIROBI
MOROCCO ABB S.A. Phone : (212) 2310899
119, boulevard Emile Zola Fax : (212) 2311121
9
me
tage
MA - 20300 CASABLANCA
NIGERIA ABB Ltd Phone : (234) 14528661
Industrial avenue, Plot C, Block 1 Fax : (234) 14528660
P.O. Box 21055
NG - (LAGOS) IKEJA
SENEGAL ABB Herlicq Phone : (221) 8322017
Co Herlicq & Frres Fax : (221) 8322057
Bd du Centenaire, Km 3,5
P.O. Box 3158
SN - DAKAR
SOUTH AFRICA ABB Installation Materials Phone : (27) 116533526
86, Tsessebe Crescent, Unit 4 Fax : (27) 116533506
Sage Corporate Park
Old Pretoria Road, Midrand
ZA - JOHANNESBURG
TANZANIA ABB Ltd Phone : (255) 51112432
Nkrumah/Gerezani street Fax : (255) 51116738
D.T. Dodie Building
P.O. Box 4882
TZ - DAR ES SALAAM
ABB Tanelec Ltd Phone : (255) 578027
Themi Industrial Area Fax : (255) 578212
P.O. Box 7156
TZ - ARUSHA
TUNISIA Tunisian Telecom Electric Phone : (216) 1781104
Rue n 8600, Z.I. 2035 CHARGUIA Fax : (216) 1780464
P.O. Box 300
TN - 1002 TUNIS BELVEDERE
ABB Electric S.A Phone : (216) 1860366
Les Berges du Lac Fax : (216) 1860255
Immeuble BADR 2
P.O. Box 381
TN - 1080 TUNIS Cedex
ZIMBABWE ABB (PVT) Ltd Phone : (263) 4773594
ABB House Fax : (263) 4753537
88 Rezende street
P.O. Box 2107
ZW - HARARE
North America
U.S.A. ABB Control Inc. Phone : 1 (940) 3977000
1206 Hatton road Fax : 1 (940) 3977001
P.O. Box 156
US - WICHITA FALLS TX 76302
CANADA ABB Control Phone : (514) 3325350
10,300 bd Henri-Bourassa Ouest Fax : (514) 8326522
ST LAURENT
CA - QUEBEC H4S 1N6
South America
ARGENTINA ABB S.A. Phone : (54) 12085471
Jos I. Rucci 1051 Fax : (54) 12085470
1822 Valentin Alsina
AR - BUENOS AIRES
TUBIO TUCUMAN S.A. Phone : (54) 17776116
Avenida Cordoba, 6063/6065 Fax : (54) 17725907
CP 1427
AR - BUENOS AIRES
BOLIVIA ABB Ltda Phone : (591) 2332710
Av. 20 de Octubre, 2315 Fax : (591) 2315623
Edificio Mechita, Piso 1
BO - LA PAZ
BRAZIL ABB Ltda Phone : (55) 117049111
Avenida Dos Autonomistas, 1496 Fax : (55) 117049993
CP 975
BR - 06020-902 OSASCO - SP
CHILE ABB S.A. Phone : (56) 25550051
Vicuna Mackenna 1602 Fax : (56) 25569345
P.O. Box 581-3
CL - SANTIAGO
COLOMBIA ABB Ltda Phone : (57) 14156566
Av. El Eldorado Fax : (57) 14155153
Carrera 100 n 45-A-11
P.O. Box 6195 / 3984
CO - BOGOTA D.E
ECUADOR ABB S.A. Phone : (593) 2500645
Sucur. n 8 Fax : (593) 2500650
Calle Ulloa 1194 y Mariana de Jesus
P.O. Box 17-08-8431
EC - QUITO
MEXICO ABB Sistemas, SA de CV Phone : (52) 53281618
P.O. Box M - 2434 Fax : (52) 53281690
Henry Ford n 4 Esq. Via Gustavo Baz
MX - 06000 MEXICO, D.F.
PERU ABB S.A. Phone : (51) 15610404
Avenida Argentina, 3120 Fax : (51) 15613040
P.O. Box 2493
PE - LIMA 100
URUGUAY ABB Industria UY Phone : (598) 2777300
Av. Luis P. Ponce, 1485 Fax : (598) 2777466
UY - MONTEVIDEO
VENEZUELA ABB S.A. Phone : (58) 22382411/22
Los Ruices, Edificio ABB Fax : (58) 22395834
Avda. Diego Cisneros
P.O. Box 6649 - Carmelitas
VE - CARACAS 1070 A
Section
Section
Main Summary
Main Summary
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
10/ 10
Asia
HONG KONG ABB Industrial & Building System Ltd Phone : (852) 29293838
3 Dai Hei street Fax : (852) 29293501
TAI PO Industrial Estate
HK - HONG KONG
INDIA ABB Ltd Phone : (91) 808399349
ILA Division Fax : (91) 808399349
N A18A2, 3 Road Stage
Peenya Industrial Estate
IN - BANGALORE 560 052
INDONESIA PT Abdibangun Buana Phone : (62) 213149115
Jln. Cikini Raya 69, Building B Fax : (62) 213153964
Tromol Pos. 3781
ID - JAKARTA 10002
ISRAEL S. Kahane Agencies Ltd Phone : (972) 9851299
1 Ha'Omanuyot street Fax : (972) 9851240
P.O. Box 62.62
South Industrial Zone
IL - NETANYA 42160
JORDAN Billeh Electrical Materials Co. Phone : (962) 6656987
Jabal Al Hussein - Salah Aldeen Street Fax : (962) 6649216
P.O. Box 4343
JO - AMMAN
KOREA ABB Ltd Phone : (82) 25283131
157-33, Samsung-Dong Fax : (82) 25283100
Oksan Building 5-9 floor
Kangnam-Ku
KR - 135-090 SEOUL
KUWAIT ABB Electrical Co. Phone : (965) 2428626
Commercial Area N 1, Gulf road Fax : (965) 2403139
Khalid Saleh Al-Ghunaim Building
P.O. Box 4275
KW - 13043 SAFAT
LEBANON AL-BONIAN Group Phone : (961) 1866694
Verdun - Ain El Tineh Fax : (961) 1869564
P.O. Box 13 5470
LB - BEYROUTH
HARB Electric Phone : (961) 821625
Airport road - Fakhry Bldg Fax : (961) 821626
P.O. Box 15-5101
LB - BEIRUT
MALAYSIA ABB Components Sdn Bhd Phone : (60) 39733188
N 18, Persiaran 118C Fax : (60) 39738188
Desa Tun Razak
CHERAS
MY - 56000 KUALA LUMPUR
PAKISTAN Ameejee Valleejee & Sons Phone : (92) 212625492
Campbell street Fax : (92) 212627817
P.O. Box 51
PK - 74200 KARACHI
PHILIPPINES ABB Industry Inc. Phone : (63) 28244581
KM 20, South Superhighway Fax : (63) 28246616
Paranaque, Metro Manila
P.O. Box 1897
PH - METRO MANILLES
SAUDI ARABIA ABB Electrical Industries Co. Ltd Phone : (966) 14980088
P.O. Box 8796 Fax : (966) 14985487
SA - RIYADH 11492
SINGAPORE ABB Industry Pte Ltd Phone : (65) 7765711
2 Ayer Rajah Crescent Fax : (65) 7780222
SG - SINGAPOUR 139 935
TAIWAN ABB Ltd Phone : (886) 25799322
126, Nanking East Road Fax : (886) 25775826
6F World Building, Section 4
P.O. Box 81-54
TW - TAIPEI
THAILAND ABB Ltd Phone : (66) 23240505
322 Moo, 4 Bangpoo Industrial Estate Fax : (66) 23240502
Sukuhmvit Road
TH - SAMUTPRAKARN 10280
U.A.E. ABB Ltd Phone : (971) 4347788
Office Building 250 B Fax : (971) 4347557
P.O. Box 11070
DUBAI
Oceania
AUSTRALIA ABB Transmission & Distribution Ltd Phone : (61) 296028222
376/386 Newbridge Road Fax : (61) 296022454
AU - LIVERPOOL NSW 2170
NEW ZEALAND ABB Switchgear Division Phone : (64) 98371234
133 Central Park Drive Fax : (64) 98372950
Edmonton
NZ - AUCKLAND
Section
Section
Main Summary
Main Summary

Catálogo Completo Contatores

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catálogo Completo Contatores

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Main Catalogue Contactors

A 95, A 110 AE 95, AE 110

via SPEM electronic

You might also like